This is a modern-English version of Travels in the Interior of Africa — Volume 01, originally written by Park, Mungo.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
CASSELL’S NATIONAL LIBRARY
Cassell's National Library
Traveling
in the
Africa's interior
BY
MUNGO PARK
BY
Mungo Park
Vol. I.
Vol. I.
CASSELL & COMPANY Limited
LONDON PARIS &
MELBOURNE
1893
CASSELL & COMPANY Limited
London, Paris & Melbourne
1893
INTRODUCTION
Mungo Park was born on the 10th of September, 1771, the son of a farmer at Fowlshiels, near Selkirk. After studying medicine in Edinburgh, he went out, at the age of twenty-one, assistant-surgeon in a ship bound for the East Indies. When he came back the African Society was in want of an explorer, to take the place of Major Houghton, who had died. Mungo Park volunteered, was accepted, and in his twenty-fourth year, on the 22nd of May, 1795, he sailed for the coasts of Senegal, where he arrived in June.
Mungo Park was born on September 10, 1771, the son of a farmer in Fowlshiels, near Selkirk. After studying medicine in Edinburgh, he went out at the age of twenty-one as an assistant surgeon on a ship heading to the East Indies. When he returned, the African Society needed an explorer to replace Major Houghton, who had passed away. Mungo Park volunteered, was accepted, and at twenty-four, on May 22, 1795, he set sail for the coasts of Senegal, arriving there in June.
Thence he proceeded on the travels of which this book is the record. He was absent from England for a little more than two years and a half; returned a few days before Christmas, 1797. He was then twenty-six years old. The African Association published the first edition of his travels as “Travels in the Interior Districts of Africa, 1795–7, by Mungo Park, with an Appendix containing Geographical Illustrations of Africa, by Major Rennell.”
Thence he continued on the journeys that this book documents. He was away from England for just over two and a half years, returning a few days before Christmas in 1797. He was then twenty-six years old. The African Association published the first edition of his travels as “Travels in the Interior Districts of Africa, 1795–7, by Mungo Park, with an Appendix containing Geographical Illustrations of Africa, by Major Rennell.”
Park married, and settled at Peebles in medical practice, but was persuaded by the Government to go out again. He sailed from Portsmouth on the 30th of January, 1805, resolved to trace the Niger to its source or perish in the attempt. He perished. The natives attacked him while passing through a narrow strait of the river at Boussa, and killed him, with all that remained of his party, except one slave. The record of this fatal voyage, partly gathered from his journals, and closed by evidences of the manner of his death, was first published in 1815, as “The Journal of a Mission to the Interior of Africa in 1805, by Mungo Park, together with other Documents, Official and Private, relating to the same Mission. To which is prefixed an Account of the Life of Mr. Park.”
Park got married and settled in Peebles to practice medicine, but the Government convinced him to go out again. He departed from Portsmouth on January 30, 1805, determined to trace the Niger to its source or die trying. He did die. The locals attacked him while he was passing through a narrow part of the river at Boussa, killing him along with all but one of his party. The account of this tragic voyage, partly compiled from his journals and concluding with details of his death, was first published in 1815 as “The Journal of a Mission to the Interior of Africa in 1805, by Mungo Park, together with other Documents, Official and Private, relating to the same Mission. To which is prefixed an Account of the Life of Mr. Park.”
H. M.
H.M.
CHAPTER I.
TRIP FROM PORTSMOUTH TO THE GAMBIA.
Soon after my return from the East Indies in 1793, having learned that the noblemen and gentlemen associated for the purpose of prosecuting discoveries in the interior of Africa were desirous of engaging a person to explore that continent, by the way of the Gambia river, I took occasion, through means of the President of the Royal Society, to whom I had the honour to be known, of offering myself for that service. I had been informed that a gentleman of the name of Houghton, a captain in the army, and formerly fort-major at Goree, had already sailed to the Gambia, under the direction of the Association, and that there was reason to apprehend he had fallen a sacrifice to the climate, or perished in some contest with the natives. But this intelligence, instead of deterring me from my purpose, animated me to persist in the offer of my services with the greater solicitude. I had a passionate desire to examine into the productions of a country so little known, and to become experimentally acquainted with the modes of life and character of the natives. I knew that I was able to bear fatigue, and I relied on my youth and the strength of my constitution to preserve me from the effects of the climate. The salary which the committee allowed was sufficiently large, and I made no stipulation for future reward. If I should perish in my journey, I was willing that my hopes and expectations should perish with me; and if I should succeed in rendering the geography of Africa more familiar to my countrymen, and in opening to their ambition and industry new sources of wealth and new channels of commerce, I knew that I was in the hands of men of honour, who would not fail to bestow that remuneration which my successful services should appear to them to merit. The committee of the Association having made such inquiries as they thought necessary, declared themselves satisfied with the qualifications that I possessed, and accepted me for the service; and, with that liberality which on all occasions distinguishes their conduct, gave me every encouragement which it was in their power to grant, or which I could with propriety ask.
Soon after I returned from the East Indies in 1793, I learned that the noblemen and gentlemen associated to explore the interior of Africa were looking for someone to investigate that continent via the Gambia River. I took the opportunity, through the President of the Royal Society, whom I had the honor to know, to offer my services for that mission. I had been informed that a man named Houghton, a captain in the army and former fort-major at Goree, had already sailed to the Gambia under the direction of the Association and there were concerns he had succumbed to the climate or met with trouble with the locals. However, this news only fueled my determination to offer my services with even more eagerness. I had a strong desire to explore the resources of a place so little known and to understand the lifestyles and character of the natives personally. I was confident in my ability to withstand hardship, relying on my youth and strong constitution to protect me from the climate’s effects. The salary the committee offered was generous enough, and I made no demands for future rewards. If I were to perish on my journey, I was okay with my hopes and expectations perishing with me; if I succeeded in making the geography of Africa more familiar to my fellow countrymen and opening new opportunities for wealth and trade, I trusted that I was in good hands with honorable men who would properly reward my successful efforts. After the committee of the Association conducted their inquiries, they expressed satisfaction with my qualifications and accepted me for the mission. They showed the generosity that always characterizes their actions, providing me with every encouragement they could offer and that I could reasonably request.
It was at first proposed that I should accompany Mr. James Willis, who was then recently appointed consul at Senegambia, and whose countenance in that capacity, it was thought, might have served and protected me; but Government afterwards rescinded his appointment, and I lost that advantage. The kindness of the committee, however, supplied all that was necessary. Being favoured by the secretary of the Association, the late Henry Beaufoy, Esq., with a recommendation to Dr. John Laidley (a gentleman who had resided many years at an English factory on the banks of the Gambia), and furnished with a letter of credit on him for £200, I took my passage in the brig Endeavour—a small vessel trading to the Gambia for beeswax and ivory, commanded by Captain Richard Wyatt—and I became impatient for my departure.
At first, it was suggested that I should travel with Mr. James Willis, who had just been appointed consul in Senegambia, and whose presence was thought to be beneficial for my protection. However, the government later canceled his appointment, and I lost that opportunity. Fortunately, the kindness of the committee provided everything I needed. Thanks to the secretary of the Association, the late Henry Beaufoy, Esq., I received a recommendation to Dr. John Laidley, a man who had lived for many years at an English factory on the banks of the Gambia. I was also given a letter of credit for £200, so I booked my passage on the brig Endeavour—a small ship trading to the Gambia for beeswax and ivory, captained by Richard Wyatt—and I became eager to leave.
My instructions were very plain and concise. I was directed, on my arrival in Africa, “to pass on to the river Niger, either by way of Bambouk, or by such other route as should be found most convenient. That I should ascertain the course, and, if possible, the rise and termination of that river. That I should use my utmost exertions to visit the principal towns or cities in its neighbourhood, particularly Timbuctoo and Houssa; and that I should be afterwards at liberty to return to Europe, either by the way of the Gambia, or by such other route as, under all the then existing circumstances of my situation and prospects, should appear to me to be most advisable.”
My instructions were very straightforward and clear. I was told, upon arriving in Africa, “to make my way to the Niger River, either through Bambouk or whatever route I found most convenient. I should determine the river's course, and, if possible, its source and mouth. I should do my best to visit the main towns or cities nearby, especially Timbuktu and Houssa; and afterwards, I would be free to return to Europe, either by the Gambia or any other route that seemed best to me given my situation and prospects at the time.”
We sailed from Portsmouth on the 22nd day of May, 1795. On the 4th of June we saw the mountains over Mogadore, on the coast of Africa; and on the 21st of the same month, after a pleasant voyage of thirty days, we anchored at Jillifrey, a town on the northern bank of the river Gambia, opposite to James’s Island, where the English had formerly a small fort.
We set sail from Portsmouth on May 22, 1795. On June 4, we spotted the mountains near Mogadore, on the coast of Africa. Then, on June 21, after a smooth thirty-day journey, we anchored at Jillifrey, a town on the northern bank of the Gambia River, directly across from James’s Island, where the English once had a small fort.
The kingdom of Barra, in which the town of Jillifrey is situated, produces great plenty of the necessaries of life; but the chief trade of the inhabitants is in salt, which commodity they carry up the river in canoes as high as Barraconda, and bring down in return Indian corn, cotton cloths, elephants’ teeth, small quantities of gold dust, &c. The number of canoes and people constantly employed in this trade makes the king of Barra more formidable to Europeans than any other chieftain on the river; and this circumstance probably encouraged him to establish those exorbitant duties which traders of all nations are obliged to pay at entry, amounting to nearly £20 on every vessel, great and small. These duties or customs are generally collected in person by the alkaid, or governor of Jillifrey, and he is attended on these occasions by a numerous train of dependants, among whom are found many who, by their frequent intercourse with the English, have acquired a smattering of our language: but they are commonly very noisy and very troublesome, begging for everything they fancy with such earnestness and importunity, that traders, in order to get quit of them, are frequently obliged to grant their requests.
The kingdom of Barra, where the town of Jillifrey is located, produces a lot of essential goods for life; however, the main trade for the locals is salt. They transport it up the river in canoes as far as Barraconda and bring back Indian corn, cotton cloth, elephant tusks, small amounts of gold dust, etc. The number of canoes and people consistently involved in this trade makes the king of Barra more intimidating to Europeans than any other leader along the river. This probably led him to impose high fees that traders from all nations must pay upon arrival, which amount to nearly £20 for each vessel, big or small. These duties or customs are usually collected in person by the alkaid, or governor of Jillifrey, who is accompanied on these occasions by a large entourage of followers. Among them are many who, due to their frequent interactions with the English, have picked up a bit of our language; however, they are often very loud and quite bothersome, begging for anything they want with such urgency and insistence that traders often feel compelled to fulfill their requests just to get rid of them.
On the 23rd we departed from Jillifrey, and proceeded to Vintain, a town situated about two miles up a creek on the southern side of the river. This place is much resorted to by Europeans on account of the great quantities of beeswax which are brought hither for sale; the wax is collected in the woods by the Feloops, a wild and unsociable race of people. Their country, which is of considerable extent, abounds in rice; and the natives supply the traders, both on the Gambia and Cassamansa rivers, with that article, and also with goats and poultry, on very reasonable terms. The honey which they collect is chiefly used by themselves in making a strong intoxicating liquor, much the same as the mead which is produced from honey in Great Britain.
On the 23rd, we left Jillifrey and headed to Vintain, a town located about two miles up a creek on the south side of the river. This place is popular among Europeans because of the large amounts of beeswax available for sale. The wax is gathered in the woods by the Feloops, a wild and reclusive group of people. Their land is quite extensive and is rich in rice; the locals provide traders along both the Gambia and Cassamansa rivers with rice, goats, and poultry at very reasonable prices. The honey they gather is mainly used to make a strong alcoholic drink, similar to the mead produced from honey in Great Britain.
In their traffic with Europeans, the Feloops generally employ a factor or agent of the Mandingo nation, who speaks a little English, and is acquainted with the trade of the river. This broker makes the bargain; and, with the connivance of the European, receives a certain part only of the payment, which he gives to his employer as the whole; the remainder (which is very truly called the cheating money) he receives when the Feloop is gone, and appropriates to himself as a reward for his trouble.
In their dealings with Europeans, the Feloops usually rely on a broker or agent from the Mandingo nation, who knows a bit of English and is familiar with the river trade. This broker handles the negotiations, and with the European's complicity, collects only a portion of the payment, giving his employer the full amount. The rest, aptly called the cheating money, he collects after the Feloop has left and keeps for himself as a reward for his efforts.
The language of the Feloops is appropriate and peculiar; and as their trade is chiefly conducted, as hath been observed, by Mandingoes, the Europeans have no inducement to learn it.
The language of the Feloops is unique and distinctive; and since their trade is mostly carried out, as mentioned, by Mandingoes, Europeans have no reason to learn it.
On the 26th we left Vintain, and continued our course up the river, anchoring whenever the tide failed us, and frequently towing the vessel with the boat. The river is deep and muddy; the banks are covered with impenetrable thickets of mangrove; and the whole of the adjacent country appears to be flat and swampy.
On the 26th, we left Vintain and kept going up the river, anchoring whenever the tide stopped us, and often towing the boat with the vessel. The river is deep and muddy; the banks are covered with dense thickets of mangrove, and the entire surrounding area looks flat and swampy.
The Gambia abounds with fish, some species of which are excellent food; but none of them that I recollect are known in Europe. At the entrance from the sea sharks are found in great abundance, and, higher up, alligators and the hippopotamus (or river-horse) are very numerous.
The Gambia is full of fish, some of which are great to eat, but none that I remember are known in Europe. At the sea entrance, sharks are very common, and as you go further in, alligators and hippos (or river-horses) are also quite numerous.
In six days after leaving Vintain we reached Jonkakonda, a place of considerable trade, where our vessel was to take in part of her lading. The next morning the several European traders came from their different factories to receive their letters, and learn the nature and amount of her cargo; and the captain despatched a messenger to Dr. Laidley to inform him of my arrival. He came to Jonkakonda the morning following, when I delivered him Mr. Beaufoy’s letter, and he gave me a kind invitation to spend my time at his house until an opportunity should offer of prosecuting my journey. This invitation was too acceptable to be refused, and being furnished by the Doctor with a horse and guide, I set out from Jonkakonda at daybreak on the 5th of July, and at eleven o’clock arrived at Pisania, where I was accommodated with a room and other conveniences in the Doctor’s house.
In six days after leaving Vintain, we arrived at Jonkakonda, a busy trade hub where our ship was supposed to pick up part of its cargo. The next morning, various European traders came from their different locations to collect their mail and find out what the cargo entailed. The captain sent a messenger to Dr. Laidley to let him know I had arrived. He came to Jonkakonda the following morning, and I handed him Mr. Beaufoy’s letter. He kindly invited me to stay at his house until I could continue my journey. It was an invitation I couldn't turn down, so with a horse and a guide provided by the Doctor, I left Jonkakonda at daybreak on July 5th, and I arrived at Pisania by eleven o’clock, where I was given a room and other accommodations in the Doctor’s house.
Pisania is a small village in the king of Yany’s dominions, established by British subjects as a factory for trade, and inhabited solely by them and their black servants. It is situated on the banks of the Gambia, sixteen miles above Jonkakonda. The white residents, at the time of my arrival there, consisted only of Dr. Laidley, and two gentlemen who were brothers, of the name of Ainsley; but their domestics were numerous. They enjoyed perfect security under the king’s protection, and being highly esteemed and respected by the natives at large, wanted no accommodation or comfort which the country could supply, and the greatest part of the trade in slaves, ivory, and gold was in their hands.
Pisania is a small village in the kingdom of Yany, set up by British settlers as a trading post, and it is exclusively inhabited by them and their black servants. It's located on the banks of the Gambia, sixteen miles upstream from Jonkakonda. When I arrived, the white residents were Dr. Laidley and two brothers named Ainsley; however, they had many domestic workers. They felt completely safe under the king’s protection, and since they were highly regarded by the local people, they didn't lack for any comforts or amenities the country had to offer. Most of the trade in slaves, ivory, and gold was controlled by them.
Being now settled for some time at my ease, my first object was to learn the Mandingo tongue, being the language in almost general use throughout this part of Africa, and without which I was fully convinced that I never could acquire an extensive knowledge of the country or its inhabitants. In this pursuit I was greatly assisted by Dr. Laidley.
Being settled now for a while and comfortable, my first goal was to learn the Mandingo language, which is commonly spoken throughout this part of Africa. I was completely convinced that without it, I would never be able to gain a deep understanding of the country or its people. In this effort, I received significant help from Dr. Laidley.
In researches of this kind, and in observing the manners and customs of the natives, in a country so little known to the nations of Europe, and furnished with so many striking and uncommon objects of nature, my time passed not unpleasantly, and I began to flatter myself that I had escaped the fever, or seasoning, to which Europeans, on their first arrival in hot climates, are generally subject. But on the 31st of July I imprudently exposed myself to the night-dew in observing an eclipse of the moon, with a view to determine the longitude of the place; the next day I found myself attacked with a smart fever and delirium, and such an illness followed as confined me to the house during the greatest part of August. My recovery was very slow, but I embraced every short interval of convalescence to walk out, and make myself acquainted with the productions of the country.
In studies like this, while observing the habits and customs of the locals in a place so little known to the nations of Europe and filled with many striking and unusual natural features, I spent my time quite pleasantly. I began to think I had avoided the fever, or acclimatization sickness, that Europeans often get when they first arrive in hot climates. However, on July 31st, I foolishly exposed myself to the night dew while watching a lunar eclipse to figure out the longitude of the area. The next day, I found myself suffering from a severe fever and delirium, and I became seriously ill, which kept me indoors for most of August. My recovery was very slow, but I took every brief moment of feeling better to go out and familiarize myself with the local products.
In one of those excursions, having rambled farther than usual, on a hot day, I brought on a return of my fever, and on the 10th of September I was again confined to my bed. The fever, however, was not so violent as before; and in the course of three weeks I was able, when the weather would permit, to renew my botanical excursions; and when it rained, I amused myself with drawing plants, &c., in my chamber. The care and attention of Dr. Laidley contributed greatly to alleviate my sufferings; his company and conversation beguiled the tedious hours during that gloomy season, when the rain falls in torrents; when suffocating heats oppress by day, and when the night is spent by the terrified travellers in listening to the croaking of frogs (of which the numbers are beyond imagination), the shrill cry of the jackal, and the deep howling of the hyæna, a dismal concert, interrupted only by the roar of such tremendous thunder as no person can form a conception of but those who have heard it.
During one of those trips, after wandering farther than usual on a hot day, I triggered a return of my fever, and on September 10th, I found myself back in bed. However, this fever wasn’t as intense as the previous one; over the next three weeks, I was able to start my botanical outings again whenever the weather allowed. On rainy days, I kept myself entertained by drawing plants and other things in my room. Dr. Laidley’s care and attention really helped ease my suffering; his company and conversation made the long hours more bearable during that gloomy time when the rain poured down, when stifling heat made the days uncomfortable, and nights were spent by frightened travelers listening to the croaking frogs (which were in numbers beyond imagination), the sharp calls of the jackal, and the deep howls of the hyena—a dismal mix of sounds, interrupted only by thunder that was so loud and powerful that only those who have experienced it can truly understand.
The country itself being an immense level, and very generally covered with wood, presents a tiresome and gloomy uniformity to the eye; but although Nature has denied to the inhabitants the beauties of romantic landscapes, she has bestowed on them, with a liberal hand, the more important blessings of fertility and abundance. A little attention to cultivation procures a sufficiency of corn, the fields afford a rich pasturage for cattle, and the natives are plentifully supplied with excellent fish, both from the Gambia river and the Walli creek.
The country itself is a vast flatland, mostly covered with forests, which creates a monotonous and dreary view. However, even though nature hasn’t gifted the residents with picturesque landscapes, it has generously provided them with the essential advantages of fertility and abundance. With some effort in farming, they can grow enough grain, the fields offer plenty of good grazing for livestock, and the locals enjoy an ample supply of excellent fish from both the Gambia River and Walli Creek.
The grains which are chiefly cultivated are—Indian corn (zea mays); two kinds of holcus spicatus, called by the natives soono and sanio; holcus niger, and holcus bicolor, the former of which they have named bassi woolima, and the latter bassiqui. These, together with rice, are raised in considerable quantities; besides which, the inhabitants in the vicinity of the towns and villages have gardens which produce onions, calavances, yams, cassavi, ground nuts, pompions, gourds, water-melons, and some other esculent plants.
The main crops grown are Indian corn (zea mays); two types of holcus spicatus, known locally as soono and sanio; holcus niger, and holcus bicolor, which the locals call bassi woolima and bassiqui. Along with these, rice is also grown in large amounts; in addition, people living near towns and villages have gardens that yield onions, calabashes, yams, cassava, groundnuts, pumpkins, gourds, watermelons, and some other edible plants.
I observed likewise, near the towns, small patches of cotton and indigo. The former of these articles supplies them with clothing, and with the latter they dye their cloth of an excellent blue colour, in a manner that will hereafter be described.
I also noticed, near the towns, small plots of cotton and indigo. The cotton provides them with clothing, and they use the indigo to dye their cloth a beautiful blue color, which will be described later.
In preparing their corn for food, the natives use a large wooden mortar called a paloon, in which they bruise the seed until it parts with the outer covering, or husk, which is then separated from the clean corn by exposing it to the wind, nearly in the same manner as wheat is cleared from the chaff in England. The corn thus freed from the husk is returned to the mortar and beaten into meal, which is dressed variously in different countries; but the most common preparation of it among the nations of the Gambia is a sort of pudding which they call kouskous. It is made by first moistening the flour with water, and then stirring and shaking it about in a large calabash, or gourd, till it adheres together in small granules resembling sago. It is then put into an earthen pot, whose bottom is perforated with a number of small holes; and this pot being placed upon another, the two vessels are luted together either with a paste of meal and water, or with cows’ dung, and placed upon the fire. In the lower vessel is commonly some animal food and water, the steam or vapour of which ascends through the perforations in the bottom of the upper vessel, and softens and prepares the kouskous, which is very much esteemed throughout all the countries that I visited. I am informed that the same manner of preparing flour is very generally used on the Barbary coast, and that the dish so prepared is there called by the same name. It is therefore probable that the negroes borrowed the practice from the Moors.
In preparing corn for food, the locals use a large wooden mortar called a paloon, where they pound the seeds until the outer covering, or husk, comes off. This husk is then separated from the clean corn by exposing it to the wind, similar to how wheat is winnowed in England. The corn, once de-husked, goes back into the mortar and is ground into meal, which is prepared in various ways across different countries. However, the most common preparation among the nations of the Gambia is a type of pudding known as kouskous. To make it, they first moisten the flour with water and then stir and shake it in a large calabash, or gourd, until it sticks together in small granules that look like sago. Next, it's placed into an earthen pot with several small holes at the bottom. This pot is then set on top of another one, and the two are sealed together with either a paste of meal and water or cows’ dung, then set on the fire. The lower pot usually contains some meat and water, and the steam from this food rises through the holes in the upper pot, cooking and preparing the kouskous, which is highly valued in all the nations I visited. I've been told that this method of preparing flour is commonly used on the Barbary coast, and the dish is called by the same name there. So, it’s likely that the locals learned this practice from the Moors.
Their domestic animals are nearly the same as in Europe. Swine are found in the woods, but their flesh is not esteemed. Probably the marked abhorrence in which this animal is held by the votaries of Mohammed has spread itself among the pagans. Poultry of all kinds, the turkey excepted, is everywhere to be had. The guinea-fowl and red partridge abound in the fields, and the woods furnish a small species of antelope, of which the venison is highly and deservedly prized.
Their domestic animals are pretty much the same as those in Europe. Pigs can be found in the woods, but people don't think much of their meat. It's likely that the strong dislike for this animal among followers of Mohammed has influenced the pagans as well. You can find poultry of all kinds everywhere, except for turkeys. Guinea fowl and red partridge are abundant in the fields, and the woods provide a small type of antelope, which is highly valued for its delicious venison.
Of the other wild animals in the Mandingo countries, the most common are the hyæna, the panther, and the elephant. Considering the use that is made of the latter in the East Indies, it may be thought extraordinary that the natives of Africa have not, in any part of this immense continent, acquired the skill of taming this powerful and docile creature, and applying his strength and faculties to the service of man. When I told some of the natives that this was actually done in the countries of the East, my auditors laughed me to scorn, and exclaimed, “Tobaubo fonnio!” (“A white man’s lie!”) The negroes frequently find means to destroy the elephant by firearms; they hunt it principally for the sake of the teeth, which they transfer in barter to those who sell them again to the Europeans. The flesh they eat, and consider it as a great delicacy.
Of the other wild animals in the Mandingo countries, the most common are the hyena, the panther, and the elephant. Considering how they use the elephant in the East Indies, it's surprising that people in Africa haven’t learned to tame this powerful and gentle animal anywhere on this vast continent and use its strength to help humans. When I told some locals that this is actually done in Eastern countries, they laughed at me and shouted, “Tobaubo fonnio!” (“A white man’s lie!”) The locals often find ways to kill elephants using guns; they mostly hunt them for their tusks, which they trade to merchants who sell them to Europeans. They eat the meat and consider it a delicious treat.
On the 6th of October the waters of the Gambia were at the greatest height, being fifteen feet above the high-water mark of the tide, after which they began to subside, at first slowly, but afterwards very rapidly, sometimes sinking more than a foot in twenty-four hours. By the beginning of November the river had sunk to its former level, and the tide ebbed and flowed as usual. When the river had subsided, and the atmosphere grew dry, I recovered apace, and began to think of my departure, for this is reckoned the most proper season for travelling. The natives had completed their harvest, and provisions were everywhere cheap and plentiful.
On October 6th, the waters of the Gambia were at their peak, reaching fifteen feet above the high-water mark of the tide. After that, they started to recede, initially slowly but then much more quickly, sometimes dropping over a foot in just twenty-four hours. By early November, the river had returned to its usual level, and the tide was flowing in and out as normal. Once the river went down and the air dried out, I started to recover quickly and began to think about leaving, since this is considered the best time for traveling. The locals had finished their harvest, and food was abundant and inexpensive everywhere.
Dr. Laidley was at this time employed in a trading voyage at Jonkakonda. I wrote to him to desire that he would use his interest with the slatees, or slave-merchants, to procure me the company and protection of the first coffle (or caravan) that might leave Gambia for the interior country; and, in the meantime, I requested him to purchase for me a horse and two asses. A few days afterwards the Doctor returned to Pisania, and informed me that a coffle would certainly go for the interior in the course of the dry season; but that, as many of the merchants belonging to it had not yet completed their assortment of goods, he could not say at what time they would set out.
Dr. Laidley was working on a trading voyage at Jonkakonda during this time. I wrote to him asking if he could use his connections with the slatees, or slave traders, to get me the company and protection of the first coffle (or caravan) that would leave Gambia for the interior. In the meantime, I asked him to buy me a horse and two donkeys. A few days later, the Doctor returned to Pisania and told me that a coffle would definitely head for the interior during the dry season; however, since many of the merchants in it hadn’t finished gathering their goods yet, he couldn’t say when they would depart.
As the characters and dispositions of the slatees, and people that composed the caravan, were entirely unknown to me—and as they seemed rather averse to my purpose, and unwilling to enter into any positive engagements on my account—and the time of their departure being withal very uncertain, I resolved, on further deliberation, to avail myself of the dry season, and proceed without them.
As I didn't know the characters and personalities of the slaves and the people in the caravan, and since they seemed quite reluctant to support my plans and unwilling to make any definite commitments for me, and with their departure time being quite uncertain, I decided, after thinking it over, to take advantage of the dry season and move forward without them.
Dr. Laidley approved my determination, and promised me every assistance in his power to enable me to prosecute my journey with comfort and safety.
Dr. Laidley supported my decision and assured me that he would give me all the help he could to ensure I could continue my journey comfortably and safely.
This resolution having been formed, I made preparations accordingly.
This resolution being made, I got ready accordingly.
And now, being about to take leave of my hospitable friend (whose kindness and solicitude continued to the moment of my departure), and to quit for many months the countries bordering on the Gambia, it seems proper, before I proceed with my narrative, that I should in this place give some account of the several negro nations which inhabit the banks of this celebrated river, and the commercial intercourse that subsists between them, and such of the nations of Europe as find their advantage in trading to this part of Africa. The observations which have occurred to me on both these subjects will be found in the following chapter.
And now, as I prepare to say goodbye to my generous friend (whose kindness and concern lasted right until my departure) and leave the regions around the Gambia for many months, I think it’s fitting to provide a brief overview of the various African nations that live along the banks of this well-known river, as well as the trade relationships they have with European countries that benefit from doing business in this part of Africa. My thoughts on both of these topics can be found in the next chapter.
CHAPTER II.
LANGUAGE AND RELIGION OF THE NATIVES.
The natives of the countries bordering on the Gambia, though distributed into a great many distinct governments, may, I think, be divided into four great classes—the Feloops, the Jaloffs, the Foulahs, and the Mandingoes. Among all these nations, the religion of Mohammed has made, and continues to make, considerable progress; but in most of them the body of the people, both free and enslaved, persevere in maintaining the blind but harmless superstitions of their ancestors, and are called by the Mohammedans kafirs, or infidels.
The native people of the countries surrounding the Gambia, although divided into many different governments, can be categorized into four main groups—the Feloops, the Jaloffs, the Foulahs, and the Mandingoes. Among all these nations, the religion of Mohammed has made, and continues to make, significant progress; however, in most of these societies, both free and enslaved individuals still hold on to the blind but harmless superstitions of their ancestors, and the Muslims refer to them as kafirs, or infidels.
Of the Feloops, I have little to add to what has been observed concerning them in the former chapter. They are of a gloomy disposition, and are supposed never to forgive an injury. They are even said to transmit their quarrels as deadly feuds to their posterity, insomuch that a son considers it as incumbent on him, from a just sense of filial obligation, to become the avenger of his deceased father’s wrongs. If a man loses his life in one of those sudden quarrels which perpetually occur at their feasts, when the whole party is intoxicated with mead, his son, or the eldest of his sons (if he has more than one), endeavours to procure his father’s sandals, which he wears once a year, on the anniversary of his father’s death, until a fit opportunity offers of revenging his fate, when the object of his resentment seldom escapes his pursuit. This fierce and unrelenting disposition is, however, counterbalanced by many good qualities: they display the utmost gratitude and affection towards their benefactors, and the fidelity with which they preserve whatever is entrusted to them is remarkable. During the present war, they have more than once taken up arms to defend our merchant vessels from French privateers; and English property of considerable value has frequently been left at Vintain for a long time entirely under the care of the Feloops, who have uniformly manifested on such occasions the strictest honesty and punctuality. How greatly is it to be wished that the minds of a people so determined and faithful could be softened and civilised by the mild and benevolent spirit of Christianity!
Of the Feloops, I don’t have much to add to what was discussed in the previous chapter. They tend to have a gloomy nature and are thought to never forgive an offense. It's even said that they pass their feuds down through generations, to the point where a son feels obligated, out of respect for his father, to avenge his father’s grievances. If someone is killed during one of the frequent fights that break out at their feasts when everyone is drunk on mead, his son, or the eldest of his sons (if there’s more than one), tries to get his father’s sandals, which he wears once a year on the anniversary of his father’s death, until he finds a chance to avenge him, usually succeeding in tracking down his target. However, this fierce and unyielding nature is balanced by many good qualities: they show the deepest gratitude and love towards their benefactors, and their loyalty in keeping what is entrusted to them is noteworthy. During the current war, they have repeatedly taken up arms to protect our merchant ships from French privateers; and valuable English property has often been left at Vintain for long periods under the care of the Feloops, who consistently show the highest level of honesty and reliability in such situations. How wonderful it would be if the hearts of such determined and loyal people could be softened and civilized by the gentle and compassionate spirit of Christianity!
The Jaloffs (or Yaloffs) are an active, powerful, and warlike race, inhabiting great part of that tract which lies between the river Senegal and the Mandingo states on the Gambia; yet they differ from the Mandingoes not only in language, but likewise in complexion and features. The noses of the Jaloffs are not so much depressed, nor the lips so protuberant, as among the generality of Africans; and although their skin is of the deepest black, they are considered by the white traders as the most sightly negroes on this part of the continent.
The Jaloffs (or Yaloffs) are an active, powerful, and warlike group living mainly in the area between the Senegal River and the Mandingo states on the Gambia. However, they differ from the Mandingoes not only in language, but also in skin tone and features. The Jaloffs have noses that are not as flat and lips that are not as full as the typical African. Even though their skin is very dark, white traders see them as the most attractive black people in this part of the continent.
Their language is said to be copious and significant, and is often learnt by Europeans trading to Senegal.
Their language is described as rich and meaningful, and it's often learned by Europeans who trade in Senegal.
The Foulahs (or Pholeys), such of them at least as reside near the Gambia, are chiefly of a tawny complexion, with soft silky hair, and pleasing features. They are much attached to a pastoral life, and have introduced themselves into all the kingdoms on the windward coast as herdsmen and husbandmen, paying a tribute to the sovereign of the country for the lands which they hold. Not having many opportunities, however, during my residence at Pisania, of improving my acquaintance with these people, I defer entering at large into their character until a fitter occasion occurs, which will present itself when I come to Bondou.
The Foulahs (or Pholeys), at least those living near the Gambia, mostly have a tan complexion, soft silky hair, and attractive features. They're very dedicated to a pastoral lifestyle and have made their way into all the kingdoms along the windward coast as herders and farmers, paying tribute to the local rulers for the land they occupy. However, since I didn't have many chances to get to know these people better during my time in Pisania, I'll wait to discuss their character in more detail until a better opportunity arises when I reach Bondou.
The Mandingoes, of whom it remains to speak, constitute, in truth, the bulk of the inhabitants in all those districts of Africa which I visited; and their language, with a few exceptions, is universally understood and very generally spoken in that part of the continent.
The Mandingoes, who I still need to talk about, actually make up the majority of the people in all the regions of Africa that I visited. Their language, with a few exceptions, is widely understood and commonly spoken in that part of the continent.
They are called Mandingoes, I conceive, as having originally migrated from the interior state of Manding, of which some account will hereafter be given.
They are called Mandingoes, I believe, because they originally came from the interior region of Manding, which will be discussed later.
In every considerable town there is a chief magistrate, called the alkaid, whose office is hereditary, and whose business it is to preserve order, to levy duties on travellers, and to preside at all conferences in the exercise of local jurisdiction and the administration of justice. These courts are composed of the elders of the town (of free condition), and are termed palavers; and their proceedings are conducted in the open air with sufficient solemnity. Both sides of a question are freely canvassed, witnesses are publicly examined, and the decisions which follow generally meet with the approbation of the surrounding audience.
In every major town, there is a main official called the alkaid. This position is passed down through families. The alkaid's job is to maintain order, collect fees from travelers, and lead all meetings related to local law and justice. These courts consist of respected town elders (who are free citizens) and are known as palavers; their sessions are held outdoors with appropriate seriousness. Both sides of an issue are openly discussed, witnesses are examined in front of everyone, and the decisions made usually receive approval from those present.
As the negroes have no written language of their own, the general rule of decision is an appeal to ancient custom; but since the system of Mohammed has made so great progress among them, the converts to that faith have gradually introduced, with the religious tenets, many of the civil institutions of the prophet; and where the Koran is not found sufficiently explicit, recourse is had to a commentary called Al Sharra, containing, as I was told, a complete exposition or digest of the Mohammedan laws, both civil and criminal, properly arranged and illustrated.
As Black people don’t have a written language of their own, the general rule for decision-making is to refer to ancient custom; however, since the teachings of Muhammad have spread significantly among them, those who have converted to that faith have gradually introduced many of the civil laws of the prophet along with the religious beliefs. When the Koran isn’t clear enough, they turn to a commentary called Al Sharra, which, as I was told, provides a complete explanation or summary of Islamic laws, both civil and criminal, organized and illustrated properly.
This frequency of appeal to written laws, with which the pagan natives are necessarily unacquainted, has given rise in their palavers to (what I little expected to find in Africa) professional advocates, or expounders of the law, who are allowed to appear and to plead for plaintiff or defendant, much in the same manner as counsel in the law-courts of Great Britain. They are Mohammedan negroes, who have made, or affect to have made, the laws of the prophet their peculiar study; and if I may judge from their harangues, which I frequently attended, I believe, that in the forensic qualifications of procrastination and cavil, and the arts of confounding and perplexing a cause, they are not always surpassed by the ablest pleaders in Europe. While I was at Pisania, a cause was heard which furnished the Mohammedan lawyers with an admirable opportunity of displaying their professional dexterity. The case was this:—An ass belonging to a Serawoolli negro (a native of an interior country near the river Senegal) had broke into a field of corn belonging to one of the Mandingo inhabitants, and destroyed great part of it. The Mandingo having caught the animal in his field, immediately drew his knife and cut his throat. The Serawoolli thereupon called a palaver (or in European terms, brought an action) to recover damages for the loss of his beast, on which he set a high value. The defendant confessed he had killed the ass, but pleaded a set-off, insisting that the loss he had sustained by the ravage in his corn was equal to the sum demanded for the animal. To ascertain this fact was the point at issue, and the learned advocates contrived to puzzle the cause in such a manner that, after a hearing of three days, the court broke up without coming to any determination upon it; and a second palaver was, I suppose, thought necessary.
This frequent reference to written laws, which the local pagan people don’t know about, has led to the emergence of professional lawyers or legal interpreters in their discussions (something I didn’t expect to find in Africa). These lawyers are Muslim Africans who have either made the laws of the Prophet their specialized study or pretend to have; and based on their speeches that I often attended, I believe that when it comes to delaying tactics and arguing, as well as confusing and complicating a case, they are not always outdone by the most skilled lawyers in Europe. While I was in Pisania, there was a case that gave the Muslim lawyers a great chance to show off their professional skills. The situation was this: an donkey belonging to a Serawoolli man (a native from an interior region near the Senegal River) had wandered into a field of corn owned by a Mandingo resident and destroyed a large portion of it. The Mandingo, having caught the donkey in his field, quickly took out his knife and killed it. The Serawoolli then called for a palaver (or in European terms, brought a lawsuit) to claim damages for the loss of his valuable animal. The defendant admitted he had killed the donkey but argued that he deserved a set-off, claiming that the loss he experienced from the damage to his corn was equal to the amount he was being asked for the animal. Determining this fact was the main issue, and the skilled lawyers managed to complicate the case so much that after three days of hearings, the court adjourned without reaching any conclusion; and a second palaver was, I guess, deemed necessary.
The Mandingoes, generally speaking, are of a mild, sociable, and obliging disposition. The men are commonly above the middle size, well-shaped, strong, and capable of enduring great labour. The women are good-natured, sprightly, and agreeable. The dress of both sexes is composed of cotton cloth of their own manufacture: that of the men is a loose frock, not unlike a surplice, with drawers which reach half-way down the leg; and they wear sandals on their feet, and white cotton caps on their heads. The women’s dress consists of two pieces of cloth, each of which is about six feet long and three broad. One of these they wrap round their waist, which, hanging down to the ankles, answers the purpose of a petticoat; the other is thrown negligently over the bosom and shoulders.
The Mandingoes, generally speaking, are mild, friendly, and accommodating people. The men are usually taller than average, well-built, strong, and capable of doing hard work. The women are cheerful, lively, and pleasant. Their clothing is made from cotton fabric that they produce themselves: the men wear a loose-fitting frock similar to a surplice, with shorts that go halfway down the leg; they also wear sandals and white cotton caps on their heads. The women’s attire consists of two pieces of fabric, each about six feet long and three feet wide. One piece is wrapped around their waist, hanging down to their ankles like a petticoat; the other piece is casually draped over their chest and shoulders.
This account of their clothing is indeed nearly applicable to the natives of all the different countries in this part of Africa; a peculiar national mode is observable only in the head-dresses of the women.
This description of their clothing is almost relevant to the people of all the different countries in this region of Africa; a specific national style is only noticeable in the headpieces worn by the women.
Thus, in the countries of the Gambia, the females wear a sort of bandage, which they call jalla. It is a narrow strip of cotton cloth wrapped many times round, immediately over the forehead. In Bondou, the head is encircled with strings of white beads, and a small plate of gold is worn in the middle of the forehead. In Kasson the ladies decorate their heads in a very tasteful and elegant manner with white seashells. In Kaarta and Ludamar, the women raise their hair to a great height by the addition of a pad (as the ladies did formerly in Great Britain), which they decorate with a species of coral brought from the Red Sea by pilgrims returning from Mecca, and sold at a great price.
In the Gambia, women wear a kind of wrap called jalla. It’s a thin strip of cotton cloth that’s wrapped multiple times around their foreheads. In Bondou, they adorn their heads with strings of white beads, and a small gold plate is positioned in the center of the forehead. In Kasson, the women style their hair elegantly with white seashells. In Kaarta and Ludamar, women elevate their hair dramatically using a pad (similar to the styles once popular in Great Britain), which they decorate with a type of coral that pilgrims bring back from the Red Sea after visiting Mecca, and it sells for a high price.
In the construction of their dwelling-houses the Mandingoes also conform to the general practice of the African nations in this part of the continent, contenting themselves with small and incommodious hovels. A circular mud wall, about four feet high, upon which is placed a conical roof, composed of the bamboo cane, and thatched with grass, forms alike the palace of the king and the hovel of the slave. Their household furniture is equally simple. A hurdle of canes placed upon upright sticks, about two feet from the ground, upon which is spread a mat or bullock’s hide, answers the purpose of a bed; a water jar, some earthen pots for dressing their food; a few wooden bowls and calabashes, and one or two low stools, compose the rest.
In building their homes, the Mandingoes follow the common practices of other African nations in this region, settling for small and uncomfortable huts. A circular mud wall, about four feet high, topped with a conical roof made of bamboo and thatched with grass, serves both as the king's palace and the slave's hovel. Their household items are equally basic. A frame of canes set on upright sticks, about two feet off the ground, with a mat or bullock's hide on top, serves as a bed; a water jar, some clay pots for cooking, a few wooden bowls, calabashes, and one or two low stools make up the rest.
As every man of free condition has a plurality of wives, it is found necessary (to prevent, I suppose, matrimonial disputes) that each of the ladies should be accommodated with a hut to herself; and all the huts belonging to the same family are surrounded by a fence constructed of bamboo canes, split and formed into a sort of wicker-work. The whole enclosure is called a sirk, or surk. A number of these enclosures, with narrow passages between them, form what is called a town; but the huts are generally placed without any regularity, according to the caprice of the owner. The only rule that seems to be attended to is placing the door towards the south-west, in order to admit the sea-breeze.
As every free man has multiple wives, it’s necessary (probably to avoid marital disputes) for each woman to have her own hut. All the huts belonging to the same family are surrounded by a fence made from bamboo canes, split and woven into a sort of wickerwork. The entire area is called a sirk or surk. Several of these enclosures, with narrow pathways between them, make up what is known as a town; however, the huts are usually arranged haphazardly, based on the owner's preferences. The only guideline that seems to be followed is positioning the door to face southwest, to catch the sea breeze.
In each town is a large stage called the bentang, which answers the purpose of a public hall or town house. It is composed of interwoven canes, and is generally sheltered from the sun by being erected in the shade of some large tree. It is here that all public affairs are transacted and trials conducted; and here the lazy and indolent meet to smoke their pipes, and hear the news of the day. In most of the towns the Mohammedans have also a missura, or mosque, in which they assemble and offer up their daily prayers, according to the rules of the Koran.
In each town, there's a large stage called the bentang, which serves as a public hall or town house. It's made of interwoven canes and is usually shaded by a big tree. This is where all public matters are discussed and trials take place; it's also where the lazy and idle gather to smoke their pipes and catch up on the latest news. In most towns, the Muslims also have a missura or mosque, where they come together to pray daily, following the guidelines of the Koran.
In the account which I have thus given of the natives, the reader must bear in mind that my observations apply chiefly to persons of free condition, who constitute, I suppose, not more than one-fourth part of the inhabitants at large. The other three-fourths are in a state of hopeless and hereditary slavery, and are employed in cultivating the land, in the care of cattle, and in servile offices of all kinds, much in the same manner as the slaves in the West Indies. I was told, however, that the Mandingo master can neither deprive his slave of life, nor sell him to a stranger, without first calling a palaver on his conduct, or in other words, bringing him to a public trial. But this degree of protection is extended only to the native or domestic slave. Captives taken in war, and those unfortunate victims who are condemned to slavery for crimes or insolvency—and, in short, all those unhappy people who are brought down from the interior countries for sale—have no security whatever, but may be treated and disposed of in all respects as the owner thinks proper. It sometimes happens, indeed, when no ships are on the coast, that a humane and considerate master incorporates his purchased slaves among his domestics; and their offspring at least, if not the parents, become entitled to all the privileges of the native class.
In the account I've shared about the locals, readers should keep in mind that my observations mainly apply to people of free condition, who I believe make up no more than a quarter of the overall population. The other three-quarters are stuck in a state of hopeless and inherited slavery, working in farming, taking care of livestock, and doing various kinds of menial jobs, similar to the slaves in the West Indies. However, I was informed that a Mandingo master cannot take his slave's life or sell him to a stranger without first holding a palaver regarding his actions, or in simpler terms, conducting a public trial. But this kind of protection is only given to native or domestic slaves. Captives taken in war, and those unfortunate individuals who are enslaved for crimes or debt—essentially, all those poor souls brought down from the interior for sale—have no protection at all and can be treated and sold in any way the owner sees fit. It sometimes happens that when no ships are in the area, a kind and thoughtful master will integrate his purchased slaves into his household; and their children, at least, if not the parents, gain all the rights of the native class.
The earliest European establishment on this celebrated river was a factory of the Portuguese, and to this must be ascribed the introduction of the numerous words of that language which are still in use among the negroes. The Dutch, French, and English afterwards successively possessed themselves of settlements on the coast; but the trade of the Gambia became, and continued for many years, a sort of monopoly in the hands of the English. In the travels of Francis Moore is preserved an account of the Royal African Company’s establishments in this river in the year 1730; at which time James’s factory alone consisted of a governor, deputy-governor, and two other principal officers; eight factors, thirteen writers, twenty inferior attendants and tradesmen; a company of soldiers, and thirty-two negro servants; besides sloops, shallops, and boats, with their crews; and there were no less than eight subordinate factories in other parts of the river.
The first European settlement on this famous river was a factory set up by the Portuguese, which is why many words from that language are still used by the local black population. The Dutch, French, and English later established their own settlements along the coast, but the English controlled the Gambia trade for many years, making it almost a monopoly. Francis Moore's travels include a record of the Royal African Company’s operations on this river in 1730; at that time, James’s factory alone had a governor, a deputy governor, and two other main officers; eight agents, thirteen clerks, twenty lower staff and tradespeople; a group of soldiers; and thirty-two black servants; in addition to sloops, shallops, and boats with their crews; and there were eight other smaller factories in different parts of the river.
The trade with Europe, by being afterwards laid open, was almost annihilated. The share which the subjects of England at this time hold in it supports not more than two or three annual ships; and I am informed that the gross value of British exports is under £20,000. The French and Danes still maintain a small share, and the Americans have lately sent a few vessels to the Gambia by way of experiment.
The trade with Europe, once it was opened up, was nearly wiped out. The amount that English subjects have in it doesn't support more than two or three ships a year, and I've been told that the total value of British exports is under £20,000. The French and Danes still hold a small portion, and recently, the Americans have sent a few ships to the Gambia as a trial.
The commodities exported to the Gambia from Europe consist chiefly of firearms and ammunition, iron-ware, spirituous liquors, tobacco, cotton caps, a small quantity of broadcloth, and a few articles of the manufacture of Manchester; a small assortment of India goods, with some glass beads, amber, and other trifles, for which are taken in exchange slaves, gold dust, ivory, beeswax, and hides. Slaves are the chief article, but the whole number which at this time are annually exported from the Gambia by all nations is supposed to be under one thousand.
The goods shipped from Europe to Gambia mainly include firearms and ammunition, iron goods, alcoholic drinks, tobacco, cotton caps, a little bit of broadcloth, and a few items made in Manchester. There's also a small selection of goods from India, along with some glass beads, amber, and other small items, which are traded for slaves, gold dust, ivory, beeswax, and hides. Slaves are the primary item traded, but it's estimated that the total number exported from Gambia by all nations each year is under one thousand.
Most of these unfortunate victims are brought to the coast in periodical caravans; many of them from very remote inland countries, for the language which they speak is not understood by the inhabitants of the maritime districts. In a subsequent part of my work I shall give the best information I have been able to collect concerning the manner in which they are obtained. On their arrival at the coast, if no immediate opportunity offers of selling them to advantage, they are distributed among the neighbouring villages, until a slave ship arrives, or until they can be sold to black traders, who sometimes purchase on speculation. In the meanwhile, the poor wretches are kept constantly fettered, two and two of them being chained together, and employed in the labours of the field, and, I am sorry to add, are very scantily fed, as well as harshly treated. The price of a slave varies according to the number of purchasers from Europe, and the arrival of caravans from the interior; but in general I reckon that a young and healthy male, from sixteen to twenty-five years of age, may be estimated on the spot from £18 to £20 sterling.
Most of these unfortunate victims are brought to the coast in periodic groups; many of them from distant inland countries, as the language they speak isn’t understood by the local coastal residents. In a later part of my work, I will provide the best information I’ve been able to gather about how they are acquired. Upon reaching the coast, if there’s no immediate chance to sell them profitably, they are distributed among nearby villages until a slave ship arrives or until they can be sold to black traders who sometimes buy on speculation. In the meantime, the poor individuals are kept constantly in chains, two by two, and forced to work in the fields. I regret to say they are also very poorly fed and treated harshly. The price of a slave varies based on the number of buyers from Europe and the arrival of caravans from the interior; however, generally, I estimate that a young and healthy male between the ages of sixteen and twenty-five could be valued on site at around £18 to £20 sterling.
The negro slave-merchants, as I have observed in the former chapter, are called slatees, who, besides slaves, and the merchandise which they bring for sale to the whites, supply the inhabitants of the maritime districts with native iron, sweet-smelling gums and frankincense, and a commodity called shea-toulou, which, literally translated, signifies tree-butter.
The slave merchants, as I mentioned in the previous chapter, are called slatees. They not only sell slaves and goods to the white traders but also provide the coastal communities with native iron, fragrant gums and frankincense, and a product called shea-toulou, which literally means tree-butter.
In payment of these articles, the maritime states supply the interior countries with salt, a scarce and valuable commodity, as I frequently and painfully experienced in the course of my journey. Considerable quantities of this article, however, are also supplied to the inland natives by the Moors, who obtain it from the salt pits in the Great Desert, and receive in return corn, cotton cloth, and slaves.
In exchange for these goods, the coastal states provide the inland countries with salt, a rare and precious resource, as I often and sadly experienced during my travels. However, a significant amount of this salt is also provided to the local inhabitants by the Moors, who get it from the salt mines in the Great Desert and, in return, receive corn, cotton fabric, and slaves.
In their early intercourse with Europeans the article that attracted most notice was iron. Its utility, in forming the instruments of war and husbandry, make it preferable to all others, and iron soon became the measure by which the value of all other commodities was ascertained. Thus, a certain quantity of goods, of whatever denomination, appearing to be equal in value to a bar of iron, constituted, in the traders’ phraseology, a bar of that particular merchandise. Twenty leaves of tobacco, for instance, were considered as a bar of tobacco; and a gallon of spirits (or rather half spirits and half water) as a bar of rum, a bar of one commodity being reckoned equal in value to a bar of another commodity.
In their early interactions with Europeans, the item that drew the most attention was iron. Its usefulness in making tools for war and farming made it the preferred material over all others, and iron quickly became the standard by which the value of all other goods was determined. So, a certain amount of goods, no matter what type, was seen as equivalent in value to a bar of iron, which traders referred to as a bar of that specific merchandise. For example, twenty leaves of tobacco were regarded as a bar of tobacco, and a gallon of spirits (or more accurately, half spirits and half water) was considered a bar of rum, with one type of commodity being valued the same as another.
As, however, it must unavoidably happen that, according to the plenty or scarcity of goods at market in proportion to the demand, the relative value would be subject to continual fluctuation, greater precision has been found necessary; and at this time the current value of a single bar of any kind is fixed by the whites at two shillings sterling. Thus, a slave whose price is £15, is said to be worth 150 bars.
As it inevitably happens that the relative value of goods in the market fluctuates constantly based on supply and demand, greater accuracy has become necessary. Currently, the market value of a single bar of any type is set by the whites at two shillings sterling. Therefore, a slave priced at £15 is considered to be worth 150 bars.
In transactions of this nature it is obvious that the white trader has infinitely the advantage over the African, whom, therefore, it is difficult to satisfy, for conscious of his own ignorance, he naturally becomes exceedingly suspicious and wavering; and, indeed, so very unsettled and jealous are the negroes in their dealings with the whites, that a bargain is never considered by the European as concluded until the purchase money is paid and the party has taken leave.
In transactions like this, it's clear that the white trader has a huge advantage over the African, who is often hard to satisfy. Aware of his own lack of knowledge, he naturally becomes very suspicious and indecisive. In fact, the Africans can be so unsettled and wary in their dealings with whites that the European never considers a deal done until the payment is made and the other party has left.
Having now brought together such general observations on the country and its inhabitants as occurred to me during my residence in the vicinity of the Gambia, I shall detain the reader no longer with introductory matter, but proceed, in the next chapter, to a regular detail of the incidents which happened, and the reflections which arose in my mind, in the course of my painful and perilous journey, from its commencement until my return to the Gambia.
Having gathered some general observations about the country and its people during my time living near the Gambia, I won't keep the reader waiting with more introductions. Instead, in the next chapter, I will provide a detailed account of the events that took place and the thoughts that occurred to me during my difficult and risky journey, from the beginning until my return to the Gambia.
CHAPTER III.
THE KINGDOM OF WOOLLI—TRIP TO BONDOU.
On the 2nd of December, 1795, I took my departure from the hospitable mansion of Dr. Laidley. I was fortunately provided with a negro servant who spoke both the English and Mandingo tongues. His name was Johnson. He was a native of this part of Africa, and having in his youth been conveyed to Jamaica as a slave, he had been made free, and taken to England by his master, where he had resided many years, and at length found his way back to his native country. As he was known to Dr. Laidley, the Doctor recommended him to me, and I hired him as my interpreter, at the rate of ten bars monthly to be paid to himself, and five bars a month to be paid to his wife during his absence. Dr. Laidley furthermore provided me with a negro boy of his own, named Demba, a sprightly youth, who, besides Mandingo, spoke the language of the Serawoollies, an inland people (of whom mention will hereafter be made) residing on the banks of the Senegal; and to induce him to behave well, the Doctor promised him his freedom on his return, in case I should report favourably of his fidelity and services. I was furnished with a horse for myself (a small but very hardy and spirited beast, which cost me to the value of £7 10s), and two asses for my interpreter and servant. My baggage was light, consisting chiefly of provisions for two days; a small assortment of beads, amber, and tobacco, for the purchase of a fresh supply as I proceeded; a few changes of linen, and other necessary apparel; an umbrella, a pocket sextant, a magnetic compass, and a thermometer; together with two fowling-pieces, two pair of pistols, and some other small articles.
On December 2, 1795, I left the welcoming home of Dr. Laidley. Luckily, I had a Black servant who spoke both English and Mandingo. His name was Johnson. He was from this part of Africa and had been taken to Jamaica as a slave in his youth. After gaining his freedom, he was brought to England by his master, where he lived for many years before finally returning to his home country. Since Dr. Laidley knew him, the Doctor recommended him to me, and I hired him as my interpreter for ten bars a month for himself and five bars a month to support his wife while he was away. Dr. Laidley also provided me with a young Black boy named Demba, who was lively and spoke both Mandingo and the language of the Serawoollies, a group living along the Senegal River (which I will mention later). To encourage good behavior, the Doctor promised Demba his freedom upon my favorable report of his loyalty and service. I was given a horse for myself, a small but very tough and energetic animal that cost me £7 10s, and two donkeys for my interpreter and servant. My luggage was light, mainly consisting of enough food for two days, a small collection of beads, amber, and tobacco for trading as I traveled, a few changes of clothes, an umbrella, a pocket sextant, a magnetic compass, a thermometer, two shotguns, two pistols, and some other small items.
A free man (a bushreen, or Mohammedan) named Madiboo, who was travelling to the kingdom of Bambara, and two slatees, or slave merchants, of the Serawoolli nation, and of the same sect, who were going to Bondou, offered their services, as far as they intended respectively to proceed, as did likewise a negro named Tami (also a Mohammedan), a native of Kasson, who had been employed some years by Dr. Laidley as a blacksmith, and was returning to his native country with the savings of his labours. All these men travelled on foot, driving their asses before them.
A free man (a bushreen, or Muslim) named Madiboo, who was on his way to the kingdom of Bambara, and two slave traders from the Serawoolli nation, who were heading to Bondou, offered their help for the journey as far as they were going, along with a man named Tami (also a Muslim), a native of Kasson, who had worked for a few years with Dr. Laidley as a blacksmith and was returning to his homeland with the money he had saved. All these men traveled on foot, leading their donkeys.
Thus I had no less than six attendants, all of whom had been taught to regard me with great respect, and to consider that their safe return hereafter to the countries on the Gambia would depend on my preservation.
Thus I had no less than six attendants, all of whom had been taught to regard me with great respect and to believe that their safe return to the countries on the Gambia would depend on my survival.
Dr. Laidley himself, and Messrs. Ainsley, with a number of their domestics, kindly determined to accompany me the first two days; and I believe they secretly thought they should never see me afterwards.
Dr. Laidley himself, along with Mr. Ainsley and several of their staff, kindly decided to join me for the first two days; and I believe they secretly thought they would never see me again afterwards.
We reached Jindey the same day, having crossed the Walli creek, a branch of the Gambia, and rested at the house of a black woman, who had formerly been the paramour of a white trader named Hewett, and who, in consequence thereof, was called, by way of distinction, seniora. In the evening we walked out to see an adjoining village, belonging to a slatee named Jemaffoo Momadoo, the richest of all the Gambia traders. We found him at home, and he thought so highly of the honour done him by this visit, that he presented us with a fine bullock, which was immediately killed, and part of it dressed for our evening’s repast.
We reached Jindey the same day after crossing the Walli creek, a branch of the Gambia, and rested at the home of a Black woman who used to be the lover of a white trader named Hewett. Because of this, she was referred to, as a distinction, as seniora. In the evening, we went out to see a nearby village owned by a trader named Jemaffoo Momadoo, the wealthiest of all the Gambia traders. We found him at home, and he was so honored by our visit that he gifted us a fine bullock, which was immediately killed, and part of it was prepared for our evening meal.
The negroes do not go to supper till late, and, in order to amuse ourselves while our beef was preparing, a Mandingo was desired to relate some diverting stories, in listening to which, and smoking tobacco, we spent three hours. These stories bear some resemblance to those in the Arabian Nights’ Entertainments, but, in general, are of a more ludicrous cast.
The Black people don't eat dinner until late, so to pass the time while our beef was cooking, we asked a Mandingo to tell some entertaining stories. While listening to them and smoking tobacco, we spent three hours. These stories are somewhat similar to those in the Arabian Nights but are generally more humorous.
About one o’clock in the afternoon of the 3rd of December, I took my leave of Dr. Laidley and Messrs. Ainsley, and rode slowly into the woods. I had now before me a boundless forest, and a country, the inhabitants of which were strangers to civilised life, and to most of whom a white man was the object of curiosity or plunder. I reflected that I had parted from the last European I might probably behold, and perhaps quitted for ever the comforts of Christian society. Thoughts like these would necessarily cast a gloom over my mind; and I rode musing along for about three miles, when I was awakened from my reverie by a body of people, who came running up, and stopped the asses, giving me to understand that I must go with them to Peckaba, to present myself to the king of Walli, or pay customs to them. I endeavoured to make them comprehend that the object of my journey not being traffic, I ought not to be subjected to a tax like the slatees, and other merchants, who travel for gain; but I reasoned to no purpose. They said it was usual for travellers of all descriptions to make a present to the king of Walli, and without doing so I could not be permitted to proceed. As they were more numerous than my attendants, and withal very noisy, I thought it prudent to comply with their demand; and having presented them with four bars of tobacco, for the king’s use, I was permitted to continue my journey, and at sunset reached a village near Kootacunda, where we rested for the night.
About one o’clock in the afternoon on December 3rd, I said goodbye to Dr. Laidley and Mr. Ainsley and rode slowly into the woods. I was now facing an endless forest and a country whose people were unfamiliar with civilized life, and to most of them, a white man was a source of curiosity or a target for theft. I thought about how I had just parted from the last European I might ever see and perhaps left behind the comforts of Christian society for good. Thoughts like these naturally cast a shadow over my mind, and I rode along in contemplation for about three miles until I was jolted from my daydream by a group of people who came running up and stopped me. They made it clear that I had to go with them to Peckaba to present myself to the king of Walli or pay a fee. I tried to explain that since my journey wasn't for trade, I shouldn't have to pay a tax like the slatees and other merchants who travel for profit, but my reasoning fell on deaf ears. They insisted that it was customary for travelers of all kinds to make a gift to the king of Walli, and without doing so, I wouldn't be allowed to continue. Since they were more numerous than my companions and quite loud, I thought it wise to comply with their request. After giving them four bars of tobacco for the king, I was allowed to proceed, and at sunset, I reached a village near Kootacunda, where we rested for the night.
In the morning of December 4th I passed Kootacunda, the last town of Walli, and stopped about an hour at a small adjoining village to pay customs to an officer of the king of Woolli; we rested the ensuing night at a village called Tabajang; and at noon the next day (December 5th) we reached Medina, the capital of the king of Woolli’s dominions.
In the morning of December 4th, I passed Kootacunda, the last town of Walli, and stopped for about an hour at a nearby village to pay customs to an officer of the king of Woolli. We spent the night in a village called Tabajang, and by noon the next day (December 5th), we arrived in Medina, the capital of the king of Woolli’s territory.
The kingdom of Woolli is bounded by Walli on the west, by the Gambia on the south, by the small river Walli on the north-west, by Bondou on the north-east, and on the east by the Simbani wilderness.
The kingdom of Woolli is bordered by Walli to the west, the Gambia to the south, the small river Walli to the north-west, Bondou to the north-east, and by the Simbani wilderness to the east.
The inhabitants are Mandingoes, and, like most of the Mandingo nations, are divided into two great sects—the Mohammedans, who are called bushreens, and the pagans, who are called indiscriminately kafirs (unbelievers) and sonakies (i.e., men who drink strong liquors). The pagan natives are by far the most numerous, and the government of the country is in their hands; for though the most respectable among the bushreens are frequently consulted in affairs of importance, yet they are never permitted to take any share in the executive government, which rests solely in the hands of the mansa, or sovereign, and great officers of the state. Of these, the first in point of rank is the presumptive heir of the crown, who is called the farbanna. Next to him are the alkaids, or provincial governors, who are more frequently called keamos. Then follow the two grand divisions of free-men and slaves; of the former, the slatees, so frequently mentioned in the preceding pages, are considered as the principal; but, in all classes, great respect is paid to the authority of aged men.
The residents are Mandingoes and, like most Mandingo groups, they are divided into two main sects—the Muslims, who are known as bushreens, and the pagans, who are referred to as kafirs (unbelievers) and sonakies (i.e., men who drink strong alcohol). The pagan natives are by far the majority, and they hold the power in the country; although the most respected among the bushreens are often consulted on important matters, they are never allowed to participate in the executive government, which is entirely in the hands of the mansa, or sovereign, and the top officials of the state. The highest-ranking official is the heir apparent, known as the farbanna. Next are the alkaids, or provincial governors, who are more commonly referred to as keamos. Following them are the two main categories of free men and slaves; of the free men, the slatees, frequently mentioned in previous pages, are regarded as the most important. In all groups, there is a great respect for the authority of elderly men.
On the death of the reigning monarch, his eldest son (if he has attained the age of manhood) succeeds to the regal authority. If there is no son, or if the son is under the age of discretion, a meeting of the great men is held, and the late monarch’s nearest relation (commonly his brother) is called to the government, not as regent, or guardian to the infant son, but in full right, and to the exclusion of the minor. The charges of the government are defrayed by occasional tributes from the people, and by duties on goods transported across the country. Travellers, on going from the Gambia towards the interior, pay customs in European merchandise. On returning, they pay in iron and shea-toulou. These taxes are paid at every town.
On the death of the current king, his eldest son (if he is old enough) takes over the royal authority. If there is no son, or if the son is too young, a meeting of the prominent leaders is held, and the late king's closest relative (usually his brother) assumes control, not as a regent or guardian of the young prince, but with full authority, effectively sidelining the minor. The government's expenses are covered by occasional taxes from the people and duties on goods moved across the country. Travelers heading from the Gambia into the interior pay customs fees in European goods. On their return, they pay in iron and shea-toulou. These taxes are collected in every town.
Medina, the capital of the kingdom, at which I was now arrived, is a place of considerable extent, and may contain from eight hundred to one thousand houses. It is fortified in the common African manner, by a surrounding high wall built of clay, and an outward fence of pointed stakes and prickly bushes; but the walls are neglected, and the outward fence has suffered considerably from the active hands of busy housewives, who pluck up the stakes for firewood. I obtained a lodging at one of the king’s near relations, who apprised me that at my introduction to the king I must not presume to shake hands with him. “It was not usual,” he said, “to allow this liberty to strangers.” Thus instructed, I went in the afternoon to pay my respects to the sovereign, and ask permission to pass through his territories to Bondou. The king’s name was Jatta. He was the same venerable old man of whom so favourable an account was transmitted by Major Houghton. I found him seated upon a mat before the door of his hut; a number of men and women were arranged on each side, who were singing and clapping their hands. I saluted him respectfully, and informed him of the purport of my visit. The king graciously replied, that he not only gave me leave to pass through his country, but would offer up his prayers for my safety. On this, one of my attendants, seemingly in return for the king’s condescension, began to sing, or rather to roar an Arabic song, at every pause of which the king himself, and all the people present, struck their hands against their foreheads, and exclaimed, with devout and affecting solemnity, “Amen, amen!” The king told me, furthermore, that I should have a guide the day following, who would conduct me safely to the frontier of his kingdom—I then took my leave, and in the evening sent the king an order upon Dr. Laidley for three gallons of rum, and received in return great store of provisions.
Medina, the capital of the kingdom where I had just arrived, is quite large and has between eight hundred and one thousand houses. It’s fortified in the typical African style, with a high clay wall surrounding it and an outer fence made of sharp stakes and thorny bushes. However, the walls are in disrepair, and the outer fence has been heavily impacted by busy housewives who pull up the stakes for firewood. I secured a place to stay with one of the king’s relatives, who informed me that when I met the king, I shouldn't attempt to shake hands with him. “It's not typical,” he said, “to allow this courtesy to strangers.” Following this advice, I went in the afternoon to pay my respects to the king and to request permission to pass through his land to Bondou. The king's name was Jatta, the same respected elder that Major Houghton had spoken highly of. I found him sitting on a mat outside his hut, surrounded by a group of men and women who were singing and clapping their hands. I greeted him with respect and explained the purpose of my visit. The king kindly responded that not only would he allow me to travel through his country, but he would also pray for my safety. In response, one of my attendants began to sing, or rather yell, an Arabic song, and at every pause, the king and everyone present would touch their foreheads and chant, with sincere and powerful emotion, “Amen, amen!” The king also mentioned that I would have a guide the next day who would ensure I safely reached the border of his kingdom. After that, I took my leave and in the evening, I sent an order to the king for three gallons of rum through Dr. Laidley and received a large quantity of provisions in return.
December 6.—Early in the morning I went to the king a second time, to learn if the guide was ready. I found his Majesty seated upon a bullock’s hide, warming himself before a large fire, for the Africans are sensible of the smallest variation in the temperature of the air, and frequently complain of cold when a European is oppressed with heat. He received me with a benevolent countenance, and tenderly entreated me to desist from my purpose of travelling into the interior, telling me that Major Houghton had been killed in his route, and that if I followed his footsteps I should probably meet with his fate. He said that I must not judge of the people of the eastern country by those of Woolli: that the latter were acquainted with white men, and respected them, whereas the people of the east had never seen a white man, and would certainly destroy me. I thanked the king for his affectionate solicitude, but told him that I had considered the matter, and was determined, notwithstanding all dangers, to proceed. The king shook his head, but desisted from further persuasion, and told me the guide should be ready in the afternoon.
December 6.—Early in the morning, I went to see the king again to find out if the guide was ready. I found His Majesty sitting on a bull's hide, warming himself by a large fire, because Africans are very sensitive to even slight changes in temperature and often complain of feeling cold when Europeans are hot. He greeted me with a kind smile and earnestly asked me to reconsider my plan to travel inland, telling me that Major Houghton had been killed on his journey, and that if I followed in his footsteps, I would likely meet the same fate. He explained that I shouldn't judge the people of the eastern region by those in Woolli: the latter were familiar with white men and respected them, while the people in the east had never seen a white man and would definitely harm me. I thanked the king for his caring concern but told him that I had thought it through and was determined to proceed despite all dangers. The king shook his head but stopped trying to persuade me further and said the guide would be ready in the afternoon.
About two o’clock, the guide appearing, I went and took my last farewell of the good old king, and in three hours reached Konjour, a small village, where we determined to rest for the night. Here I purchased a fine sheep for some beads, and my Serawoolli attendants killed it with all the ceremonies prescribed by their religion. Part of it was dressed for supper, after which a dispute arose between one of the Serawoolli negroes, and Johnson, my interpreter, about the sheep’s horns. The former claimed the horns as his perquisite, for having acted the part of our butcher, and Johnson contested the claim. I settled the matter by giving a horn to each of them. This trifling incident is mentioned as introductory to what follows, for it appeared on inquiry that these horns were highly valued, as being easily convertible into portable sheaths, or cases, for containing and keeping secure certain charms or amulets called saphies, which the negroes constantly wear about them. These saphies are prayers, or rather sentences, from the Koran, which the Mohammedan priests write on scraps of paper, and sell to the simple natives, who consider them to possess very extraordinary virtues. Some of the negroes wear them to guard themselves against the bite of snakes or alligators; and on this occasion the saphie is commonly enclosed in a snake’s or alligator’s skin, and tied round the ankle. Others have recourse to them in time of war, to protect their persons against hostile weapons; but the common use to which these amulets are applied is to prevent or cure bodily diseases—to preserve from hunger and thirst—and generally to conciliate the favour of superior powers, under all the circumstances and occurrences of life. [41]
About two o’clock, when the guide showed up, I went to say my final goodbye to the good old king, and in three hours, I reached Konjour, a small village, where we decided to rest for the night. Here, I bought a nice sheep for some beads, and my Serawoolli attendants killed it with all the rituals required by their religion. Part of it was cooked for supper, after which a disagreement arose between one of the Serawoolli men and Johnson, my interpreter, about the sheep’s horns. The former claimed the horns as his right since he acted as our butcher, while Johnson disputed the claim. I resolved the issue by giving one horn to each of them. This small incident is mentioned as an introduction to what follows, as I discovered that these horns were highly valued because they could be easily turned into portable sheaths or cases for holding and secure certain charms or amulets called saphies, which the locals always wear. These saphies are prayers, or rather phrases, from the Koran, which the Muslim priests write on scraps of paper and sell to the simple locals, who believe they have extraordinary powers. Some people wear them to protect themselves from snake or alligator bites; in such cases, the saphie is usually enclosed in a snake or alligator skin and tied around the ankle. Others use them during war to protect themselves from weapons; however, the most common purpose of these amulets is to prevent or cure physical ailments, to protect against hunger and thirst, and generally to gain the favor of higher powers in all aspects of life. [41]
In this case it is impossible not to admire the wonderful contagion of superstition, for, notwithstanding that the majority of the negroes are pagans, and absolutely reject the doctrines of Mohammed, I did not meet with a man, whether a bushreen or kafir, who was not fully persuaded of the powerful efficacy of these amulets. The truth is, that all the natives of this part of Africa consider the art of writing as bordering on magic; and it is not in the doctrines of the prophet, but in the arts of the magician, that their confidence is placed. It will hereafter be seen that I was myself lucky enough, in circumstances of distress, to turn the popular credulity in this respect to good account.
In this situation, it's hard not to admire the fascinating spread of superstition because, despite most of the locals being pagans and completely rejecting the teachings of Mohammed, I didn’t meet anyone, whether a believer or non-believer, who wasn’t convinced of the strong power of these amulets. The reality is that all the people in this part of Africa see writing as almost magical; their faith lies not in the prophet's teachings, but in the skills of a magician. Later on, you'll see that I was fortunate enough, in challenging moments, to take advantage of this common belief to my benefit.
On the 7th I departed from Konjour, and slept at a village called Malla (or Mallaing), and on the 8th about noon I arrived at Kolor, a considerable town, near the entrance into which I observed, hanging upon a tree, a sort of masquerade habit, made of the bark of trees, which I was told, on inquiry, belonged to Mumbo Jumbo. This is a strange bugbear, common to all the Mandingo towns, and much employed by the pagan natives in keeping their women in subjection; for as the kafirs are not restricted in the number of their wives, every one marries as many as he can conveniently maintain—and as it frequently happens that the ladies disagree among themselves, family quarrels sometimes rise to such a height, that the authority of the husband can no longer preserve peace in his household. In such cases, the interposition of Mumbo Jumbo is called in, and is always decisive.
On the 7th, I left Konjour and stayed overnight in a village called Malla (or Mallaing). By noon on the 8th, I arrived at Kolor, a significant town. Near the entrance, I noticed a type of masquerade costume made from tree bark hanging on a tree. When I asked about it, I was told it belonged to Mumbo Jumbo. This is a peculiar boogeyman that’s well-known in all the Mandingo towns and is often used by the pagan locals to keep their women in line. Since the men aren’t limited in how many wives they can have, they tend to marry as many as they can afford. It often happens that the women don’t get along, and family disputes can escalate to the point where the husband’s authority can’t maintain peace at home. In such situations, they call for the intervention of Mumbo Jumbo, which always resolves the issue decisively.
This strange minister of justice (who is supposed to be either the husband himself, or some person instructed by him), disguised in the dress that has been mentioned, and armed with the rod of public authority, announces his coming (whenever his services are required) by loud and dismal screams in the woods near the town. He begins the pantomime at the approach of night; and as soon as it is dark he enters the town, and proceeds to the bentang, at which all the inhabitants immediately assemble.
This odd minister of justice (who is either the husband himself or someone he has instructed) , dressed as described earlier and carrying the rod of public authority, signals his arrival (whenever needed) with loud and eerie screams in the woods near the town. He starts the show as night falls, and once it gets dark, he enters the town and heads to the bentang, where all the residents quickly gather.
December 9.—As there was no water to be procured on the road, we travelled with great expedition until we reached Tambacunda; and departing from thence early the next morning, the 10th, we reached in the evening Kooniakary, a town of nearly the same magnitude as Kolor. About noon on the 11th we arrived at Koojar, the frontier town of Woolli, towards Bondou, from which it is separated by an intervening wilderness of two days’ journey.
December 9.—Since we couldn't get any water along the way, we traveled quickly until we reached Tambacunda. We left there early the next morning, the 10th, and by evening we arrived at Kooniakary, a town almost the same size as Kolor. Around noon on the 11th, we got to Koojar, the border town of Woolli, headed toward Bondou, which is separated from it by a wild area that takes two days to cross.
The guide appointed by the king of Woolli being now to return, I presented him with some amber for his trouble; and having been informed that it was not possible at all times to procure water in the wilderness, I made inquiry for men who would serve both as guides and water-bearers during my journey across it. Three negroes, elephant-hunters, offered their services for these purposes, which I accepted, and paid them three bars each in advance; and the day being far spent, I determined to pass the night in my present quarters.
The guide appointed by the king of Woolli was getting ready to leave, so I gave him some amber as a thank you for his help. Since I learned that it wasn’t always easy to find water in the wilderness, I asked around for guys who could be both guides and water carriers during my journey through it. Three African elephant hunters offered to help, which I agreed to, and I paid them three bars each upfront. Since the day was almost over, I decided to spend the night where I was.
The inhabitants of Koojar, though not wholly unaccustomed to the sight of Europeans (most of them having occasionally visited the countries on the Gambia), beheld me with a mixture of curiosity and reverence, and in the evening invited me to see a neobering, or wrestling-match, at the bentang. This is an exhibition very common in all the Mandingo countries. The spectators arranged themselves in a circle, leaving the intermediate space for the wrestlers, who were strong active young men, full of emulation, and accustomed, I suppose, from their infancy to this sort of exertion. Being stripped of their clothing, except a short pair of drawers, and having their skin anointed with oil, or shea butter, the combatants approached each other on all-fours, parrying with, and occasionally extending a hand for some time, till at length one of them sprang forward, and caught his rival by the knee. Great dexterity and judgment were now displayed, but the contest was decided by superior strength; and I think that few Europeans would have been able to cope with the conqueror. It must not be unobserved, that the combatants were animated by the music of a drum, by which their actions were in some measure regulated.
The people of Koojar, while not entirely unfamiliar with Europeans (most having occasionally traveled to countries on the Gambia), looked at me with a mix of curiosity and respect. In the evening, they invited me to watch a neobering, or wrestling match, at the bentang. This event is very common in all the Mandingo countries. The spectators formed a circle, leaving an open space for the wrestlers, who were strong, active young men, filled with competitive spirit and likely accustomed to this kind of physical activity from a young age. They were stripped down to short drawers and had their skin coated in oil or shea butter. The wrestlers approached each other on all fours, deflecting each other's movements and occasionally reaching out for some time until one of them lunged forward and grabbed his opponent by the knee. Great skill and judgment were displayed in this match, but the outcome ultimately came down to superior strength; I believe few Europeans could have matched the victor. It's worth noting that the wrestlers were motivated by a drumbeat that helped dictate their movements.
The wrestling was succeeded by a dance, in which many performers assisted, all of whom were provided with little bells, which were fastened to their legs and arms; and here, too, the drum regulated their motions. It was beaten with a crooked stick, which the drummer held in his right hand, occasionally using his left to deaden the sound, and thus vary the music. The drum is likewise applied on these occasions to keep order among the spectators, by imitating the sound of certain Mandingo sentences. For example, when the wrestling-match is about to begin, the drummer strikes what is understood to signify ali bæ see (sit all down), upon which the spectators immediately seat themselves; and when the combatants are to begin, he strikes amuta! amuta! (take hold! take hold!)
The wrestling was followed by a dance, where many performers participated, all wearing small bells attached to their legs and arms; and here, too, the drum set the rhythm for their movements. It was struck with a bent stick, which the drummer held in his right hand, sometimes using his left to muffle the sound, creating different music. The drum is also used during these times to maintain order among the audience by mimicking the sounds of specific Mandingo phrases. For example, when the wrestling match is about to start, the drummer plays a beat that signifies ali bæ see (sit all down), prompting the audience to sit down immediately; and when the fighters are ready to begin, he strikes amuta! amuta! (take hold! take hold!)
In the course of the evening I was presented, by way of refreshment, with a liquor, which tasted so much like the strong beer of my native country (and very good beer too), as to induce me to inquire into its composition; and I learnt, with some degree of surprise, that it was actually made from corn which had been previously malted, much in the same manner as barley is malted in Great Britain. A root yielding a grateful bitter was used in lieu of hops, the name of which I have forgotten; but the corn which yields the wort is the holcus spicatus of botanists.
During the evening, I was offered a drink that tasted so much like the strong beer from my home country (which is really good beer) that I felt compelled to ask about its ingredients. To my surprise, I found out it was actually made from corn that had been malted, similar to how barley is malted in Great Britain. Instead of hops, they used a root that had a pleasant bitterness, though I can't remember its name. The corn used for the wort is the holcus spicatus, according to botanists.
Early in the morning (the 12th) I found that one of the elephant-hunters had absconded with the money he had received from me in part of wages; and in order to prevent the other two from following his example, I made them instantly fill their calabashes (or gourds) with water; and as the sun rose, I entered the wilderness that separates the kingdoms of Woolli and Bondou.
Early in the morning (the 12th), I discovered that one of the elephant hunters had run off with the money I had given him as part of his pay; to stop the other two from doing the same, I had them quickly fill their calabashes (or gourds) with water. As the sun came up, I headed into the wilderness that separates the kingdoms of Woolli and Bondou.
We continued our journey without stopping any more until noon, when we came to a large tree, called by the natives neema taba. It had a very singular appearance, being decorated with innumerable rags or scraps of cloth, which persons travelling across the wilderness had at different times tied to the branches, probably at first to inform the traveller that water was to be found near it; but the custom has been so greatly sanctioned by time, that nobody now presumes to pass without hanging up something. I followed the example, and suspended a handsome piece of cloth on one of the boughs; and being told that either a well, or pool of water, was at no great distance, I ordered the negroes to unload the asses, that we might give them corn, and regale ourselves with the provisions we had brought. In the meantime, I sent one of the elephant-hunters to look for the well, intending, if water was to be obtained, to rest here for the night. A pool was found, but the water was thick and muddy, and the negro discovered near it the remains of a fire recently extinguished, and the fragments of provisions, which afforded a proof that it had been lately visited, either by travellers or banditti. The fears of my attendants supposed the latter; and believing that robbers lurked near us, I was persuaded to change my resolution of resting here all night, and proceed to another watering-place, which I was assured we might reach early in the evening.
We continued our journey without stopping again until noon, when we came across a large tree the locals called neema taba. It looked very unique, decorated with countless rags and bits of cloth that travelers crossing the wilderness had tied to the branches at various times. Initially, it was probably meant to let others know that water was nearby, but over time, it became a tradition that no one now passes without hanging something. I followed suit and hung a nice piece of cloth on one of the branches. I was told that either a well or a pool of water was not far off, so I instructed the workers to unload the donkeys so we could feed them corn and enjoy the food we had brought. In the meantime, I sent one of the elephant hunters to search for the well, planning to stay here for the night if we could find water. A pool was discovered, but the water was thick and muddy, and the hunter found the remains of a recently extinguished fire nearby along with leftover food, which indicated that it had been visited recently, either by travelers or bandits. My companions were more worried about the latter, and believing that robbers were hiding nearby, I changed my mind about staying here for the night and decided to head to another watering place that I was told we could reach early in the evening.
We departed accordingly, but it was eight o’clock at night before we came to the watering-place; and being now sufficiently fatigued with so long a day’s journey, we kindled a large fire and lay down, surrounded by our cattle, on the bare ground, more than a gunshot from any bush, the negroes agreeing to keep watch by turns to prevent surprise.
We left as planned, but it was eight o’clock at night when we reached the watering place. Since we were pretty worn out from such a long day of travel, we built a big fire and lay down on the ground, surrounded by our animals, more than a gunshot away from any bushes. The locals agreed to take turns keeping watch to avoid any surprises.
I know not, indeed, that any danger was justly to be dreaded, but the negroes were unaccountably apprehensive of banditti during the whole of the journey. As soon, therefore, as daylight appeared, we filled our soofroos (skins) and calabashes at the pool, and set out for Tallika, the first town in Bondou, which we reached about eleven o’clock in the forenoon (the 13th of December).
I really don't think there was any danger we needed to worry about, but the locals were inexplicably fearful of bandits throughout the journey. So, as soon as it was light out, we filled our soofroos (skins) and calabashes at the pool and set off for Tallika, the first town in Bondou, which we arrived at around eleven in the morning on December 13th.
CHAPTER IV.
FROM TALLIKA TO KAJAAGA.
Tallika, the frontier town of Bondou towards Woolli, is inhabited chiefly by Foulahs of the Mohammedan religion, who live in considerable affluence, partly by furnishing provisions to the coffles, or caravans, that pass through the town, and partly by the sale of ivory, obtained by hunting elephants, in which employment the young men are generally very successful. Here an officer belonging to the king of Bondou constantly resides, whose business it is to give timely information of the arrival of the caravans, which are taxed according to the number of loaded asses that arrive at Tallika.
Tallika, the frontier town of Bondou heading towards Woolli, is primarily populated by Foulahs who are Muslim. They live quite well, partly by supplying food to the caravans that travel through the town, and partly by selling ivory, which they obtain from hunting elephants—a pursuit in which the young men typically excel. An officer from the king of Bondou lives here permanently, and his job is to provide advance notice of the caravans' arrival, which are taxed based on the number of heavily loaded donkeys that come to Tallika.
I took up my residence at this officer’s house, and agreed with him to accompany me to Fatteconda, the residence of the king, for which he was to receive five bars; and before my departure I wrote a few lines to Dr. Laidley, and gave my letter to the master of a caravan bound for the Gambia. This caravan consisted of nine or ten people, with five asses loaded with ivory. The large teeth are conveyed in nets, two on each side of the ass; the small ones are wrapped up in skins, and secured with ropes.
I moved into this officer’s house and made arrangements for him to join me on the trip to Fatteconda, the king's home, for which he would receive five bars. Before I left, I wrote a short note to Dr. Laidley and handed it to the leader of a caravan heading to the Gambia. This caravan had about nine or ten people and five donkeys loaded with ivory. The large tusks are carried in nets, two on each side of the donkey, while the smaller ones are wrapped in skins and fastened with ropes.
December 14.—We left Tallika, and rode on very peaceably for about two miles, when a violent quarrel arose between two of my fellow-travellers, one of whom was the blacksmith, in the course of which they bestowed some opprobrious terms upon each other; and it is worthy of remark, that an African will sooner forgive a blow than a term of reproach applied to his ancestors. “Strike me, but do not curse my mother,” is a common expression even among the slaves. This sort of abuse, therefore, so enraged one of the disputants, that he drew his cutlass upon the blacksmith, and would certainly have ended the dispute in a very serious manner, if the others had not laid hold of him and wrested the cutlass from him. I was obliged to interfere, and put an end to this disagreeable business by desiring the blacksmith to be silent, and telling the other, who I thought was in the wrong, that if he attempted in future to draw his cutlass, or molest any of my attendants, I should look upon him as a robber, and shoot him without further ceremony. This threat had the desired effect, and we marched sullenly along till the afternoon, when we arrived at a number of small villages scattered over an open and fertile plain. At one of these, called Ganado, we took up our residence for the night; here an exchange of presents and a good supper terminated all animosities among my attendants, and the night was far advanced before any of us thought of going to sleep. We were amused by an itinerant singing man, who told a number of diverting stories, and played some sweet airs by blowing his breath upon a bow-string, and striking it at the same time with a stick.
December 14.—We left Tallika and rode peacefully for about two miles when a heated argument broke out between two of my fellow travelers, one of whom was the blacksmith. During the argument, they exchanged some pretty harsh insults. It’s notable that in Africa, people are quicker to forgive a physical blow than an insult directed at their ancestors. “Punch me, but don’t curse my mother” is a phrase you hear often, even among the slaves. This kind of insult made one of the guys so furious that he drew his cutlass on the blacksmith and would have seriously escalated things if the others hadn’t grabbed him and taken the weapon away. I had to step in and bring the situation under control by asking the blacksmith to keep quiet and warning the other guy, who I thought was in the wrong, that if he tried to pull his cutlass again or bothered any of my team, I would consider him a robber and shoot him without hesitation. This threat worked, and we trudged on in a gloomy silence until the afternoon, when we arrived at several small villages scattered across a lush, open plain. In one of these villages, called Ganado, we settled in for the night; there, an exchange of gifts and a hearty dinner resolved all tension among my crew, and it was late before anyone thought about going to bed. We were entertained by a wandering singing man, who shared a bunch of funny stories and played sweet melodies by blowing on a bow-string and hitting it with a stick at the same time.
December 15.—At daybreak my fellow-travellers, the Serawoollies, took leave of me, with many prayers for my safety. About a mile from Ganado we crossed a considerable branch of the Gambia, called Neriko. The banks were steep and covered with mimosas; and I observed in the mud a number of large mussels, but the natives do not eat them. About noon, the sun being exceedingly hot, we rested two hours in the shade of a tree, and purchased some milk and pounded corn from some Foulah herdsmen, and at sunset reached a town called Koorkarany, where the blacksmith had some relations; and here we rested two days.
December 15.—At daybreak, my fellow travelers, the Serawoollies, said goodbye to me, offering many prayers for my safety. About a mile from Ganado, we crossed a significant branch of the Gambia known as Neriko. The banks were steep and lined with mimosas, and I noticed several large mussels in the mud, although the locals don’t eat them. Around noon, with the sun blazing hot, we took a two-hour break in the shade of a tree and bought some milk and pounded corn from some Foulah herdsmen. By sunset, we arrived at a town called Koorkarany, where the blacksmith had some relatives, and we stayed here for two days.
Koorkarany is a Mohammedan town surrounded by a high wall, and is provided with a mosque. Here I was shown a number of Arabic manuscripts, particularly a copy of the book before mentioned, called Al Sharra. The maraboo, or priest, in whose possession it was, read and explained to me in Mandingo many of the most remarkable passages, and, in return, I showed him Richardson’s Arabic Grammar, which he very much admired.
Koorkarany is a Muslim town surrounded by a high wall and has a mosque. Here, I was shown several Arabic manuscripts, especially a copy of the book mentioned earlier, called Al Sharra. The maraboo, or priest, who had it read and explained many of the most notable passages to me in Mandingo, and in return, I showed him Richardson’s Arabic Grammar, which he admired a lot.
On the evening of the second day (December 17) we departed from Koorkarany. We were joined by a young man who was travelling to Fatteconda for salt; and as night set in we reached Dooggi, a small village about three miles from Koorkarany.
On the evening of the second day (December 17), we left Koorkarany. We were joined by a young man who was heading to Fatteconda for salt, and as night fell, we arrived in Dooggi, a small village about three miles from Koorkarany.
Provisions were here so cheap that I purchased a bullock for six small stones of amber; for I found my company increase or diminish according to the good fare they met with.
Provisions were so cheap here that I bought a bull for just six small pieces of amber; I noticed my group would grow or shrink depending on the quality of the food they had.
December 18.—Early in the morning we departed from Dooggi, and, being joined by a number of Foulahs and other people, made a formidable appearance, and were under no apprehension of being plundered in the woods. About eleven o’clock, one of the asses proving very refractory, the negroes took a curious method to make him tractable. They cut a forked stick, and putting the forked part into the ass’s mouth, like the bit of a bridle, tied the two smaller parts together above his head, leaving the lower part of the stick of sufficient length to strike against the ground, if the ass should attempt to put his head down. After this the ass walked along quietly and gravely enough, taking care, after some practice, to hold his head sufficiently high to prevent stones or roots of trees from striking against the end of the stick, which experience had taught him would give a severe shock to his teeth. This contrivance produced a ludicrous appearance, but my fellow-travellers told me it was constantly adopted by the slatees, and always proved effectual.
December 18.—Early in the morning, we left Dooggi, and joined by several Foulahs and other people, we made a strong group and felt safe from being robbed in the woods. Around eleven o'clock, when one of the donkeys became very stubborn, the locals used an interesting method to make him cooperate. They took a forked stick, put the forked part in the donkey’s mouth like a bridle, and tied the two smaller parts together above his head, leaving the longer part enough to hit the ground if the donkey tried to lower his head. After that, the donkey walked along calmly and seriously, learning to keep his head up high enough to avoid hitting the ground with the stick, which he had figured out would hurt his teeth. This setup looked funny, but my traveling companions said it was commonly used by the slatees and was always effective.
In the evening we arrived at a few scattered villages, surrounded with extensive cultivation, at one of which, called Buggil, we passed the night in a miserable hut, having no other bed than a bundle of corn-stalks, and no provisions but what we brought with us. The wells here are dug with great ingenuity, and are very deep. I measured one of the bucket-ropes, and found the depth of the well to be twenty-eight fathoms.
In the evening, we reached some scattered villages surrounded by large fields. We spent the night in a run-down hut in one of them, called Buggil, with nothing to sleep on but a bundle of corn stalks and no food except what we had brought along. The wells here are dug with a lot of skill and are quite deep. I measured one of the bucket ropes and found the well to be twenty-eight fathoms deep.
December 19.—We departed from Buggil, and travelled along a dry, stony height, covered with mimosas, till mid-day, when the land sloped towards the east, and we descended into a deep valley, in which I observed abundance of whinstone and white quartz. Pursuing our course to the eastward, along this valley in the bed of an exhausted river-course, we came to a large village, where we intended to lodge. We found many of the natives dressed in a thin French gauze, which they called byqui; this being a light airy dress, and well calculated to display the shape of their persons, is much esteemed by the ladies. The manners of these females, however, did not correspond with their dress, for they were rude and troublesome in the highest degree; they surrounded me in numbers, begging for amber, beads, &c., and were so vehement in their solicitations, that I found it impossible to resist them. They tore my cloak, cut the buttons from my boy’s clothes, and were proceeding to other outrages, when I mounted my horse and rode off, followed for half-a-mile by a body of these harpies.
December 19.—We left Buggil and traveled along a dry, rocky height covered with mimosas until midday, when the land sloped down toward the east, and we descended into a deep valley where I noticed a lot of whinstone and white quartz. Continuing eastward along this valley, which was the bed of an old river, we reached a large village where we planned to stay. Many of the locals were wearing a thin French gauze, which they called byqui; this lightweight, airy outfit is flattering and is highly valued by the women. However, the behavior of these women didn’t match their attire, as they were extremely rude and demanding. They surrounded me in droves, asking for amber, beads, etc., and were so insistent that I found it impossible to say no. They ripped my cloak, tore the buttons from my boy’s clothes, and were about to commit further offenses when I got on my horse and rode away, with a group of these harpies following me for half a mile.
In the evening we reached Soobrudooka, and as my company was numerous (being fourteen), I purchased a sheep and abundance of corn for supper; after which we lay down by the bundles, and passed an uncomfortable night in a heavy dew.
In the evening, we arrived at Soobrudooka, and since my group was large (fourteen of us), I bought a sheep and plenty of corn for dinner. After that, we settled down by the bundles and spent a rough night in the heavy dew.
December 20.—We departed from Soobrudooka, and at two o’clock reached a large village situated on the banks of the Falemé river, which is here rapid and rocky. The natives were employed in fishing in various ways. The large fish were taken in long baskets made of split cane, and placed in a strong current, which was created by walls of stone built across the stream, certain open places being left, through which the water rushed with great force. Some of these baskets were more than twenty feet long, and when once the fish had entered one of them, the force of the stream prevented it from returning. The small fish were taken in great numbers in hand-nets, which the natives weave of cotton, and use with great dexterity. The fish last mentioned are about the size of sprats, and are prepared for sale in different ways; the most common is by pounding them entire as they come from the stream, in a wooden mortar, and exposing them to dry in the sun, in large lumps like sugar loaves. It may be supposed that the smell is not very agreeable; but in the Moorish countries to the north of the Senegal, where fish is scarcely known, this preparation is esteemed as a luxury, and sold to considerable advantage. The manner of using it by the natives is by dissolving a piece of this black loaf in boiling water, and mixing it with their kouskous.
December 20.—We left Soobrudooka and at two o'clock arrived at a large village on the banks of the Falemé River, which is fast-flowing and rocky here. The locals were busy fishing in various ways. They used long baskets made of split cane and placed them in a strong current created by stone walls built across the stream, leaving certain gaps where the water surged with great intensity. Some of these baskets were over twenty feet long, and once the fish entered, the force of the stream kept them from escaping. The smaller fish were caught in large quantities using hand nets woven from cotton, which the locals used skillfully. These smaller fish are about the size of sprats and are prepared for sale in different ways; the most common method is to pound them whole in a wooden mortar as they come out of the water and then dry them in the sun in large clumps like sugar loaves. It’s safe to say that the smell isn't very pleasant, but in the Moorish countries north of the Senegal, where fish is hardly known, this preparation is considered a delicacy and sold at a good profit. The locals use it by dissolving a piece of this black loaf in boiling water and mixing it with their kouskous.
On returning to the village, after an excursion to the river-side to inspect the fishery, an old Moorish shereef came to bestow his blessing upon me, and beg some paper to write saphies upon. This man had seen Major Houghton in the kingdom of Kaarta, and told me that he died in the country of the Moors.
On returning to the village after a trip to the river to check out the fishery, an old Moorish shereef came to give me his blessing and asked for some paper to write saphies on. This man had met Major Houghton in the kingdom of Kaarta and told me that he died in the land of the Moors.
About three in the afternoon we continued our course along the bank of the river to the northward, till eight o’clock, when we reached Nayemow. Here the hospitable master of the town received us kindly, and presented us with a bullock. In return I gave him some amber and beads.
About three in the afternoon, we continued traveling along the bank of the river to the north until eight o’clock, when we arrived at Nayemow. Here, the welcoming leader of the town greeted us warmly and gave us a bull. In return, I offered him some amber and beads.
December 21.—In the morning, having agreed for a canoe to carry over my bundles, I crossed the river, which came up to my knees as I sat on my horse; but the water is so clear, that from the high bank the bottom is visible all the way over.
December 21.—In the morning, after arranging for a canoe to carry my bags, I crossed the river, which reached my knees while I sat on my horse; but the water is so clear that from the high bank, I could see the bottom all the way across.
About noon we entered Fatteconda, the capital of Bondou, and in a little time received an invitation to the house of a respectable slatee: for as there are no public-houses in Africa, it is customary for strangers to stand at the bentang, or some other place of public resort, till they are invited to a lodging by some of the inhabitants. We accepted the offer; and in an hour afterwards a person came and told me that he was sent on purpose to conduct me to the king, who was very desirous of seeing me immediately, if I was not too much fatigued.
Around noon, we arrived in Fatteconda, the capital of Bondou, and shortly after, we got an invitation to the home of a respected local. Since there are no hotels in Africa, it's common for travelers to wait at the bentang or another public spot until a local invites them to stay. We accepted the invitation, and an hour later, someone came and informed me that he had been sent specifically to take me to the king, who was really eager to see me right away, as long as I wasn't too tired.
I took my interpreter with me, and followed the messenger till we got quite out of the town, and crossed some corn-fields; when, suspecting some trick, I stopped, and asked the guide whither he was going. Upon which, he pointed to a man sitting under a tree at some little distance, and told me that the king frequently gave audience in that retired manner, in order to avoid a crowd of people, and that nobody but myself and my interpreter must approach him. When I advanced the king desired me to come and sit by him upon the mat; and, after hearing my story, on which he made no observation, he asked if I wished to purchase any slaves or gold. Being answered in the negative, he seemed rather surprised, but desired me to come to him in the evening, and he would give me some provisions.
I took my interpreter with me and followed the messenger until we were out of the town and crossed some cornfields. Suspecting something was off, I stopped and asked the guide where he was going. He pointed to a man sitting under a tree a little way off and said that the king often held audiences in that quiet spot to avoid a crowd, and that only my interpreter and I could approach him. When I got closer, the king asked me to come and sit beside him on the mat. After hearing my story, without making any comments, he asked if I wanted to buy any slaves or gold. When I said no, he seemed a bit surprised but invited me to come back in the evening, and he would provide me with some food.
This monarch was called Almami, a Moorish name, though I was told that he was not a Mohammedan, but a kafir or pagan. I had heard that he had acted towards Major Houghton with great unkindness, and caused him to be plundered. His behaviour, therefore, towards myself at this interview, though much more civil than I expected, was far from freeing me from uneasiness. I still apprehended some double-dealing; and as I was now entirely in his power, I thought it best to smooth the way by a present. Accordingly, I took with me in the evening one canister of gunpowder, some amber, tobacco, and my umbrella; and as I considered that my bundles would inevitably be searched, I concealed some few articles in the roof of the hut where I lodged, and I put on my new blue coat in order to preserve it.
This king was called Almami, a Moorish name, but I was told he wasn’t a Muslim, just a kafir or pagan. I had heard that he treated Major Houghton very poorly and had him robbed. His behavior towards me during this meeting, while more polite than I expected, didn’t completely alleviate my anxiety. I still suspected some trickery, and since I was completely at his mercy, I thought it would be wise to smooth things over with a gift. So, I took with me in the evening a canister of gunpowder, some amber, tobacco, and my umbrella. Knowing that my belongings would probably be searched, I hid a few items in the roof of the hut where I was staying, and I put on my new blue coat to keep it safe.
All the houses belonging to the king and his family are surrounded by a lofty mud wall, which converts the whole into a kind of citadel. The interior is subdivided into different courts. At the first place of entrance I observed a man standing with a musket on his shoulder; and I found the way to the presence very intricate, leading through many passages, with sentinels placed at the different doors. When we came to the entrance of the court in which the king resides, both my guide and interpreter, according to custom, took off their sandals; and the former pronounced the king’s name aloud, repeating it till he was answered from within. We found the monarch sitting upon a mat, and two attendants with him. I repeated what I had before told him concerning the object of my journey, and my reasons for passing through his country. He seemed, however, but half satisfied. When I offered to show him the contents of my portmanteau, and everything belonging to me, he was convinced; and it was evident that his suspicion had arisen from a belief that every white man must of necessity be a trader. When I had delivered my presents, he seemed well pleased, and was particularly delighted with the umbrella, which he repeatedly furled and unfurled, to the great admiration of himself and his two attendants, who could not for some time comprehend the use of this wonderful machine. After this I was about to take my leave, when the king, desiring me to stop a while, began a long preamble in favour of the whites, extolling their immense wealth and good dispositions. He next proceeded to an eulogium on my blue coat, of which the yellow buttons seemed particularly to catch his fancy; and he concluded by entreating me to present him with it, assuring me, for my consolation under the loss of it, that he would wear it on all public occasions, and inform every one who saw it of my great liberality towards him. The request of an African prince, in his own dominions, particularly when made to a stranger, comes little short of a command. It is only a way of obtaining by gentle means what he can, if he pleases, take by force; and as it was against my interest to offend him by a refusal, I very quietly took off my coat, the only good one in my possession, and laid it at his feet.
All the houses belonging to the king and his family are surrounded by a tall mud wall, making it feel like a citadel. Inside, there are several different courtyards. At the main entrance, I saw a man standing with a musket on his shoulder, and I found the route to the king very complicated, with sentinels posted at various doors. When we reached the entrance of the courtyard where the king lives, both my guide and interpreter, as was customary, took off their sandals, and the guide called out the king’s name, repeating it until he got a response from inside. We found the king sitting on a mat with two attendants beside him. I repeated what I had previously told him about the purpose of my trip and my reasons for passing through his territory. However, he didn’t seem entirely satisfied. When I offered to show him what was in my suitcase and everything I had, he was convinced, and it was clear his suspicion stemmed from the belief that every white man must be a trader. After I presented my gifts, he seemed pleased, particularly with the umbrella, which he opened and closed repeatedly, much to the fascination of himself and his two attendants, who took a while to understand the use of this incredible item. Just as I was about to leave, the king asked me to wait a moment and started a long speech praising white people, highlighting their immense wealth and good nature. He then complimented my blue coat, especially the yellow buttons, which seemed to catch his attention. He concluded by asking me to give it to him, assuring me, as consolation for losing it, that he would wear it for all public events and tell everyone how generous I was. The request of an African prince, especially when made to a stranger in his own kingdom, is nearly a command. It’s a way of gently getting what he could take by force if he wanted to. Since it wasn’t in my best interest to refuse him, I calmly took off my coat, the only nice one I had, and laid it at his feet.
In return for my compliance, he presented me with great plenty of provisions, and desired to see me again in the morning. I accordingly attended, and found him sitting upon his bed. He told me he was sick, and wished to have a little blood taken from him; but I had no sooner, tied up his arm and displayed the lancet, than his courage failed, and he begged me to postpone the operation till the afternoon, as he felt himself, he said, much better than he had been, and thanked me kindly for my readiness to serve him. He then observed that his women were very desirous to see me, and requested that I would favour them with a visit. An attendant was ordered to conduct me; and I had no sooner entered the court appropriated to the ladies, than the whole seraglio surrounded me—some begging for physic, some for amber, and all of them desirous of trying that great African specific, blood-letting. They were ten or twelve in number, most of them young and handsome, and wearing on their heads ornaments of gold, and beads of amber.
In exchange for my cooperation, he provided me with a lot of supplies and asked to see me again in the morning. So, I showed up and found him sitting on his bed. He told me he was feeling unwell and wanted to have some blood drawn. However, as soon as I tied up his arm and showed him the lancet, he lost his nerve and asked me to delay the procedure until the afternoon, claiming he felt much better and thanking me for my willingness to help. He then mentioned that his women were eager to meet me and requested that I pay them a visit. An attendant was assigned to take me, and as soon as I entered the area designated for the ladies, the entire harem gathered around me—some asking for medicine, some for amber, and all wanting to experience that famous African remedy, blood-letting. There were about ten or twelve of them, most young and attractive, adorned with gold ornaments and amber beads.
They rallied me with a good deal of gaiety on different subjects, particularly upon the whiteness of my skin and the prominency of my nose. They insisted that both were artificial. The first, they said, was produced when I was an infant, by dipping me in milk; and they insisted that my nose had been pinched every day, till it had acquired its present unsightly and unnatural conformation. On my part, without disputing my own deformity, I paid them many compliments on African beauty. I praised the glossy jet of their skins, and the lovely depression of their noses; but they said that flattery, or, as they emphatically termed it, honey-mouth, was not esteemed in Bondou. In return, however, for my company or my compliments (to which, by the way, they seemed not so insensible as they affected to be) they presented me with a jar of honey and some fish, which were sent to my lodging; and I was desired to come again to the king a little before sunset.
They joked with me cheerfully about different things, especially about how fair my skin was and how prominent my nose was. They claimed both were unnatural. They said my skin was made so when I was a baby by being dipped in milk, and they insisted that my nose had been pinched every day until it became its current ugly and unnatural shape. I didn’t argue about my own appearance; instead, I complimented them on their African beauty. I praised the shiny dark tones of their skin and the lovely shape of their noses, but they told me that flattery, or as they strongly called it, honey-mouth, wasn’t valued in Bondou. However, in exchange for my company or compliments (which they didn’t seem as indifferent to as they pretended), they sent a jar of honey and some fish to my place, and I was asked to come back to see the king just before sunset.
I carried with me some beads and writing-paper, it being usual to present some small offering on taking leave, in return for which the king gave me five drachms of gold, observing that it was but a trifle, and given out of pure friendship, but would be of use to me in travelling, for the purchase of provisions. He seconded this act of kindness by one still greater, politely telling me that, though it was customary to examine the baggage of every traveller passing through his country, yet, in the present instance, he would dispense without ceremony, adding, I was at liberty to depart when I pleased.
I had some beads and writing paper with me, as it’s customary to give a small gift when saying goodbye. In return, the king gave me five drachmas of gold, saying it was just a small amount given out of friendship, but it would help me with my travels and buying food. He followed up this gesture with an even greater one, kindly letting me know that although it was usual to check the luggage of every traveler passing through his country, he would skip that formality in my case. He added that I could leave whenever I wanted.
Accordingly, on the morning of the 23rd, we left Fatteconda, and about eleven o’clock came to a small village, where we determined to stop for the rest of the day.
Accordingly, on the morning of the 23rd, we left Fatteconda, and around eleven o’clock, we arrived at a small village, where we decided to stay for the rest of the day.
In the afternoon my fellow-travellers informed me that, as this was the boundary between Bondou and Kajaaga, and dangerous for travellers, it would be necessary to continue our journey by night, until we should reach a more hospitable part of the country. I agreed to the proposal, and hired two people for guides through the woods; and as soon as the people of the village were gone to sleep (the moon shining bright) we set out. The stillness of the air, the howling of the wild beasts, and the deep solitude of the forest, made the scene solemn and oppressive. Not a word was uttered by any of us but in a whisper; all were attentive, and every one anxious to show his sagacity by pointing out to me the wolves and hyænas, as they glided like shadows from one thicket to another. Towards morning we arrived at a village called Kimmoo, where our guides awakened one of their acquaintances, and we stopped to give the asses some corn, and roast a few ground-nuts for ourselves. At daylight we resumed our journey, and in the afternoon arrived at Joag, in the kingdom of Kajaaga.
In the afternoon, my fellow travelers told me that since this was the boundary between Bondou and Kajaaga and it was dangerous for travelers, we would need to continue our journey at night until we reached a safer area. I agreed to the suggestion and hired two guides to help us through the woods. Once the villagers had gone to sleep (with the moon shining brightly), we set off. The stillness in the air, the howling of wild animals, and the deep solitude of the forest made the scene feel serious and heavy. Not a single word was spoken among us except in whispers; everyone was alert, eager to show off their knowledge by pointing out wolves and hyenas as they moved like shadows between the bushes. By morning, we arrived at a village called Kimmoo, where our guides woke up one of their friends, and we took a break to feed the donkeys some corn and roast a few groundnuts for ourselves. At daylight, we continued our journey and reached Joag in the kingdom of Kajaaga by the afternoon.
Being now in a country and among a people differing in many respects from those that have as yet fallen under our observation, I shall, before I proceed further, give some account of Bondou (the territory we have left) and its inhabitants, the Foulahs, the description of whom I purposely reserved for this part of my work.
Being in a country and among a people that differ in many ways from those we've observed so far, I will, before moving on, provide some details about Bondou (the area we've just left) and its inhabitants, the Foulahs, a description that I intentionally held back for this section of my work.
Bondou is bounded on the east by Bambouk, on the south-east and south by Tenda and the Simbani wilderness, on the south-west by Woolli, on the west by Foota Torra, and on the north by Kajaaga.
Bondou is bordered to the east by Bambouk, to the southeast and south by Tenda and the Simbani wilderness, to the southwest by Woolli, to the west by Foota Torra, and to the north by Kajaaga.
The country, like that of Woolli, is very generally covered with woods, but the land is more elevated, and, towards the Falemé river, rises into considerable hills. In native fertility the soil is not surpassed, I believe, by any part of Africa.
The country, similar to Woolli, is mostly covered in woods, but the land is higher, and towards the Falemé river, it rises into significant hills. In terms of natural richness, I believe the soil here is unmatched by any other part of Africa.
From the central situation of Bondou, between the Gambia and Senegal rivers, it is become a place of great resort, both for the slatees, who generally pass through it on going from the coast to the interior countries, and for occasional traders, who frequently come hither from the inland countries to purchase salt.
From the central location of Bondou, nestled between the Gambia and Senegal rivers, it has become a popular spot for both the slatees, who usually pass through on their way from the coast to the interior regions, and for occasional traders, who often come here from the inland areas to buy salt.
These different branches of commerce are conducted principally by Mandingoes and Serawoollies, who have settled in the country. These merchants likewise carry on a considerable trade with Gedumah and other Moorish countries, bartering corn and blue cotton cloths for salt, which they again barter in Dentila and other districts for iron, shea-butter, and small quantities of gold-dust. They likewise sell a variety of sweet-smelling gums, packed up in small bags, containing each about a pound. These gums, being thrown on hot embers, produce a very pleasant odour, and are used by the Mandingoes for perfuming their huts and clothes.
These different branches of commerce are mainly operated by Mandingoes and Serawoollies who have settled in the country. These merchants also engage in significant trade with Gedumah and other Moorish countries, exchanging corn and blue cotton cloth for salt, which they then trade in Dentila and other areas for iron, shea butter, and small amounts of gold dust. They also sell a variety of fragrant gums, packed in small bags of about a pound each. When these gums are thrown on hot embers, they produce a very pleasant scent, which the Mandingoes use to fragrance their huts and clothes.
The customs, or duties on travellers, are very heavy; in almost every town an ass-load pays a bar of European merchandise, and at Fatteconda, the residence of the king, one Indian baft, or a musket, and six bottles of gunpowder, are exacted as the common tribute. By means of these duties, the king of Bondou is well supplied with arms and ammunition—a circumstance which makes him formidable to the neighbouring states.
The customs, or taxes on travelers, are extremely high; in nearly every town, an ass-load of goods costs a bar of European merchandise, and at Fatteconda, the king's residence, one Indian baft (a type of cloth), a musket, and six bottles of gunpowder are required as the standard tribute. Because of these taxes, the king of Bondou is well-equipped with weapons and ammunition, making him a serious threat to nearby states.
The inhabitants differ in their complexions and national manners from the Mandingoes and Serawoollies, with whom they are frequently at war. Some years ago the king of Bondou crossed the Falemé river with a numerous army; and, after a short and bloody campaign, totally defeated the forces of Samboo, king of Bambouk, who was obliged to sue for peace, and surrender to him all the towns along the eastern bank of the Falemé.
The people vary in their skin tones and cultural habits compared to the Mandingoes and Serawoollies, with whom they often fight. A few years back, the king of Bondou led a large army across the Falemé River, and after a brief and fierce campaign, completely defeated the forces of Samboo, the king of Bambouk, who had to ask for peace and hand over all the towns along the eastern bank of the Falemé.
The Foulahs in general (as has been observed in a former chapter) are of a tawny complexion, with small features and soft silky hair; next to the Mandingoes, they are undoubtedly the most considerable of all the nations in this part of Africa. Their original country is said to be Fooladoo (which signifies the country of the Foulahs); but they possess at present many other kingdoms at a great distance from each other; their complexion, however, is not exactly the same in the different districts; in Bondou, and the other kingdoms which are situated in the vicinity of the Moorish territories, they are of a more yellow complexion than in the southern states.
The Foulahs generally (as mentioned in a previous chapter) have a tawny complexion, with small features and soft, silky hair; next to the Mandingoes, they are definitely the most significant of all the nations in this part of Africa. Their original homeland is thought to be Fooladoo (which means the country of the Foulahs); however, they currently occupy many other kingdoms that are far apart from each other. Their complexion does vary in different regions; in Bondou and the other kingdoms near the Moorish territories, they tend to have a more yellow complexion than in the southern states.
The Foulahs of Bondou are naturally of a mild and gentle disposition, but the uncharitable maxims of the Koran have made them less hospitable to strangers, and more reserved in their behaviour, than the Mandingoes. They evidently consider all the negro natives as their inferiors; and, when talking of different nations, always rank themselves among the white people.
The Foulahs of Bondou are generally mild and gentle, but the unkind beliefs of the Koran have made them less welcoming to outsiders and more reserved in their behavior compared to the Mandingoes. They clearly see all the native Africans as beneath them and always place themselves among the white people when discussing different nations.
Their government differs from that of the Mandingoes chiefly in this, that they are more immediately under the influence of Mohammedan laws; for all the chief men, the king excepted, and a large majority of the inhabitants of Bondou, are Mussulmans, and the authority and laws of the Prophet are everywhere looked upon as sacred and decisive. In the exercise of their faith, however, they are not very intolerant towards such of their countrymen as still retain their ancient superstitions. Religious persecution is not known among them, nor is it necessary; for the system of Mohammed is made to extend itself by means abundantly more efficacious. By establishing small schools in the different towns, where many of the pagan as well as Mohammedan children are taught to read the Koran, and instructed in the tenets of the Prophet, the Mohammedan priests fix a bias on the minds, and form the character, of their young disciples, which no accidents of life can ever afterwards remove or alter. Many of these little schools I visited in my progress through the country, and I observed with pleasure the great docility and submissive deportment of the children, and heartily wished they had had better instructors and a purer religion.
Their government is different from that of the Mandingoes mainly because they are more directly influenced by Islamic laws. Almost all the prominent figures, except for the king, and a large majority of people in Bondou are Muslims, and the authority and laws of the Prophet are regarded as sacred and final. However, in practicing their faith, they are not very intolerant towards those of their countrymen who still hold onto their ancient beliefs. There is no religious persecution among them, nor is it necessary; the system of Islam spreads itself through much more effective means. By setting up small schools in various towns, where many of both pagan and Muslim children are taught to read the Koran and learn the teachings of the Prophet, the Muslim teachers influence the minds and shape the character of their young students in ways that life’s future circumstances cannot change or alter. I visited many of these small schools during my travels through the country, and I was pleased to see the great eagerness and obedient behavior of the children, and I sincerely wished they had better teachers and a purer faith.
With the Mohammedan faith is also introduced the Arabic language, with which most of the Foulahs have a slight acquaintance. Their native tongue abounds very much in liquids, but there is something unpleasant in the manner of pronouncing it. A stranger, on hearing the common conversation of two Foulahs, would imagine that they were scolding each other. Their numerals are these:—
With the Muslim faith comes the Arabic language, which most of the Foulahs have some familiarity with. Their native language is rich in fluid sounds, but there's something off-putting about the way it's pronounced. A newcomer, upon hearing two Foulahs chatting, might think they were arguing. Their numerals are as follows:—
One One |
Go. Go. |
Two Two |
Deeddee. Deeddee. |
Three Three |
Tettee. Tettee. |
Four Four |
Nee. No. |
Five Five |
Jouee. Jouee. |
Six Six |
Jego. Jego. |
Seven Seven |
Jedeeddee. Jedeeddee. |
Eight Eight |
Je Tettee. I’m Tired. |
Nine Nine |
Je Nee. Je No. |
Ten Ten |
Sappo. Sappy. |
The industry of the Foulahs, in the occupations of pasturage and agriculture, is everywhere remarkable. Even on the banks of the Gambia, the greater part of the corn is raised by them, and their herds and flocks are more numerous and in better condition than those of the Mandingoes; but in Bondou they are opulent in a high degree, and enjoy all the necessaries of life in the greatest profusion. They display great skill in the management of their cattle, making them extremely gentle by kindness and familiarity. On the approach of the night, they are collected from the woods and secured in folds called korrees, which are constructed in the neighbourhood of the different villages. In the middle of each korree is erected a small hut, wherein one or two of the herdsmen keep watch during the night, to prevent the cattle from being stolen, and to keep up the fires which are kindled round the korree to frighten away the wild beasts.
The Foulah people are really impressive in their farming and herding practices. Even along the banks of the Gambia, they grow most of the corn, and their cattle and sheep are more plentiful and healthier than those of the Mandingoes. In Bondou, they are quite wealthy and have plenty of life's essentials. They show a lot of skill in taking care of their animals, making them very gentle through kindness and familiarity. When night comes, they gather the animals from the woods and secure them in pens called korrees, which are built near the different villages. In the center of each korree, there’s a small hut where one or two herdsmen stay overnight to watch over the cattle, prevent theft, and keep the fires lit around the korree to scare off wild animals.
The cattle are milked in the mornings and evenings: the milk is excellent; but the quantity obtained from any one cow is by no means so great as in Europe. The Foulahs use the milk chiefly as an article of diet, and that not until it is quite sour. The cream which it affords is very thick, and is converted into butter by stirring it violently in a large calabash. This butter, when melted over a gentle fire, and freed from impurities, is preserved in small earthen pots, and forms a part in most of their dishes; it serves likewise to anoint their heads, and is bestowed very liberally on their faces and arms.
The cattle are milked in the mornings and evenings: the milk is great; however, the amount from each cow isn’t as high as in Europe. The Foulahs mainly use the milk as a food source, and they prefer it once it’s completely sour. The cream is quite thick and is turned into butter by stirring it vigorously in a large calabash. This butter, when melted over a low heat and cleaned of impurities, is kept in small clay pots and is included in most of their meals; it’s also used to moisturize their hair and is generously applied to their faces and arms.
But although milk is plentiful, it is somewhat remarkable that the Foulahs, and indeed all the inhabitants of this part of Africa, are totally unacquainted with the art of making cheese. A firm attachment to the customs of their ancestors makes them view with an eye of prejudice everything that looks like innovation. The heat of the climate and the great scarcity of salt are held forth as unanswerable objections; and the whole process appears to them too long and troublesome to be attended with any solid advantage.
But even though milk is abundant, it's quite surprising that the Foulahs, and really everyone living in this part of Africa, have no idea how to make cheese. Their strong attachment to their ancestors' traditions makes them look at anything that seems new with skepticism. They argue that the hot climate and the lack of salt are valid reasons against it, and they see the entire process as too lengthy and difficult to offer any real benefit.
Besides the cattle, which constitute the chief wealth of the Foulahs, they possess some excellent horses, the breed of which seems to be a mixture of the Arabian with the original African.
Besides the cattle, which make up the main wealth of the Foulahs, they also have some excellent horses, which appear to be a mix of Arabian and native African breeds.
CHAPTER V.
FROM KAJAAGA TO KASSON.
The kingdom of Kajaaga, in which I was now arrived, is called by the French Gallam, but the name that I have adopted is universally used by the natives. This country is bounded on the south-east and south by Bambouk, on the west by Bondou and Foota-Torra, and on the north by the river Senegal.
The kingdom of Kajaaga, where I have just arrived, is known as Gallam by the French, but the name I've chosen is the one that all the locals use. This country is bordered to the southeast and south by Bambouk, to the west by Bondou and Foota-Torra, and to the north by the Senegal River.
The air and climate are, I believe, more pure and salubrious than at any of the settlements towards the coast; the face of the country is everywhere interspersed with a pleasing variety of hills and valleys; and the windings of the Senegal river, which descends from the rocky hills of the interior, make the scenery on its banks very picturesque and beautiful.
The air and climate are, I think, cleaner and healthier than in any of the coastal settlements; the landscape is filled with a delightful mix of hills and valleys; and the twists of the Senegal River, which flows down from the rocky hills of the interior, make the view along its banks really scenic and beautiful.
The inhabitants are called Serawoollies, or (as the French write it) Seracolets. Their complexion is a jet black: they are not to be distinguished in this respect from the Jaloffs.
The people are known as Serawoollies, or (as the French write it) Seracolets. Their skin is jet black: they cannot be distinguished from the Jaloffs in this regard.
The government is monarchical, and the regal authority, from what I experienced of it, seems to be sufficiently formidable. The people themselves, however, complain of no oppression, and seemed all very anxious to support the king in a contest he was going to enter into with the sovereign of Kasson. The Serawoollies are habitually a trading people; they formerly carried on a great commerce with the French in gold and slaves, and still maintain some traffic in slaves with the British factories on the Gambia. They are reckoned tolerably fair and just in their dealings, but are indefatigable in their exertions to acquire wealth, and they derive considerable profits by the sale of salt and cotton cloth in distant countries. When a Serawoolli merchant returns home from a trading expedition the neighbours immediately assemble to congratulate him upon his arrival. On these occasions the traveller displays his wealth and liberality by making a few presents to his friends; but if he has been unsuccessful his levee is soon over, and every one looks upon him as a man of no understanding, who could perform a long journey, and (as they express it) “bring back nothing but the hair upon his head.”
The government is a monarchy, and from what I've seen, the royal authority seems pretty strong. The people themselves, however, claim to feel no oppression and appear eager to support the king in a conflict he's about to have with the ruler of Kasson. The Serawoollies are typically a trading people; they used to engage in significant trade with the French in gold and slaves and still have some trade in slaves with British factories on the Gambia. They are considered fairly honest in their dealings, but they are relentless in their efforts to gain wealth, earning considerable profits from selling salt and cotton cloth in far-off places. When a Serawoolli merchant returns home from a trading trip, neighbors quickly gather to congratulate him on his arrival. During these times, the traveler shows off his wealth and generosity by giving a few gifts to his friends; but if he hasn't been successful, his gathering ends quickly, and everyone sees him as someone lacking judgment who could make a long journey and, as they put it, “bring back nothing but the hair on his head.”
Their language abounds much in gutturals, and is not so harmonious as that spoken by the Foulahs. It is, however, well worth acquiring by those who travel through this part of the African continent, it being very generally understood in the kingdoms of Kasson, Kaarta, Ludamar, and the northern parts of Bambarra. In all these countries the Serawoollies are the chief traders. Their numerals are:—
Their language has a lot of guttural sounds and isn't as melodic as the one spoken by the Foulahs. However, it's definitely worth learning for anyone traveling through this region of Africa, as it's widely understood in the kingdoms of Kasson, Kaarta, Ludamar, and the northern areas of Bambarra. In all these countries, the Serawoollies are the main traders. Their numbers are:—
One One |
Bani. Bani. |
Two Two |
Fillo. Filo. |
Three Three |
Sicco. Sicco. |
Four Four |
Narrato. Narrate. |
Five Five |
Karrago. Karrago. |
Six Six |
Toomo. Toomo. |
Seven Seven |
Nero. Nero. |
Eight Eight |
Sego. Sego. |
Nine 9 |
Kabbo. Kabbo. |
Ten 10 |
Tamo. Tamo. |
Twenty Twenty |
Tamo di Fillo. Tamo di Fillo. |
We arrived at Joag, the frontier town of this kingdom, on the 24th of December, and took up our residence at the house of the chief man, who is here no longer known by the title of alkaid, but is called the dooty. He was a rigid Mohammedan, but distinguished for his hospitality. This town may be supposed, on a gross computation, to contain two thousand inhabitants. It is surrounded by a high wall, in which are a number of port-holes, for musketry to fire through, in case of an attack. Every man’s possession is likewise surrounded by a wall, the whole forming so many distinct citadels; and amongst a people unacquainted with the use of artillery these walls answer all the purposes of stronger fortifications. To the westward of the town is a small river, on the banks of which the natives raise great plenty of tobacco and onions.
We arrived at Joag, the frontier town of this kingdom, on December 24th, and settled into the home of the chief, who is no longer referred to as alkaid, but is called the dooty. He was a strict Muslim but known for his hospitality. This town is estimated to have about two thousand inhabitants. It is surrounded by a high wall, which has several port-holes for muskets to fire through in case of an attack. Each person’s property is also enclosed by a wall, creating many distinct citadels; and among a people unfamiliar with artillery, these walls serve the purpose of stronger defenses. To the west of the town is a small river, where the locals grow a lot of tobacco and onions.
The same evening Madiboo, the bushreen, who had accompanied me from Pisania, went to pay a visit to his father and mother, who dwelt at a neighbouring town called Dramanet. He was joined by my other attendant, the blacksmith. As soon as it was dark I was invited to see the sports of the inhabitants, it being their custom, on the arrival of strangers, to welcome them by diversions of different kinds. I found a great crowd surrounding a party who were dancing, by the light of some large fires, to the music of four drums, which were beat with great exactness and uniformity. The dances, however, consisted more in wanton gestures than in muscular exertion or graceful attitudes. The ladies vied with each other in displaying the most voluptuous movements imaginable.
That same evening, Madiboo, the bushreen who had come with me from Pisania, went to visit his parents, who lived in a nearby town called Dramanet. He was accompanied by my other helper, the blacksmith. As soon as it got dark, I was invited to check out the celebrations of the locals since it was their custom to welcome newcomers with various kinds of entertainment. I found a large crowd gathered around a group dancing, illuminated by some big fires, to the rhythm of four drums that were played with impressive precision and consistency. However, the dances were more about provocative gestures than physical strength or graceful movements. The women competed to show off the most seductive moves imaginable.
December 25.—About two o’clock in the morning a number of horsemen came into the town, and, having awakened my landlord, talked to him for some time in the Serawoolli tongue; after which they dismounted and came to the bentang, on which I had made my bed. One of them, thinking that I was asleep, attempted to steal the musket that lay by me on the mat, but finding that he could not effect his purpose undiscovered, he desisted, and the strangers sat down by me till daylight.
December 25.—Around two o’clock in the morning, several horsemen arrived in the town and, after waking up my landlord, talked to him for a while in the Serawoolli language. They then got off their horses and approached the bentang where I had made my bed. One of them, thinking I was asleep, tried to steal the musket that was lying next to me on the mat, but realizing he couldn't do it without being noticed, he gave up. The strangers then sat down next to me until dawn.
I could now easily perceive, by the countenance of my interpreter, Johnson, that something very unpleasant was in agitation. I was likewise surprised to see Madiboo and the blacksmith so soon returned. On inquiring the reason, Madiboo informed me that, as they were dancing at Dramanet, ten horsemen belonging to Batcheri, king of the country, with his second son at their head, had arrived there, inquiring if the white man had passed, and, on being told that I was at Joag, they rode off without stopping. Madiboo added that on hearing this he and the blacksmith hastened back to give me notice of their coming. Whilst I was listening to this narrative the ten horsemen mentioned by Madiboo arrived, and coming to the bentang, dismounted and seated themselves with those who had come before—the whole being about twenty in number—forming a circle round me, and each man holding his musket in his hand. I took this opportunity to observe to my landlord that, as I did not understand the Serawoolli tongue, I hoped whatever the men had to say they would speak in Mandingo. To this they agreed; and a short man, loaded with a remarkable number of saphies, opened the business in a very long harangue, informing me that I had entered the king’s town without having first paid the duties, or giving any present to the king; and that, according to the laws of the country, my people, cattle, and baggage were forfeited. He added that they had received orders from the king to conduct me to Maana, [70] the place of his residence, and if I refused to come with them their orders were to bring me by force; upon his saying which all of them rose up and asked me if I was ready. It would have been equally vain and imprudent in me to have resisted or irritated such a body of men; I therefore affected to comply with their commands, and begged them only to stop a little until I had given my horse a feed of corn, and settled matters with my landlord. The poor blacksmith, who was a native of Kasson, mistook this feigned compliance for a real intention, and taking me away from the company, told me that he had always behaved towards me as if I had been his father and master, and he hoped I would not entirely ruin him by going to Maana, adding that as there was every reason to believe a war would soon take place between Kasson and Kajaaga, he should not only lose his little property, the savings of four years’ industry, but should certainly be detained and sold as a slave, unless his friends had an opportunity of paying two slaves for his redemption. I saw this reasoning in its full force, and determined to do my utmost to preserve the blacksmith from so dreadful a fate. I therefore told the king’s son that I was ready to go with him, upon condition that, the blacksmith, who was an inhabitant of a distant kingdom, and entirely unconnected with me, should be allowed to stay at Joag till my return. To this they all objected, and insisted that, as we had all acted contrary to the laws, we were all equally answerable for our conduct.
I could easily tell from my interpreter Johnson's expression that something unpleasant was happening. I was also surprised to see Madiboo and the blacksmith return so quickly. When I asked why, Madiboo explained that while they were dancing at Dramanet, ten horsemen from Batcheri, the king of the region, led by his second son, arrived, asking if the white man had passed by. When they learned I was at Joag, they left without stopping. Madiboo added that he and the blacksmith hurried back to warn me of their arrival. While I was listening to this, the ten horsemen mentioned by Madiboo arrived, dismounted, and joined the others who had come earlier, totaling about twenty men, forming a circle around me, each holding a musket. I took this chance to tell my landlord that since I didn't understand the Serawoolli language, I hoped whatever the men had to say would be in Mandingo. They agreed, and a short man carrying a surprising number of saphies began with a long speech, telling me that I had entered the king's town without paying duties or giving any gifts to the king; according to the country's laws, my people, cattle, and belongings were forfeit. He added that they had orders from the king to take me to Maana, the place of his residence, and if I refused to go with them, they were instructed to use force. Upon hearing this, they all stood up and asked if I was ready. It would have been pointless and foolish for me to resist or provoke such a group, so I pretended to agree with their demands and asked them to wait a moment while I fed my horse and settled things with my landlord. The poor blacksmith, who was from Kasson, misunderstood my feigned compliance for genuine intention and pulled me aside, saying that he had always treated me like a father and master, hoping I wouldn't completely ruin him by going to Maana. He added that with the likelihood of war between Kasson and Kajaaga, he might lose all his savings from four years of hard work and could be captured and sold as a slave unless his friends could pay two slaves for his release. I understood his concerns and decided to do my best to protect the blacksmith from such a terrible fate. So, I told the king's son that I was ready to go with him on the condition that the blacksmith, who belonged to a distant kingdom and had no connection to me, could stay at Joag until I returned. They all disagreed and insisted that since we had all acted against the laws, we were all equally responsible for our actions.
I now took my landlord aside, and giving him a small present of gunpowder, asked his advice in such critical a situation. He was decidedly of opinion that I ought not to go to the king: he was fully convinced, he said, that if the king should discover anything valuable in my possession, he would not be over scrupulous about the means of obtaining it.
I pulled my landlord aside and gave him a small gift of gunpowder, asking for his advice in this tricky situation. He strongly believed that I shouldn't go to the king; he was completely convinced that if the king found out I had something valuable, he wouldn't hesitate to take it by any means necessary.
Towards the evening, as I was sitting upon the bentang chewing straws, an old female slave, passing by with a basket upon her head, asked me if had got my dinner. As I thought she only laughed at me, I gave her no answer; but my boy, who was sitting close by, answered for me, and told her that the king’s people had robbed me of all my money. On hearing this, the good old woman, with a look of unaffected benevolence, immediately took the basket from her head, and showing me that it contained ground nuts, asked me if I could eat them. Being answered in the affirmative, she presented me with a few handfuls, and walked away before I had time to thank her for this seasonable supply.
Towards the evening, while I was sitting on the bentang chewing straws, an older woman passing by with a basket on her head asked me if I had gotten my dinner. Since I thought she was just laughing at me, I didn’t respond; but my boy, who was sitting nearby, spoke up for me and told her that the king’s people had taken all my money. Hearing this, the kind old woman, with a genuine look of kindness, quickly took the basket off her head and, showing me that it was filled with ground nuts, asked if I could eat them. When I said yes, she gave me a few handfuls and walked away before I had a chance to thank her for this timely gift.
The old woman had scarcely left me when I received information that a nephew of Demba Sego Jalla, the Mandingo king of Kasson, was coming to pay me a visit. He had been sent on an embassy to Batcheri, King of Kajaaga, to endeavour to settle the disputes which had arisen between his uncle and the latter; but after debating the matter four days without success, he was now on his return, and hearing that a white man was at Joag, on his way to Kasson, curiosity brought him to see me. I represented to him my situation and distresses, when he frankly offered me his protection, and said he would be my guide to Kasson (provided I would set out the next morning), and be answerable for my safety. I readily and gratefully accepted his offer, and was ready with my attendants by daylight on the morning of the 27th of December.
The old woman had barely left when I got word that a nephew of Demba Sego Jalla, the Mandingo king of Kasson, was coming to visit me. He had been sent on a mission to Batcheri, King of Kajaaga, to try to resolve the disputes that had come up between his uncle and the king. After four days of unsuccessful discussions, he was now on his way back and, hearing that a white man was at Joag on his way to Kasson, he came out of curiosity to see me. I explained my situation and struggles to him, and he generously offered me his protection, saying he would guide me to Kasson (as long as I set out the next morning) and would ensure my safety. I happily and gratefully accepted his offer and was ready with my attendants by daylight on the morning of December 27th.
My protector, whose name was Demba Sego, probably after his uncle, had a numerous retinue. Our company, at leaving Joag, consisted of thirty persons and six loaded asses; and we rode on cheerfully enough for some hours, without any remarkable occurrence until we came to a species of tree for which my interpreter Johnson had made frequent inquiry. On finding it, he desired us to stop, and producing a white chicken, which he had purchased at Joag for the purpose, he tied it by the leg to one of the branches, and then told us we might now safely proceed, for that our journey would be prosperous.
My protector, named Demba Sego—probably after his uncle—had a large group with him. When we left Joag, our group consisted of thirty people and six loaded donkeys. We rode along happily for several hours without anything noteworthy happening until we reached a type of tree that my interpreter, Johnson, had been asking about. When we found it, he asked us to stop. He took out a white chicken that he had bought in Joag for this purpose, tied its leg to one of the branches, and then told us we could continue safely, as our journey would be successful.
At noon we had reached Gungadi, a large town where we stopped about an hour, until some of the asses that had fallen behind came up. Here I observed a number of date-trees, and a mosque built of clay, with six turrets, on the pinnacles of which were placed six ostrich eggs. A little before sunset we arrived at the town of Samee, on the banks of the Senegal, which is here a beautiful but shallow river, moving slowly over a bed of sand and gravel. The banks are high, and covered with verdure—the country is open and cultivated—and the rocky hills of Fellow and Bambouk add much to the beauty of the landscape.
At noon, we reached Gungadi, a large town where we stopped for about an hour until some of the donkeys that had fallen behind caught up. Here, I noticed several date trees and a clay mosque with six towers, each topped with an ostrich egg. A little before sunset, we arrived at the town of Samee, located along the Senegal River, which, at this point, is a beautiful but shallow river slowly flowing over a bed of sand and gravel. The banks are steep and lush with greenery—the area is open and farmed—and the rocky hills of Fellow and Bambouk greatly enhance the beauty of the landscape.
December 28.—We departed from Samee, and arrived in the afternoon at Kayee, a large village, part of which is situated on the north and part on the south side of the river.
December 28.—We left Samee and reached Kayee in the afternoon, a large village that spreads across both the north and south sides of the river.
The ferryman then taking hold of the most steady of the horses by a rope, led him into the water, and paddled the canoe a little from the brink; upon which a general attack commenced upon the other horses, who, finding themselves pelted and kicked on all sides, unanimously plunged into the river, and followed their companion. A few boys swam in after them; and, by laving water upon them when they attempted to return, urged them onwards; and we had the satisfaction in about fifteen minutes to see them all safe on the other side. It was a matter of greater difficulty to manage the asses; their natural stubbornness of disposition made them endure a great deal of pelting and shoving before they would venture into the water; and when they had reached the middle of the stream, four of them turned back, in spite of every exertion to get them forwards. Two hours were spent in getting the whole of them over; an hour more was employed in transporting the baggage; and it was near sunset before the canoe returned, when Demba Sego and myself embarked in this dangerous passage-boat, which the least motion was like to overset. The king’s nephew thought this a proper time to have a peep into a tin box of mine that stood in the fore part of the canoe; and in stretching out his hand for it, he unfortunately destroyed the equilibrium, and overset the canoe. Luckily we were not far advanced, and got back to the shore without much difficulty; from whence, after wringing the water from our clothes, we took a fresh departure, and were soon afterwards safely landed in Kasson.
The ferryman grabbed the most steady horse by a rope, led him into the water, and paddled the canoe a bit away from the bank. This is when a general attack started on the other horses, who, feeling pelted and kicked from all sides, jumped into the river, following their companion. A few boys swam in after them, splashing water on them when they tried to return, encouraging them to keep moving. We felt relieved to see them all safely on the other side in about fifteen minutes. Getting the donkeys across was much trickier. Their natural stubbornness made them tolerate a lot of pelting and shoving before they would even think about entering the water. Even when they reached the middle of the stream, four of them turned back, despite all efforts to push them forward. It took two hours to get all of them across, and an additional hour to move the luggage. It was nearly sunset by the time the canoe returned, and Demba Sego and I climbed into this risky boat, which could tip over with the slightest movement. The king’s nephew thought it was a good time to sneak a look at a tin box of mine in the front of the canoe, and when he reached for it, he accidentally tipped the canoe over. Fortunately, we weren’t far along and made it back to the shore without much trouble. After wringing out our clothes, we set off again and soon landed safely in Kasson.
CHAPTER VI.
Tiggitty Sego's chatter.
We no sooner found ourselves safe in Kasson than Demba Sego told me that we were now in his uncle’s dominions, and he hoped I would consider, being now out of danger, the obligation I owed to him, and make him a suitable return for the trouble he had taken on my account by a handsome present. This, as he knew how much had been pilfered from me at Joag, was rather an unexpected proposition, and I began to fear that I had not much improved my condition by crossing the water; but as it would have been folly to complain I made no observation upon his conduct, and gave him seven bars of amber and some tobacco, with which he seemed to be content.
We had barely settled in Kasson when Demba Sego told me we were now in his uncle’s territory. He hoped that since we were out of danger, I would consider the obligation I owed him and reward him with a nice gift for the trouble he took on my behalf. Given how much had been stolen from me at Joag, this was an unexpected request, and I started to worry that crossing the water hadn’t improved my situation at all. However, it would have been foolish to complain, so I didn’t comment on his behavior and gave him seven bars of amber and some tobacco, which seemed to satisfy him.
After a long day’s journey, in the course of which I observed a number of large loose nodules of white granite, we arrived at Teesee on the evening of December 29th, and were accommodated in Demba Sego’s hut. The next morning he introduced me to his father, Tiggity Sego, brother to the king of Kasson, chief of Teesee. The old man viewed me with great earnestness, having never, he said, beheld but one white man before, whom by his description I immediately knew to be Major Houghton.
After a long journey, during which I saw several large loose chunks of white granite, we reached Teesee on the evening of December 29th and stayed in Demba Sego’s hut. The next morning, he introduced me to his father, Tiggity Sego, who is the brother of the king of Kasson and the chief of Teesee. The old man looked at me with great seriousness, saying he had only seen one white man before, whom I recognized by his description to be Major Houghton.
In the afternoon one of his slaves eloped; and a general alarm being given, every person that had a horse rode into the woods, in the hopes of apprehending him, and Demba Sego begged the use of my horse for the same purpose. I readily consented; and in about an hour they all returned with the slave, who was severely flogged, and afterwards put in irons. On the day following (December 31st) Demba Sego was ordered to go with twenty horsemen to a town in Gedumah, to adjust some dispute with the Moors, a party of whom were supposed to have stolen three horses from Teesee. Demba begged a second time the use of my horse, adding that the sight of my bridle and saddle would give him consequence among the Moors. This request also I readily granted, and he promised to return at the end of three days. During his absence I amused myself with walking about the town, and conversing with the natives, who attended me everywhere with great kindness and curiosity, and supplied me with milk, eggs, and what other provisions I wanted, on very easy terms.
In the afternoon, one of his slaves escaped, and a general alarm was raised. Everyone who had a horse rode into the woods hoping to catch him, and Demba Sego asked to use my horse for the same reason. I agreed without hesitation; about an hour later, they all returned with the slave, who was harshly punished and then put in chains. The next day (December 31st), Demba Sego was ordered to go with twenty horsemen to a town in Gedumah to settle a dispute with the Moors, who were believed to have stolen three horses from Teesee. Demba asked again to use my horse, explaining that having my bridle and saddle would make him more respected among the Moors. I easily agreed to this request as well, and he promised to come back in three days. While he was away, I kept myself busy exploring the town and chatting with the locals, who treated me with kindness and curiosity. They provided me with milk, eggs, and other supplies I needed at very reasonable prices.
Teesee is a large unwalled town, having no security against the attack of an enemy except a sort of citadel in which Tiggity and his family constantly reside. This town, according to the report of the natives, was formerly inhabited only by a few Foulah shepherds, who lived in considerable affluence by means of the excellent meadows in the neighbourhood, in which they reared great herds of cattle. But their prosperity attracting the envy of some Mandingoes, the latter drove out the shepherds, and took possession of their lands.
Teesee is a large, unprotected town, with no defense against an enemy except for a sort of citadel where Tiggity and his family always live. According to the locals, this town was once home to a small number of Foulah shepherds, who lived quite well thanks to the excellent meadows nearby, where they raised large herds of cattle. However, their success drew the envy of some Mandingoes, who expelled the shepherds and took over their land.
The present inhabitants, though they possess both cattle and corn in abundance, are not over nice in articles of diet; rats, moles, squirrels, snakes, locusts, are eaten without scruple by the highest and lowest. My people were one evening invited to a feast given by some of the townsmen, where, after making a hearty meal of what they thought fish and kouskous, one of them found a piece of hard skin in the dish, and brought it along with him to show me what sort of fish they had been eating. On examining the skin I found they had been feasting on a large snake. Another custom still more extraordinary is that no woman is allowed to eat an egg. This prohibition, whether arising from ancient superstition or from the craftiness of some old bushreen who loved eggs himself, is rigidly adhered to, and nothing will more affront a woman of Teesee than to offer her an egg. The custom is the more singular, as the men eat eggs without scruple in the presence of their wives, and I never observed the same prohibition in any other of the Mandingo countries.
The current residents, while they have plenty of cattle and corn, aren't too picky about what they eat; rats, moles, squirrels, snakes, and locusts are consumed freely by everyone, rich or poor. One evening, my friends were invited to a feast by some locals, where they enjoyed what they thought was fish and couscous. Afterwards, one of them found a piece of tough skin in the dish and brought it to me to see what kind of fish they had eaten. Upon inspecting the skin, I discovered they had been feasting on a large snake. Another even stranger custom is that no woman is allowed to eat an egg. Whether this ban comes from ancient superstition or some old trickster who just liked eggs himself, it is strictly followed, and nothing would offend a woman from Teesee more than being offered an egg. This custom is particularly odd, as the men eat eggs without hesitation in front of their wives, and I haven't seen the same rule in any other Mandingo countries.
The third day after his son’s departure, Tiggity Sego held a palaver on a very extraordinary occasion, which I attended; and the debates on both sides of the question displayed much ingenuity. The case was this:—A young man, a kafir of considerable affluence, who had recently married a young and handsome wife, applied to a very devout bushreen, or Mussulman priest, of his acquaintance, to procure him saphies for his protection during the approaching war. The bushreen complied with the request; and in order, as he pretended, to render the saphies more efficacious, enjoined the young man to avoid any nuptial intercourse with his bride for the space of six weeks. Severe as the injunction was, the kafir strictly obeyed; and, without telling his wife the real cause, absented himself from her company. In the meantime, it began to be whispered at Teesee that the bushreen, who always performed his evening devotions at the door of the kafir’s hut, was more intimate with the young wife than he ought to be. At first the good husband was unwilling to suspect the honour of his sanctified friend, and one whole month elapsed before any jealousy rose in his mind, but hearing the charge repeated, he at last interrogated his wife on the subject, who frankly confessed that the bushreen had seduced her. Hereupon the kafir put her into confinement, and called a palaver upon the bushreen’s conduct. The fact was clearly proved against him; and he was sentenced to be sold into slavery, or to find two slaves for his redemption, according to the pleasure of the complainant. The injured husband, however, was unwilling to proceed against his friend to such extremity, and desired rather to have him publicly flogged before Tiggity Sego’s gate. This was agreed to, and the sentence was immediately executed. The culprit was tied by the hands to a strong stake; and a long black rod being brought forth, the executioner, after flourishing it round his head for some time, applied it with such force and dexterity to the bushreen’s back as to make him roar until the woods resounded with his screams. The surrounding multitude, by their hooting and laughing, manifested how much they enjoyed the punishment of this old gallant; and it is worthy of remark that the number of stripes was precisely the same as are enjoined by the Mosaic law, forty, save one.
The third day after his son's departure, Tiggity Sego held a meeting for a very unusual reason, which I attended; and the discussions from both sides of the argument were quite clever. The situation was this: A young man, a wealthy kafir, who had recently married a beautiful wife, asked a very devout bushreen, or Muslim priest, he knew to get him protective charms for the upcoming war. The bushreen agreed to help; and to supposedly make the charms work better, he told the young man to avoid any sexual relations with his bride for six weeks. Although this demand was tough, the kafir complied and stayed away from his wife without revealing the real reason. In the meantime, rumors started floating around in Teesee that the bushreen, who regularly performed his evening prayers at the kafir’s hut, was getting too close to the young wife. At first, the good husband didn’t want to doubt the integrity of his holy friend, and a whole month went by before any jealousy stirred in his mind. But after hearing the accusation again, he finally questioned his wife, who honestly admitted that the bushreen had seduced her. Furious, the kafir confined her and called a meeting to discuss the bushreen’s actions. The evidence against him was clear; he was sentenced to either be sold into slavery or to find two slaves for his redemption, based on what the complainant wanted. However, the hurt husband didn’t want to go to such extremes against his friend and instead preferred to have him publicly whipped in front of Tiggity Sego’s gate. This was agreed to, and the punishment was carried out immediately. The culprit was tied by his hands to a strong post; and a long black rod was brought forth. The executioner, after swirling it around his head for a moment, struck the bushreen’s back with such force and skill that it made him scream until the woods echoed with his cries. The crowd around them, by their jeering and laughing, showed how much they relished the punishment of this old charmer; it’s worth noting that the number of lashes was exactly the same as prescribed by Mosaic law, forty, save one.
As there appeared great probability that Teesee, from its being a frontier town, would be much exposed during the war to the predatory incursions of the Moors of Gedumah, Tiggity Sego had, before my arrival, sent round to the neighbouring villages to beg or to purchase as much provisions as would afford subsistence to the inhabitants for one whole year, independently of the crop on the ground, which the Moors might destroy. This project was well received by the country people, and they fixed a day on which to bring all the provisions they could spare to Teesee; and as my horse was not yet returned, I went, in the afternoon of January 4th, 1796, to meet the escort with the provisions.
As it seemed quite likely that Teesee, being a border town, would be heavily threatened during the war by the raiding Moors of Gedumah, Tiggity Sego had, prior to my arrival, reached out to the nearby villages to ask for or buy as much food as possible to support the residents for an entire year, apart from the crops in the ground that the Moors might ruin. This plan was well received by the locals, and they set a date to bring all the supplies they could spare to Teesee. Since my horse had not returned yet, I went in the afternoon of January 4th, 1796, to meet the escort with the provisions.
It was composed of about 400 men, marching in good order, with corn and ground nuts in large calabashes upon their heads. They were preceded by a strong guard of bowmen, and followed by eight musicians or singing men. As soon as they approached the town the latter began a song, every verse of which was answered by the company, and succeeded by a few strokes on the large drums. In this manner they proceeded, amidst the acclamations of the populace, till they reached the house of Tiggity Sego, where the loads were deposited; and in the evening they all assembled under the bentang tree, and spent the night in dancing and merriment.
It was made up of about 400 men, marching in good order, with corn and groundnuts in large calabashes on their heads. They were led by a strong group of bowmen, and followed by eight musicians or singers. As soon as they got close to the town, the singers started a song, and the group responded with each verse, followed by a few beats on the large drums. They moved this way, amid cheers from the crowd, until they reached Tiggity Sego's house, where they unloaded. In the evening, they all gathered under the bentang tree and spent the night dancing and having fun.
On the 5th of January an embassy of ten people belonging to Almami Abdulkader, king of Foota-Torra, a country to the west of Bondou, arrived at Teesee; and desiring Tiggity to call an assembly of the inhabitants, announced publicly their king’s determination to this effect:—‘That unless all the people of Kasson would embrace the Mohammedan religion, and evince their conversion by saying eleven public prayers, he, the king of Foota-Torra, could not possibly stand neuter in the present contest, but would certainly join his arms to those of Kajaaga.’ A message of this nature from so powerful a prince could not fail to create great alarm; and the inhabitants of Teesee, after a long consultation, agreed to conform to his good pleasure, humiliating as it was to them. Accordingly, one and all publicly offered up eleven prayers, which were considered a sufficient testimony of their having renounced paganism, and embraced the doctrines of the prophet.
On January 5th, a delegation of ten people from Almami Abdulkader, the king of Foota-Torra, a country west of Bondou, arrived at Teesee. They asked Tiggity to gather the local residents and publicly announced their king’s demand: that unless everyone in Kasson accepted the Muslim faith and demonstrated their conversion by reciting eleven public prayers, the king of Foota-Torra could not remain neutral in the current conflict and would definitely align with Kajaaga. A message like this from such a powerful leader caused significant concern, and after lengthy discussions, the people of Teesee agreed to comply with his wishes, even though it was humiliating for them. Therefore, they all publicly recited eleven prayers, which were deemed an adequate proof of their renunciation of paganism and acceptance of the prophet's teachings.
It was the 8th of January before Demba Sego returned with my horse; and being quite wearied out with the delay, I went immediately to inform his father that I should set out for Kooniakary early the next day. The old man made many frivolous objections, and at length gave me to understand that I must not think of departing without first paying him the same duties he was entitled to receive from all travellers; besides which he expected, he said, some acknowledgment for his kindness towards me. Accordingly, on the morning of the 9th, my friend Demba, with a number of people, came to me, and said that they were sent by Tiggity Sego for my present, and wished to see what goods I had appropriated for that purpose. I knew that resistance was hopeless, and complaint unavailing: and being in some measure prepared by the intimation I had received the night before, I quietly offered him seven bars of amber and five of tobacco. After surveying these articles for some time very coolly, Demba laid them down, and told me that this was not a present for a man of Tiggity Sego’s consequence, who had it in his power to take whatever he pleased from me. He added, that if I did not consent to make him a larger offering he would carry all my baggage to his father, and let him choose for himself. I had no time for reply, for Demba and his attendants immediately began to open my bundles, and spread the different articles upon the floor, where they underwent a more strict examination than they had done at Joag. Everything that pleased them they took without scruple: and amongst other things, Demba seized the tin box that had so much attracted his attention in crossing the river. Upon collecting the scattered remains of my little fortune after these people had left me, I found that, as at Joag I had been plundered of half, so here, without even the shadow of accusation, I was deprived of half the remainder. The blacksmith himself, though a native of Kasson, had also been compelled to open his bundles, and take an oath that the different articles they contained were his own exclusive property. There was, however, no remedy, and having been under some obligation to Demba Sego for his attention towards me in the journey from Joag, I did not reproach him for his rapacity, but determined to quit Teesee, at all events, the next morning. In the meanwhile, in order to raise the drooping spirits of my attendants, I purchased a fat sheep, and had it dressed for our dinner.
It was January 8th when Demba Sego finally returned with my horse, and feeling really frustrated by the wait, I went straight to his father to let him know I’d be leaving for Kooniakary early the next day. The old man had a lot of silly objections, and eventually made it clear that I couldn’t leave without first paying him the fees he was owed from all travelers; he also mentioned he expected some kind of thank-you for his kindness towards me. So, on the morning of the 9th, my friend Demba and several people came to see me, saying they were sent by Tiggity Sego for my gift and wanted to check out what items I had set aside for that purpose. I realized resisting was futile and complaining wouldn’t help, so being somewhat prepared by the hint I received the night before, I calmly offered him seven bars of amber and five of tobacco. After looking at these items for a while in a relaxed manner, Demba put them down and told me this wasn’t a suitable gift for someone as important as Tiggity Sego, who could take whatever he wanted from me. He added that if I didn’t agree to give him a better offering, he would take all my bags to his father and let him select what he wanted. I had no time to respond because Demba and his crew quickly started opening my bundles and spreading the various items on the floor, examining them much more closely than they had at Joag. They took anything they liked without hesitation, and among other things, Demba grabbed the tin box that had caught his eye while crossing the river. After they left, I gathered the scattered remains of my belongings, realizing that just like at Joag where I lost half my things, here I was deprived of half of what was left without any justification. The blacksmith, who was also from Kasson, had to open his bundles as well and swear that the items inside were solely his. There was no way to remedy the situation, and since I felt some obligation to Demba Sego for his help during my journey from Joag, I didn’t blame him for being greedy, but I decided I would leave Teesee the next morning, no matter what. In the meantime, to lift the spirits of my attendants, I bought a fat sheep and had it prepared for our dinner.
Early in the morning of January 10th, therefore, I left Teesee, and about mid-day ascended a ridge, from whence we had a distant view of the hills round Kooniakary. In the evening we reached a small village, where we slept, and, departing from thence the next morning, crossed in a few hours a narrow but deep stream called Krieko, a branch of the Senegal. About two miles farther to the eastward we passed a large town called Madina, and at two o’clock came in sight of Jumbo, the blacksmith’s native town, from whence he had been absent more than four years. Soon after this, his brother, who had by some means been apprised of his coming, came out to meet him, accompanied by a singing man. He brought a horse for the blacksmith, that he might enter his native town in a dignified manner; and he desired each of us to put a good charge of powder into our guns. The singing man now led the way, followed by the two brothers, and we were presently joined by a number of people from the town, all of whom demonstrated great joy at seeing their old acquaintance the blacksmith by the most extravagant jumping and singing. On entering the town the singing man began an extempore song in praise of the blacksmith, extolling his courage in having overcome so many difficulties, and concluding with a strict injunction to his friends to dress him plenty of victuals.
Early in the morning on January 10th, I left Teesee and around midday climbed a ridge, from where we had a distant view of the hills surrounding Kooniakary. In the evening, we reached a small village where we slept, and after leaving there the next morning, we crossed a narrow but deep stream called Krieko, a branch of the Senegal, in just a few hours. About two miles farther east, we passed a large town called Madina, and at two o’clock, we caught sight of Jumbo, the blacksmith’s hometown, from which he had been away for more than four years. Shortly after that, his brother, who had somehow found out about his return, came out to greet him, accompanied by a singer. He brought a horse for the blacksmith so he could enter his hometown with dignity, and he asked each of us to load our guns with a good amount of powder. The singer then led the way, followed by the two brothers, and we were soon joined by a crowd of people from the town, all of whom showed great excitement at seeing their old friend, the blacksmith, through enthusiastic jumping and singing. Upon entering the town, the singer started an impromptu song in praise of the blacksmith, highlighting his bravery in overcoming many challenges, and ending with a strong request for his friends to prepare him a lot of food.
When we arrived at the blacksmith’s place of residence we dismounted, and fired our muskets. The meeting between him and his relations was very tender; for these rude children of nature, free from restraint, display their emotions in the strongest and most expressive manner. Amidst these transports the blacksmith’s aged mother was led forth, leaning upon a staff. Every one made way for her, and she stretched out her hand to bid her son welcome. Being totally blind, she stroked his hands, arms, and face with great care, and seemed highly delighted that her latter days were blessed by his return, and that her ears once more heard the music of his voice.
When we arrived at the blacksmith’s home, we got off our horses and fired our muskets. The reunion between him and his family was very emotional, as these simple people, free from societal constraints, show their feelings in the strongest and most expressive way. In the midst of this excitement, the blacksmith’s elderly mother was brought out, leaning on a cane. Everyone made space for her, and she reached out her hand to welcome her son. Since she was completely blind, she carefully touched his hands, arms, and face, and seemed truly happy that her later years were brightened by his return, and that she could once again hear the sound of his voice.
During the tumult of these congratulations I had seated myself apart by the side of one of the huts, being unwilling to interrupt the flow of filial and parental tenderness; and the attention of the company was so entirely taken up with the blacksmith that I believe none of his friends had observed me. When all the people present had seated themselves the blacksmith was desired by his father to give them some account of his adventures; and silence being commanded, he began, and after repeatedly thanking God for the success that had attended him, related every material occurrence that had happened to him from his leaving Kasson to his arrival at the Gambia, his employment and success in those parts, and the dangers he had escaped in returning to his native country. In the latter part of his narration he had frequently occasion to mention me; and after many strong expressions concerning my kindness to him he pointed to the place where I sat, and exclaimed, “Affille ibi siring!”—(“See him sitting there!”) In a moment all eyes were turned upon me; I appeared like a being dropped from the clouds; every one was surprised that they had not observed me before; and a few women and children expressed great uneasiness at being so near a man of such an uncommon appearance.
During the excitement of all the congratulations, I had sat apart beside one of the huts, not wanting to interrupt the flow of family love and affection; and the group's attention was so focused on the blacksmith that I think none of his friends had noticed me. Once everyone had taken a seat, the blacksmith’s father asked him to share some stories about his adventures; and when silence fell, he began. After repeatedly thanking God for his successful journey, he recounted every important event that had happened to him from the moment he left Kasson to his arrival in the Gambia, detailing his work and achievements in those areas, as well as the dangers he faced while returning to his homeland. In the later part of his story, he often had to mention me; and after expressing his gratitude towards my kindness, he pointed to where I sat and exclaimed, “Affille ibi siring!”—(“See him sitting there!”) In an instant, all eyes turned to me; I felt like I had just dropped from the sky; everyone was surprised they hadn’t noticed me before, and a few women and children seemed quite uneasy being so close to someone who looked so unusual.
By degrees, however, their apprehensions subsided, and when the blacksmith assured them that I was perfectly inoffensive, and would hurt nobody, some of them ventured so far as to examine the texture of my clothes; but many of them were still very suspicious; and when by accident I happened to move myself, or look at the young children, their mothers would scamper off with them with the greatest precipitations. In a few hours, however, they all became reconciled to me.
Gradually, their fears calmed down, and when the blacksmith confirmed that I was completely harmless and wouldn’t hurt anyone, some of them even dared to check out the fabric of my clothes. But a lot of them still remained quite wary; whenever I happened to move or glance at the little kids, their mothers would quickly run away with them in a panic. However, within a few hours, they all warmed up to me.
With these worthy people I spent the remainder of that and the whole of the ensuing day, in feasting and merriment; and the blacksmith declared he would not quit me during my stay at Kooniakary—for which place we set out early on the morning of the 14th of January, and arrived about the middle of the day at Soolo, a small village three miles to the south of it.
With these wonderful people, I spent the rest of that day and all of the next in celebration and fun; the blacksmith insisted he wouldn't leave me during my time at Kooniakary—for which we left early on the morning of January 14th, and arrived around midday at Soolo, a small village three miles south of it.
As this place was somewhat out of the direct road, it is necessary to observe that I went thither to visit a slatee or Gambia trader, of great note and reputation, named Salim Daucari. He was well known to Dr. Laidley, who had trusted him with effects to the value of five slaves, and had given me an order for the whole of the debt. We luckily found him at home, and he received me with great kindness and attention.
As this place was a bit off the main road, I should mention that I went there to visit a well-known Gambia trader named Salim Daucari. He was respected and had a good reputation. Dr. Laidley knew him well and had trusted him with goods worth the equivalent of five slaves, giving me an order to collect the full amount. Fortunately, we found him at home, and he welcomed me warmly and attentively.
It is remarkable, however, that the king of Kasson was by some means immediately apprised of my motions; for I had been at Soolo but a few hours before Sambo Sego, his second son, came thither with a party of horse, to inquire what had prevented me from proceeding to Kooniakary, and waiting immediately upon the king, who, he said, was impatient to see me. Salim Daucari made my apology, and promised to accompany me to Kooniakary the same evening. We accordingly departed from Soolo at sunset, and in about an hour entered Kooniakary. But as the king had gone to sleep we deferred the interview till next morning, and slept at the hut of Sambo Sego.
It’s impressive that the king of Kasson somehow found out about my movements so quickly; I had only been at Soolo for a few hours when Sambo Sego, his second son, arrived there with a group of horsemen to ask why I hadn't gone to Kooniakary right away to meet the king, who, he mentioned, was eager to see me. Salim Daucari explained my situation and assured that he would go with me to Kooniakary that same evening. So, we left Soolo at sunset and after about an hour we arrived in Kooniakary. However, since the king had gone to sleep, we decided to postpone our meeting until the next morning and stayed overnight at Sambo Sego's hut.
CHAPTER VII.
INTERVIEW WITH KING DEMBA SEGO
JALLA.
About eight o’clock in the morning of January 15th, 1796, we went to an audience of the king (Demba Sego Jalla), but the crowd of people to see me was so great that I could scarcely get admittance. A passage being at length obtained, I made my bow to the monarch, whom we found sitting upon a mat, in a large hut. He appeared to be a man of about sixty years of age. His success in war, and the mildness of his behaviour in time of peace, had much endeared him to all his subjects. He surveyed me with great attention; and when Salim Daucari explained to him the object of my journey, and my reasons for passing through his country, the good old king appeared not only perfectly satisfied, but promised me every assistance in his power. He informed me that he had seen Major Houghton, and presented him with a white horse; but that, after crossing the kingdom of Kaarta, he had lost his life among the Moors, in what manner he could not inform me. When this audience was ended we returned to our lodging, and I made up a small present for the king out of the few effects that were left me; for I had not yet received anything from Salim Daucari. This present, though inconsiderable in itself, was well received by the king, who sent me in return a large white bullock. The sight of this animal quite delighted my attendants; not so much on account of its bulk, as from its being of a white colour, which is considered as a particular mark of favour. But although the king himself was well disposed towards me, and readily granted me permission to pass through his territories, I soon discovered that very great and unexpected obstacles were likely to impede my progress. Besides the war which was on the point of breaking out between Kasson and Kajaaga, I was told that the next kingdom of Kaarta, through which my route lay, was involved in the issue, and was furthermore threatened with hostilities on the part of Bambarra. The king himself informed me of these circumstances, and advised me to stay in the neighbourhood of Kooniakary till such time as he could procure proper information respecting Bambarra, which he expected to do in the course of four or five days, as he had already, he said, sent four messengers into Kaarta for that purpose. I readily submitted to this proposal, and went to Soolo, to stay there till the return of one of those messengers. This afforded me a favourable opportunity of receiving what money Salim Daucari could spare me on Dr. Laidley’s account. I succeeded in receiving the value of three slaves, chiefly in gold dust; and being anxious to proceed as quickly as possible, I begged Daucari to use his interest with the king to allow me a guide by the way of Fooladoo, as I was informed that the war had already commenced between the kings of Bambarra and Kaarta. Daucari accordingly set out for Kooniakary on the morning of the 20th, and the same evening returned with the king’s answer, which was to this purpose—that the king had, many years ago, made an agreement with Daisy, king of Kaarta, to send all merchants and travellers through his dominions; but that if I wished to take the route through Fooladoo I had his permission so to do; though he could not, consistently with his agreement, lend me a guide. Having felt the want of regal protection in a former part of my journey, I was unwilling to hazard a repetition of the hardships I had then experienced, especially as the money I had received was probably the last supply that I should obtain. I therefore determined to wait for the return of the messengers from Kaarta.
About eight o’clock in the morning on January 15th, 1796, we went to meet the king (Demba Sego Jalla), but the crowd wanting to see me was so large that I could hardly get in. After some time, I managed to gain entry and bowed to the monarch, who was sitting on a mat in a large hut. He looked to be around sixty years old. His success in war and his gentle demeanor during peacetime had won him a lot of affection from his subjects. He observed me closely; when Salim Daucari explained the purpose of my journey and why I was passing through his land, the kind old king seemed completely satisfied and promised to help me in whatever way he could. He mentioned that he had met Major Houghton and had given him a white horse; however, after crossing the kingdom of Kaarta, Houghton lost his life among the Moors, but he didn’t know how. After our audience, we went back to our lodging, and I put together a small gift for the king from the few belongings I had left, as I hadn’t received anything from Salim Daucari yet. This gift, though small, was well received by the king, who sent me a large white bull in return. My attendants were thrilled to see the animal, not just because of its size but because its white color was seen as a special sign of favor. However, even though the king was friendly and gave me permission to travel through his territories, I soon found that there were significant and unexpected challenges ahead. Besides the war about to break out between Kasson and Kajaaga, I was told that the next kingdom, Kaarta, through which I needed to pass, was at stake and was also threatened by hostilities from Bambarra. The king himself informed me of these issues and suggested that I stay near Kooniakary until he could get more information about Bambarra, which he expected to do in four or five days as he had already sent four messengers to Kaarta for that purpose. I agreed to this plan and went to Soolo to wait for one of those messengers to return. This gave me a good chance to get the money Salim Daucari could spare for me on Dr. Laidley’s account. I managed to receive the equivalent of three slaves, mostly in gold dust. Eager to move forward quickly, I asked Daucari to speak with the king to let me have a guide through Fooladoo since I had learned that the war between the kings of Bambarra and Kaarta had already started. Daucari set off for Kooniakary on the morning of the 20th and returned in the evening with the king’s message, which stated that the king had made an agreement a long time ago with Daisy, the king of Kaarta, to send all merchants and travelers through his lands; however, if I wanted to take the route through Fooladoo, I had his permission to do so, though he couldn’t provide me with a guide due to his agreement. Having felt the lack of royal protection at an earlier point in my journey, I was hesitant to risk going through difficulties again, especially since the money I had just received might be my last supply. I decided to wait for the messengers to return from Kaarta.
In the interim it began to be whispered abroad that I had received plenty of gold from Salim Daucari, and, on the morning of the 23rd, Sambo Sego paid me a visit, with a party of horsemen. He insisted upon knowing the exact amount of the money I had obtained, declaring that whatever the sum was, one-half of it must go to the king; besides which he intimated that he expected a handsome present for himself, as being the king’s son, and for his attendants, as being the king’s relations. I prepared to submit; and if Salim Daucari had not interposed all my endeavours to mitigate this oppressive claim would have been of no avail. Salim at last prevailed upon Sambo to accept sixteen bars of European merchandise, and some powder and ball, as a complete payment of every demand that could be made upon me in the kingdom of Kasson.
In the meantime, it started to get around that I had received a lot of gold from Salim Daucari, and on the morning of the 23rd, Sambo Sego came to visit me with a group of horsemen. He insisted on knowing the exact amount of money I had gotten, claiming that no matter how much it was, half of it had to go to the king. He also hinted that he expected a nice gift for himself, as the king’s son, and for his attendants, as the king's relatives. I was ready to comply; and if Salim Daucari hadn't stepped in, my efforts to lessen this heavy demand would have been pointless. Finally, Salim managed to convince Sambo to accept sixteen bars of European goods, along with some gunpowder and ammunition, as full payment for everything that could be asked of me in the kingdom of Kasson.
January 26.—In the forenoon I went to the top of a high hill to the southward of Soolo, where I had a most enchanting prospect of the country. The number of towns and villages, and the extensive cultivation around them, surpassed everything I had yet seen in Africa. A gross calculation may be formed of the number of inhabitants in this delightful plain by considering that the king of Kasson can raise four thousand fighting men by the sound of his war-drum. In traversing the rocky eminences of this hill, which are almost destitute of vegetation, I observed a number of large holes in the crevasses and fissures of the rocks, where the wolves and hyænas take refuge during the day.
January 26.—In the morning, I climbed to the top of a high hill south of Soolo, where I had a breathtaking view of the countryside. The number of towns and villages, along with the vast farmland around them, exceeded everything I had encountered in Africa so far. A rough estimate of the population in this beautiful plain can be made by noting that the king of Kasson can muster four thousand fighters by the sound of his war drum. While crossing the rocky peaks of this hill, which are nearly bare of vegetation, I noticed several large holes in the cracks and crevices of the rocks where wolves and hyenas hide during the day.
February 1.—The messengers arrived from Kaarta, and brought intelligence that the war had not yet commenced between Bambarra and Kaarta, and that I might probably pass through Kaarta before the Bambarra army invaded that country.
February 1.—The messengers arrived from Kaarta and reported that the war hadn’t started yet between Bambarra and Kaarta, and that I could probably pass through Kaarta before the Bambarra army invaded that area.
February 3.—Early in the morning two guides on horseback came from Kooniakary to conduct me to the frontiers of Kaarta. I accordingly took leave of Salim Daucari, and parted for the last time from my fellow-traveller the blacksmith, whose kind solicitude for my welfare had been so conspicuous, and about ten o’clock departed from Soolo. We travelled this day through a rocky and hilly country, along the banks of the river Krieko, and at sunset came to the village of Soomo, where we slept.
February 3.—Early in the morning, two guides on horseback arrived from Kooniakary to take me to the borders of Kaarta. I said goodbye to Salim Daucari and parted for the last time from my fellow traveler, the blacksmith, whose caring concern for my well-being had been so evident. Around ten o’clock, I left Soolo. We traveled through a rocky and hilly area along the banks of the Krieko River, and at sunset, we reached the village of Soomo, where we spent the night.
February 4.—We departed from Soomo, and continued our route along the banks of the Krieko, which are everywhere well cultivated, and swarm with inhabitants. At this time they were increased by the number of people that had flown thither from Kaarta on account of the Bambarra war. In the afternoon we reached Kimo, a large village, the residence of Madi Konko, governor of the hilly country of Kasson, which is called Sorroma. From hence the guides appointed by the king of Kasson returned, to join in the expedition against Kajaaga; and I waited until the 6th before I could prevail on Madi Konko to appoint me a guide to Kaarta.
February 4.—We left Soomo and continued our journey along the banks of the Krieko, which are well-farmed and populated. At this time, there were even more people who had come from Kaarta due to the Bambarra war. In the afternoon, we arrived at Kimo, a large village that is home to Madi Konko, the governor of the hilly region of Kasson, known as Sorroma. From there, the guides appointed by the king of Kasson returned to join the mission against Kajaaga, and I waited until the 6th before I could convince Madi Konko to assign me a guide to Kaarta.
February 7.—Departing from Kimo, with Madi Konko’s son as a guide, we continued our course along the banks of the Krieko until the afternoon, when we arrived at Kangee, a considerable town. The Krieko is here but a small rivulet. This beautiful stream takes its rise a little to the eastward of this town, and descends with a rapid and noisy current until it reaches the bottom of the high hill called Tappa, where it becomes more placid, and winds gently through the lovely plains of Kooniakary; after which, having received an additional branch from the north, it is lost in the Senegal, somewhere near the falls of Felow.
February 7.—Leaving Kimo, with Madi Konko’s son as our guide, we followed the banks of the Krieko until the afternoon when we reached Kangee, a significant town. At this point, the Krieko is just a small stream. This beautiful waterway originates just east of the town and flows down quickly and noisily until it reaches the bottom of the high hill called Tappa, where it becomes calmer and meanders gently through the lovely plains of Kooniakary. After that, having received an additional branch from the north, it flows into the Senegal, somewhere near the falls of Felow.
February 8.—This day we travelled over a rough stony country, and having passed Seimpo and a number of other villages, arrived in the afternoon at Lackarago, a small village which stands upon the ridge of hills that separates the kingdoms of Kasson and Kaarta. In the course of the day we passed many hundreds of people flying from Kaarta with their families and effects.
February 8.—Today we traveled through a rocky, uneven landscape, and after passing Seimpo and several other villages, we arrived in the afternoon at Lackarago, a small village located on the ridge of hills that separates the kingdoms of Kasson and Kaarta. Throughout the day, we encountered many hundreds of people fleeing from Kaarta with their families and belongings.
February 9.—Early in the morning we departed from Lackarago, and a little to the eastward came to the brow of a hill from whence we had an extensive view of the country. Towards the south-east were perceived some very distant hills, which our guide told us were the mountains of Fooladoo. We travelled with great difficulty down a stony and abrupt precipice, and continued our way in the bed of a dry river course, where the trees, meeting overhead, made the place dark and cool. In a little time we reached the bottom of this romantic glen, and about ten o’clock emerged from between two rocky hills, and found ourselves on the level and sandy plains of Kaarta. At noon we arrived at a korree, or watering place, where for a few strings of beads I purchased as much milk and corn-meal as we could eat; indeed, provisions are here so cheap, and the shepherds live in such affluence, that they seldom ask any return for what refreshments a traveller receives from them. From this korree we reached Feesurah at sunset, where we took up our lodging for the night.
February 9.—We set off early in the morning from Lackarago, and a little eastward we arrived at the edge of a hill where we had a wide view of the landscape. To the southeast, we could see some very distant hills, which our guide said were the Fooladoo mountains. We faced great difficulty descending a rocky and steep cliff, and continued along the dry riverbed, where the trees above created a dark and cool atmosphere. Soon, we reached the bottom of this picturesque valley and around ten o'clock, we came out between two rocky hills and found ourselves on the flat, sandy plains of Kaarta. By noon, we arrived at a korree, or watering place, where I bought as much milk and cornmeal as we could eat for just a few beads; in fact, food is so inexpensive here, and the shepherds live so well, that they rarely ask for anything in return for what travelers take from them. From this korree, we reached Feesurah at sunset and settled in for the night.
February 10.—We continued at Feesurah all this day, to have a few clothes washed, and learn more exactly the situation of affairs before we ventured towards the capital.
February 10.—We stayed in Feesurah all day to get some clothes washed and to gather more details about the situation before we headed to the capital.
February 11—Our landlord, taking advantage of the unsettled state of the country, demanded so extravagant a sum for our lodging that, suspecting he wished for an opportunity to quarrel with us, I refused to submit to his exorbitant demand; but my attendants were so much frightened at the reports of approaching war that they refused to proceed any farther unless I could settle matters with him, and induce him to accompany us to Kemoo, for our protection on the road. This I accomplished with some difficulty; and by a present of a blanket which I had brought with me to sleep in, and for which our landlord had conceived a very great liking, matters were at length amicably adjusted, and he mounted his horse and led the way. He was one of those negroes who, together with the ceremonial part of the Mohammedan religion, retain all their ancient superstitions, and even drink strong liquors. They are called Johars, or Jowars, and in this kingdom form a very numerous and powerful tribe. We had no sooner got into a dark and lonely part of the first wood than he made a sign for us to stop, and, taking hold of a hollow piece of bamboo that hung as an amulet round his neck, whistled very loud three times. I confess I was somewhat startled, thinking it was a signal for some of his companions to come and attack us; but he assured me that it was done merely with a view to ascertain what success we were likely to meet with on our present journey. He then dismounted, laid his spear across the road, and having said a number of short prayers, concluded with three loud whistles; after which he listened for some time, as if in expectation of an answer, and receiving none, told us we might proceed without fear, for there was no danger. About noon we passed a number of large villages quite deserted, the inhabitants having fled into Kasson to avoid the horrors of war. We reached Karankalla at sunset. This formerly was a large town, but having been plundered by the Bambarrans about four years ago, nearly one-half of it is still in ruins.
February 11—Our landlord, taking advantage of the unstable situation in the country, demanded such an outrageous amount for our lodging that, suspecting he was looking for a reason to argue with us, I refused to comply with his ridiculous demand. However, my attendants were so frightened by the rumors of impending war that they wouldn’t move any further unless I could resolve the issue with him and convince him to accompany us to Kemoo for our protection on the road. I managed to achieve this after some difficulty; and with a gift of a blanket that I had brought to sleep in, which our landlord was very fond of, everything was finally settled amicably, and he got on his horse and led the way. He was one of those black people who, alongside the ceremonial aspects of the Mohammedan religion, still hold onto all their ancient superstitions and even drink strong liquor. They are known as Johars or Jowars and make up a very large and powerful tribe in this kingdom. As soon as we entered a dark and isolated part of the first forest, he signaled for us to stop, took hold of a hollow piece of bamboo that hung around his neck as an amulet, and whistled loudly three times. I admit I was somewhat startled, thinking it was a signal for some of his friends to come and attack us; but he assured me that it was simply to determine what success we were likely to have on our current journey. He then dismounted, laid his spear across the path, and after reciting several short prayers, ended with three loud whistles; after that, he listened for a while, as if expecting a response, and upon hearing none, told us we could proceed without fear, as there was no danger. Around noon, we passed several large, completely abandoned villages, as the inhabitants had fled to Kasson to escape the horrors of war. We reached Karankalla at sunset. This used to be a large town, but after being raided by the Bambarrans about four years ago, nearly half of it is still in ruins.
February 12.—At daylight we departed from Karankalla, and as it was but a short day’s journey to Kemmoo, we travelled slower than usual, and amused ourselves by collecting such eatable fruits as grew near the road-side. About noon we saw at a distance the capital of Kaarta, situated in the middle of an open plain—the country for two miles round being cleared of wood, by the great consumption of that article for building and fuel—and we entered the town about two o’clock in the afternoon.
February 12.—At dawn, we left Karankalla, and since it was only a short journey to Kemmoo, we took our time and entertained ourselves by gathering edible fruits along the roadside. Around noon, we caught sight of the capital of Kaarta in the distance, located in the center of an open plain—the area for two miles around had been cleared of trees due to heavy use for building and fuel—and we arrived in the town around two in the afternoon.
We proceeded without stopping to the court before the king’s residence; but I was so completely surrounded by the gazing multitude that I did not attempt to dismount, but sent in the landlord and Madi Konki’s son, to acquaint the king of my arrival. In a little time they returned, accompanied by a messenger from the king, signifying that he would see me in the evening; and in the meantime the messenger had orders to procure me a lodging and see that the crowd did not molest me. He conducted me into a court, at the door of which he stationed a man with a stick in his hand to keep off the mob, and then showed me a large hut in which I was to lodge. I had scarcely seated myself in this spacious apartment when the mob entered; it was found impossible to keep them out, and I was surrounded by as many as the hut could contain. When the first party, however, had seen me, and asked a few questions, they retired to make room for another company; and in this manner the hut was filled and emptied thirteen different times.
We continued on without stopping to the court near the king’s residence; but I was so completely surrounded by the crowd that I didn’t try to get down. Instead, I sent the landlord and Madi Konki’s son to inform the king of my arrival. After a while, they came back with a messenger from the king, who said he would see me in the evening. In the meantime, the messenger was instructed to find me a place to stay and ensure that the crowd didn’t bother me. He took me to a courtyard, where he positioned a man with a stick at the entrance to keep the mob at bay, and then showed me a large hut where I would stay. I had barely settled into this spacious room when the crowd pushed in; it was impossible to keep them out, and I was surrounded by as many people as the hut could hold. After the first group had seen me and asked a few questions, they left to make way for the next group, and this process repeated itself thirteen times.
A little before sunset the king sent to inform me that he was at leisure, and wished to see me. I followed the messenger through a number of courts surrounded with high walls, where I observed plenty of dry grass, bundled up like hay, to fodder the horses, in case the town should be invested. On entering the court in which the king was sitting I was astonished at the number of his attendants, and at the good order that seemed to prevail among them; they were all seated—the fighting men on the king’s right hand and the women and children on the left, leaving a space between them for my passage. The king, whose name was Daisy Koorabarri, was not to be distinguished from his subjects by any superiority in point of dress; a bank of earth, about two feet high, upon which was spread a leopard’s skin, constituted the only mark of royal dignity. When I had seated myself upon the ground before him, and related the various circumstances that had induced me to pass through his country, and my reasons for soliciting his protections, he appeared perfectly satisfied; but said it was not in his power at present to afford me much assistance, for that all sort of communication between Kaarta and Bambarra had been interrupted for some time past; and as Mansong, the king of Bambarra, with his army, had entered Fooladoo in his way to Kaarta, there was but little hope of my reaching Bambarra by any of the usual routes, inasmuch as, coming from an enemy’s country, I should certainly be plundered, or taken for a spy. If his country had been at peace, he said, I might have remained with him until a more favourable opportunity offered; but, as matters stood at present, he did not wish me to continue in Kaarta, for fear some accident should befall me, in which case my countrymen might say that he had murdered a white man. He would therefore advise me to return into Kasson, and remain there until the war should terminate, which would probably happen in the course of three or four months, after which, if he was alive, he said, he would be glad to see me, and if he was dead his sons would take care of me.
A little before sunset, the king sent word that he was available and wanted to see me. I followed the messenger through several courtyards surrounded by high walls, where I noticed a lot of dry grass bundled like hay to feed the horses in case the town was attacked. When I entered the courtyard where the king was sitting, I was amazed by how many attendants he had and the orderly atmosphere among them; everyone was seated—the warriors on the king’s right and the women and children on the left, leaving space for me to pass through. The king, named Daisy Koorabarri, was dressed just like his subjects, and the only sign of his royal status was a two-foot high earthen bank covered with a leopard's skin. After I sat down on the ground before him and explained the circumstances that led me through his country and my reasons for seeking his protection, he seemed satisfied. However, he said that he couldn’t offer me much help at the moment since all communication between Kaarta and Bambarra had been cut off for some time. He mentioned that Mansong, the king of Bambarra, with his army, had entered Fooladoo on his way to Kaarta, and there was little hope of me reaching Bambarra by the usual routes, since coming from enemy territory, I would likely be robbed or mistaken for a spy. He said that if his country had been at peace, I could have stayed with him until a better opportunity arose; but given the current situation, he didn't want me to stay in Kaarta for fear that something might happen to me, which could lead my countrymen to think he had killed a white man. He advised me to return to Kasson and stay there until the war ended, which would probably take three or four months. After that, if he was still alive, he said he would be happy to see me, and if he had died, his sons would take care of me.
This advice was certainly well meant on the part of the king, and perhaps I was to blame in not following it; but I reflected that the hot months were approaching, and I dreaded the thoughts of spending the rainy season in the interior of Africa. These considerations, and the aversion I felt at the idea of returning without having made a greater progress in discovery, made me determine to go forward; and though the king could not give me a guide to Bambarra, I begged that he would allow a man to accompany me as near the frontiers of his kingdom as was consistent with safety. Finding that I was determined to proceed, the king told me that one route still remained, but that, he said, was by no means free from danger—which was to go from Kaarta into the Moorish kingdom of Ludamar, from whence I might pass by a circuitous route into Bambarra. If I wished to follow this route he would appoint people to conduct me to Jarra, the frontier town of Ludamar. He then inquired very particularly how I had been treated since I had left the Gambia, and asked, in a jocular way, how many slaves I expected to carry home with me on my return. He was about to proceed when a man mounted on a fine Moorish horse, which was covered with sweat and foam, entered the court, and signifying that he had something of importance to communicate, the king immediately took up his sandals, which is the signal to strangers to retire. I accordingly took leave, but desired my boy to stay about the place, in order to learn something of the intelligence that this messenger had brought. In about an hour the boy returned, and informed me that the Bambarra army had left Fooladoo, and was on its march towards Kaarta; that the man I had seen, who had brought this intelligence, was one of the scouts, or watchmen, employed by the king, each of whom has his particular station (commonly on some rising ground) from whence he has the best view of the country, and watches the motions of the enemy.
This advice was definitely well-intentioned from the king, and maybe I was at fault for not following it; but I thought about the hot months coming up and dreaded the idea of spending the rainy season in the interior of Africa. These thoughts, along with my dislike of the idea of going back without making more progress in my discoveries, made me decide to move forward. Even though the king couldn't provide me with a guide to Bambarra, I asked him to let someone accompany me as close to the borders of his kingdom as safely possible. When the king realized I was set on proceeding, he mentioned that one route was still available, but he warned me it wasn't without danger—specifically, going from Kaarta into the Moorish kingdom of Ludamar, from where I could take a longer route into Bambarra. If I chose to take this route, he would assign people to help me get to Jarra, the border town of Ludamar. He then asked in detail how I'd been treated since leaving Gambia and jokingly inquired about how many slaves I expected to bring back with me. He was about to continue when a man on a sturdy Moorish horse, drenched in sweat and foam, entered the courtyard, indicating he had important news to share. The king immediately picked up his sandals, signaling to strangers to leave. I took my leave but asked my boy to stick around to find out what information this messenger had brought. About an hour later, the boy returned and told me that the Bambarra army had left Fooladoo and was marching toward Kaarta; the man I'd seen was one of the scouts employed by the king, each stationed (usually on some elevated ground) where they could see the best view of the area and keep an eye on enemy movements.
February 13.—At daylight I sent my horse-pistols and holsters as a present to the king, and being very desirous to get away from a place which was likely soon to become the seat of war, I begged the messenger to inform the king that I wished to depart from Kemmoo as soon as he should find it convenient to appoint me a guide. In about an hour the king sent his messenger to thank me for the present, and eight horsemen to conduct me to Jarra. They told me that the king wished me to proceed to Jarra with all possible expedition, that they might return before anything decisive should happen between the armies of Bambarra and Kaarta. We accordingly departed forthwith from Kemmoo, accompanied by three of Daisy’s sons, and about two hundred horsemen, who kindly undertook to see me a little way on my journey.
February 13.—At daybreak, I sent my horse pistols and holsters as a gift to the king. Eager to leave a place that was likely to soon become a battlefield, I asked the messenger to let the king know that I wanted to depart from Kemmoo as soon as he could arrange a guide for me. About an hour later, the king sent his messenger to thank me for the gift and dispatched eight horsemen to escort me to Jarra. They informed me that the king wanted me to head to Jarra as quickly as possible, so they could return before anything major happened between the armies of Bambarra and Kaarta. We then left immediately from Kemmoo, accompanied by three of Daisy’s sons and about two hundred horsemen, who generously offered to accompany me a short way on my journey.
CHAPTER VIII.
Adventures between Kemmoo and Jarra.
On the evening of the day of our departure from Kemmoo (the king’s eldest son and great part of the horsemen having returned) we reached a village called Marina, where we slept. During the night some thieves broke into the hut where I had deposited my baggage, and having cut open one of my bundles, stole a quantity of beads, part of my clothes, and some amber and gold, which happened to be in one of the pockets. I complained to my protectors, but without effect. The next day (February 14th) was far advanced before we departed from Marina, and we travelled slowly, on account of the excessive heat, until four o’clock in the afternoon, when two negroes were observed sitting among some thorny bushes, at a little distance from the road. The king’s people, taking it for granted that they were runaway slaves, cocked their muskets, and rode at full speed in different directions through the bushes, in order to surround them, and prevent their escaping. The negroes, however, waited with great composure until we came within bowshot of them, when each of them took from his quiver a handful of arrows, and putting two between his teeth and one in his bow, waved to us with his hand to keep at a distance; upon which one of the king’s people called out to the strangers to give some account of themselves. They said that “they were natives of Toorda, a neighbouring village, and had come to that place to gather tomberongs.” These are small farinaceous berries, of a yellow colour and delicious taste, which I knew to be the fruit of the rhamnus lotus of Linnæus.
On the evening of our departure from Kemmoo (after the king's eldest son and most of the horsemen had returned), we arrived at a village called Marina, where we spent the night. During the night, some thieves broke into the hut where I had left my luggage, cut open one of my bundles, and stole some beads, a portion of my clothes, and some amber and gold that were in one of the pockets. I complained to my protectors, but it didn’t help. The next day (February 14th), we left Marina late, traveling slowly due to the extreme heat, until around four o'clock in the afternoon, when we noticed two Black men sitting among some thorny bushes a little off the road. The king's men, assuming they were runaway slaves, loaded their muskets and charged in different directions through the bushes to surround them and prevent their escape. However, the men waited calmly until we were close enough to shoot an arrow, at which point each of them took a handful of arrows from their quivers, put two between their teeth and one in their bow, and waved us off to stay back; then one of the king's men shouted for the strangers to explain themselves. They said they were from Toorda, a nearby village, and had come to collect tomberongs. These are small, yellow, farinaceous berries with a delicious taste, and I recognized them as the fruit of the rhamnus lotus described by Linnæus.
The lotus is very common in all the kingdoms which I visited; but is found in the greatest plenty on the sandy soil of Kaarta, Ludamar, and the northern parts of Bambarra, where it is one of the most common shrubs of the country. I had observed the same species at Gambia.
The lotus is very common in all the kingdoms I visited, but it's found in the greatest abundance on the sandy soil of Kaarta, Ludamar, and the northern parts of Bambarra, where it is one of the most common shrubs in the area. I had noticed the same species in Gambia.
As this shrub is found in Tunis, and also in the negro kingdoms, and as it furnishes the natives of the latter with a food resembling bread, and also with a sweet liquor which is much relished by them, there can be little doubt of its being the lotus mentioned by Pliny as the food of the Libyan Lotophagi. An army may very well have been fed with the bread I have tasted, made of the meal of the fruit, as is said by Pliny to have been done in Libya; and as the taste of the bread is sweet and agreeable, it is not likely that the soldiers would complain of it.
As this shrub is found in Tunisia and also in the African kingdoms, and since it provides the locals there with a food similar to bread and a sweet drink that they enjoy, it's very likely that this is the lotus mentioned by Pliny as the food of the Libyan Lotophagi. An army could easily have been fed with the bread I’ve tasted, made from the fruit’s meal, just as Pliny claimed happened in Libya; and since the bread tastes sweet and pleasant, it’s unlikely the soldiers would complain about it.
We arrived in the evening at the village of Toorda; when all the rest of the king’s people turned back except two, who remained with me as guides to Jarra.
We arrived in the evening at the village of Toorda; when everyone else from the king’s group turned back except for two, who stayed with me as guides to Jarra.
February 15.—I departed from Toorda, and about two o’clock came to a considerable town, called Funingkedy. As we approached the town the inhabitants were much alarmed; for, as one of my guides wore a turban, they mistook us for some Moorish banditti. This misapprehension was soon cleared up, and we were well received by a Gambia slatee, who resides at this town, and at whose house we lodged.
February 15.—I left Toorda and around two o’clock arrived at a sizable town called Funingkedy. As we got closer to the town, the locals were quite frightened; since one of my guides wore a turban, they thought we were a group of Moorish bandits. This misunderstanding was quickly resolved, and we were warmly welcomed by a Gambia slatee who lives in this town, and we stayed at his house.
February 16.—We were informed that a number of people would go from this town to Jarra on the day following; and as the road was much infested by the Moors we resolved to stay and accompany the travellers.
February 16.—We were told that a group of people would be leaving this town for Jarra the next day; and since the road was heavily troubled by the Moors, we decided to stay and travel with them.
About two o’clock, as I was lying asleep upon a bullock’s hide behind the door of the hut, I was awakened by the screams of women, and a general clamour and confusion among the inhabitants. At first I suspected that the Bambarrans had actually entered the town; but observing my boy upon the top of one of the huts, I called to him to know what was the matter. He informed me that the Moors were come a second time to steal the cattle, and that they were now close to the town. I mounted the roof of the hut, and observed a large herd of bullocks coming towards the town, followed by five Moors on horseback, who drove the cattle forward with their muskets. When they had reached the wells which are close to the town, the Moors selected from the herd sixteen of the finest beasts, and drove them off at full gallop. During this transaction the townspeople, to the number of five hundred, stood collected close to the walls of the town; and when the Moors drove the cattle away, though they passed within pistol-shot of them, the inhabitants scarcely made a show of resistance. I only saw four muskets fired, which, being loaded with gunpowder of the negroes’ own manufacture, did no execution. Shortly after this I observed a number of people supporting a young man on horseback, and conducting him slowly towards the town. This was one of the herdsmen, who, attempting to throw his spear, had been wounded by a shot from one of the Moors. His mother walked on before, quite frantic with grief, clapping her hands, and enumerating the good qualities of her son. “Ee maffo fonio!” (“He never told a lie!”) said the disconsolate mother as her wounded son was carried in at the gate—“Ee maffo fonio abada!” (“He never told a lie; no, never!”) When they had conveyed him to his hut, and laid him upon a mat, all the spectators joined in lamenting his fate, by screaming and howling in the most piteous manner.
About two o’clock, as I was sleeping on a bullock’s hide behind the door of the hut, I was awakened by the screams of women and a general uproar among the townspeople. At first, I thought the Bambarrans had actually entered the town, but when I saw my boy on top of one of the huts, I called out to him to find out what was going on. He told me that the Moors had come again to steal the cattle and that they were now close to the town. I climbed onto the roof of the hut and saw a large herd of bullocks heading toward the town, followed by five Moors on horseback, who were driving the cattle forward with their guns. When they reached the wells near the town, the Moors picked out sixteen of the best cattle and sped away with them. During this whole event, about five hundred townspeople stood gathered near the town walls, and when the Moors drove the cattle away, they passed within pistol shot of them, but the inhabitants hardly tried to resist. I saw only four muskets fired, which, since they were loaded with gunpowder made by the locals, did no damage. Shortly after this, I noticed a group of people helping a young man on horseback, slowly bringing him back to the town. He was one of the herdsmen who, while trying to throw his spear, had been shot by one of the Moors. His mother walked ahead, totally distraught, clapping her hands and listing her son’s good qualities. “Ee maffo fonio!” (“He never told a lie!”) cried the grief-stricken mother as her injured son was brought in through the gate—“Ee maffo fonio abada!” (“He never told a lie; no, never!”) Once they had carried him to his hut and laid him on a mat, all the onlookers joined in mourning his fate, screaming and howling in the most pitiful way.
After their grief had subsided a little, I was desired to examine the wound. I found that the ball had passed quite through his leg, having fractured both bones a little below the knee: the poor boy was faint from the loss of blood, and his situation withal so very precarious, that I could not console his relations with any great hopes of his recovery. However, to give him a possible chance, I observed to them that it was necessary to cut off his leg above the knee. This proposal made every one start with horror; they had never heard of such a method of cure, and would by no means give their consent to it; indeed, they evidently considered me a sort of cannibal for proposing so cruel and unheard-of an operation, which, in their opinion, would be attended with more pain and danger than the wound itself. The patient was therefore committed to the care of some old bushreens, who endeavoured to secure him a passage into paradise by whispering in his ear some Arabic sentences, and desiring him to repeat them. After many unsuccessful attempts, the poor heathen at last pronounced, “La illah el Allah, Mahamet rasowl allahi” (“There is but one God, and Mohammed is his Prophet”); and the disciples of the Prophet assured his mother that her son had given sufficient evidence of his faith, and would be happy in a future state. He died the same evening.
After their grief had lessened a bit, they asked me to examine the wound. I found that the bullet had gone right through his leg, breaking both bones just below the knee. The poor boy was weak from blood loss, and his situation was so critical that I couldn’t give his family much hope for his recovery. However, to give him a fighting chance, I told them it was necessary to amputate his leg above the knee. This suggestion shocked everyone; they had never heard of such a treatment and absolutely refused to consent to it. In fact, they clearly thought I was some kind of monster for suggesting such a painful and extreme procedure, which they believed would cause more suffering and risk than the injury itself. So, the patient was left in the care of some old herbalists, who tried to ensure he would find peace in the afterlife by whispering some Arabic phrases in his ear and urging him to repeat them. After many failed attempts, the poor soul finally pronounced, “La illah el Allah, Mahamet rasowl allahi” (“There is but one God, and Mohammed is his Prophet”); and the Prophet’s followers reassured his mother that her son had shown enough faith and would be happy in the next life. He died the same evening.
February 17.—My guides informed me that in order to avoid the Moorish banditti it was necessary to travel in the night; we accordingly departed from Funingkedy in the afternoon, accompanied by about thirty people, carrying their effects with them into Ludamar, for fear of the war. We travelled with great silence and expedition until midnight, when we stopped in a sort of enclosure, near a small village; but the thermometer being so low as 68 degrees, none of the negroes could sleep on account of the cold.
February 17.—My guides told me that to steer clear of the Moorish bandits, we had to travel at night. So, we left Funingkedy in the afternoon with around thirty people, who brought their belongings with them into Ludamar because of the conflict. We moved quickly and quietly until midnight, when we stopped in an enclosure near a small village. However, since the temperature dropped to 68 degrees, none of the locals could sleep because of the cold.
At daybreak on the 18th we resumed our journey, and at eight o’clock passed Simbing, the frontier village of Ludamar, situated on a narrow pass between two rocky hills, and surrounded with a high wall. From this village Major Houghton (being deserted by his negro servants, who refused to follow him into the Moorish country) wrote his last letter with a pencil to Dr. Laidley. This brave but unfortunate man, having surmounted many difficulties, had taken a northerly direction, and endeavoured to pass through the kingdom of Ludamar, where I afterwards learned the following particulars concerning his melancholy fate:—On his arrival at Jarra he got acquainted with certain Moorish merchants who were travelling to Tisheet (a place near the salt pits in the Great Desert, ten days’ journey to the northward) to purchase salt; and the Major, at the expense of a musket and some tobacco, engaged them to convey him thither. It is impossible to form any other opinion on this determination than that the Moors intentionally deceived him, either with regard to the route that he wished to pursue, or the state of the intermediate country between Jarra and Timbuctoo. Their intention probably was to rob and leave him in the desert. At the end of two days he suspected their treachery, and insisted on returning to Jarra. Finding him persist in this determination, the Moors robbed him of everything he possessed, and went off with their camels; the poor Major being thus deserted, returned on foot to a watering-place in possession of the Moors, called Tarra. He had been some days without food, and the unfeeling Moors refusing to give him any, he sank at last under his distresses. Whether he actually perished of hunger, or was murdered outright by the savage Mohammedans, is not certainly known; his body was dragged into the woods, and I was shown at a distance the spot where his remains were left to perish.
At daybreak on the 18th, we continued our journey, and at eight o’clock we passed Simbing, the border village of Ludamar, located in a narrow pass between two rocky hills and surrounded by a high wall. From this village, Major Houghton (who had been abandoned by his African servants, who refused to accompany him into the Moorish territory) wrote his final letter with a pencil to Dr. Laidley. This brave yet unfortunate man, having overcome many challenges, took a northern route and tried to cross through the kingdom of Ludamar, where I later learned the details of his tragic fate: Upon reaching Jarra, he met some Moorish traders who were traveling to Tisheet (a place near the salt pits in the Great Desert, ten days' journey to the north) to buy salt; and the Major, in exchange for a musket and some tobacco, hired them to take him there. It's hard to see this decision as anything but a setup, as the Moors likely misled him about either the path he wanted to take or the condition of the land between Jarra and Timbuctoo. Their likely aim was to rob him and abandon him in the desert. After two days, he grew suspicious of their deception and insisted on returning to Jarra. When he stuck to this decision, the Moors robbed him of everything he owned and left with their camels; the unfortunate Major, now deserted, walked back to a watering place controlled by the Moors called Tarra. He had been without food for several days, and the callous Moors, refusing to help him, ultimately led him to succumb to his suffering. Whether he died from hunger or was outright murdered by the savage Mohammedans is uncertain; his body was dragged into the woods, and I was shown from a distance the place where his remains were left to decay.
About four miles to the north of Simbing we came to a small stream of water, where we observed a number of wild horses they were all of one colour, and galloped away from us at an easy rate, frequently stopping and looking back. The negroes hunt them for food, and their flesh is much esteemed.
About four miles north of Simbing, we reached a small stream where we saw a group of wild horses. They were all the same color and trotted away from us at a relaxed pace, often stopping to look back. The locals hunt them for food, and their meat is highly regarded.
About noon we arrived at Jarra, a large town situated at the bottom of some rocky hills.
About noon, we arrived at Jarra, a large town located at the base of some rocky hills.
CHAPTER IX.
THE TOWN OF JARRA—HELD CAPTIVE BY THE MOORS.
The town of Jarra is of considerable extent; the houses are built of clay and stone intermixed—the clay answering the purpose of mortar. It is situated in the Moorish kingdom of Ludamar; but the major part of the inhabitants are negroes, from the borders of the southern states, who prefer a precarious protection under the Moors, which they purchase by a tribute, rather than continue exposed to their predatory hostilities. The tribute they pay is considerable; and they manifest towards their Moorish superiors the most unlimited obedience and submission, and are treated by them with the utmost indignity and contempt. The Moors of this and the other states adjoining the country of the negroes resemble in their persons the mulattoes of the West Indies to so great a degree as not easily to be distinguished from them; and, in truth, the present generation seem to be a mixed race between the Moors (properly so called) of the north and the negroes of the south, possessing many of the worst qualities of both nations.
The town of Jarra is quite large; the houses are made of a mix of clay and stone, with clay used as mortar. It’s located in the Moorish kingdom of Ludamar, but most of the residents are Black people from the southern borders who prefer the uncertain protection offered by the Moors, which they buy with tribute, rather than remain vulnerable to their raids. The tribute they pay is significant, and they show their Moorish superiors complete obedience and submission, yet they are treated with great disrespect and contempt. The Moors in this area and the neighboring regions look so much like the mulattoes of the West Indies that they’re hard to tell apart. In fact, the current generation appears to be a mixed race of northern Moors and southern Black people, exhibiting many of the negative traits from both groups.
Of the origin of these Moorish tribes, as distinguished from the inhabitants of Barbary, from whom they are divided by the Great Desert, nothing further seems to be known than what is related by John Leo, the African, whose account may be abridged as follows:—
Of the origin of these Moorish tribes, separated from the inhabitants of Barbary by the Great Desert, little is known beyond what John Leo, the African, has reported. His account can be summarized as follows:—
Before the Arabian conquest, about the middle of the seventh century, all the inhabitants of Africa, whether they were descended from Numidians, Phœnicians, Carthaginians, Romans, Vandals, or Goths, were comprehended under the general name of Mauri, or Moors. All these nations were converted to the religion of Mohammed during the Arabian empire under the Kaliphs. About this time many of the Numidian tribes, who led a wandering life in the desert, and supported themselves upon the produce of their cattle, retired southward across the Great Desert to avoid the fury of the Arabians; and by one of those tribes, says Leo (that of Zanhaga), were discovered, and conquered, the negro nations on the Niger. By the Niger is here undoubtedly meant the river of Senegal, which in the Mandingo language is Bafing, or the Black River.
Before the Arabian conquest, around the mid-seventh century, all the people of Africa, whether descended from Numidians, Phoenicians, Carthaginians, Romans, Vandals, or Goths, were collectively referred to as Mauri, or Moors. During the Arabian Empire under the Caliphs, all these nations converted to the religion of Mohammed. Around this time, many of the Numidian tribes, who lived a nomadic life in the desert and relied on their livestock for survival, moved south across the Great Desert to escape the aggression of the Arabians. It was one of these tribes, as Leo mentions (the Zanhaga tribe), that discovered and conquered the black nations along the Niger. In this context, the Niger likely refers to the Senegal River, which is called Bafing, or the Black River, in the Mandingo language.
To what extent these people are now spread over the African continent it is difficult to ascertain. There is reason to believe that their dominion stretches from west to east, in a narrow line or belt, from the mouth of the Senegal (on the northern side of that river) to the confines of Abyssinia. They are a subtle and treacherous race of people, and take every opportunity of cheating and plundering the credulous and unsuspecting negroes. But their manners and general habits of life will be best explained as incidents occur in the course of my narrative.
To what extent these people are now spread across the African continent is hard to determine. There's reason to believe that their influence extends from west to east, in a narrow strip, from the mouth of the Senegal River (on the northern side) to the borders of Abyssinia. They are a cunning and deceitful group who take every chance to cheat and rob the gullible and unsuspecting locals. However, their customs and overall way of life will be best described as events unfold in my story.
The difficulties we had already encountered, the unsettled state of the country, and, above all, the savage and overbearing deportment of the Moors, had so completely frightened my attendants that they declared they would rather relinquish every claim to reward than proceed one step farther to the eastward. Indeed, the danger they incurred of being seized by the Moors, and sold into slavery, became every day more apparent; and I could not condemn their apprehensions. In this situation, deserted by my attendants, and reflecting that my retreat was cut off by the war behind me, and that a Moorish country of ten days’ journey lay before me, I applied to Daman to obtain permission from Ali, the chief or sovereign of Ludamar, that I might pass through his country unmolested into Bambarra; and I hired one of Daman’s slaves to accompany me thither, as soon as such permission should be obtained. A messenger was despatched to Ali, who at this time was encamped near Benowm; and as a present was necessary in order to insure success, I sent him five garments of cotton cloth, which I purchased of Daman for one of my fowling-pieces. Fourteen days elapsed in settling this affair; but on the evening of the 26th of February, one of Ali’s slaves arrived with directions, as he pretended, to conduct me in safety as far as Goomba, and told me I was to pay him one garment of blue cotton cloth for his attendance. My faithful boy, observing that I was about to proceed without him, resolved to accompany me; and told me, that though he wished me to turn back, he never entertained any serious thoughts of deserting me, but had been advised to it by Johnson, with a view to induce me to turn immediately for Gambia.
The challenges we had faced, the unstable condition of the country, and especially the aggressive and intimidating behavior of the Moors, had completely terrified my companions to the point that they said they would rather give up any chance of reward than take another step eastward. In fact, the risk of being captured by the Moors and sold into slavery became more evident every day, and I couldn't blame them for their fears. In this situation, left behind by my companions and realizing that I could not retreat due to the war behind me and with a Moorish territory of ten days' journey ahead, I turned to Daman to get permission from Ali, the leader of Ludamar, to pass through his land without trouble on my way to Bambarra; I also hired one of Daman’s slaves to travel with me as soon as permission was granted. A messenger was sent to Ali, who was then camped near Benowm; since a gift was needed to ensure a favorable response, I sent him five cotton garments that I bought from Daman in exchange for one of my hunting guns. It took fourteen days to sort this out, but on the evening of February 26, one of Ali’s slaves arrived with instructions, as he claimed, to guide me safely to Goomba and mentioned that I needed to pay him one blue cotton cloth for his assistance. My loyal boy, seeing that I was about to go without him, insisted on coming along, telling me that although he hoped I would turn back, he never seriously considered abandoning me; he had only been advised to do so by Johnson to try to persuade me to head straight for Gambia.
February 27.—I delivered most of my papers to Johnson, to convey them to Gambia as soon as possible, reserving a duplicate for myself in case of accidents. I likewise left in Daman’s possession a bundle of clothes, and other things that were not absolutely necessary, for I wished to diminish my baggage as much as possible, that the Moors might have fewer inducements to plunder us.
February 27.—I gave most of my papers to Johnson to send to Gambia as soon as he could, keeping a copy for myself just in case. I also left a bundle of clothes and other non-essential items with Daman because I wanted to reduce my baggage as much as possible, so the Moors would have less reason to rob us.
Things being thus adjusted, we departed from Jarra in the forenoon, and slept at Troomgoomba, a small walled village, inhabited by a mixture of negroes and Moors. On the day following (February 28th) we reached Quira; and on the 29th, after a toilsome journey over a sandy country, we came to Compe, a watering-place belonging to the Moors; from whence, on the morning following, we proceeded to Deena, a large town, and, like Jarra, built of stone and clay. The Moors are here in greater proportion to the negroes than at Jarra. They assembled round the hut of the negro where I lodged, and treated me with the greatest insolence; they hissed, shouted, and abused me; they even spat in my face, with a view to irritate me, and afford them a pretext for seizing my baggage. But finding such insults had not the desired effect, they had recourse to the final and decisive argument, that I was a Christian, and of course that my property was lawful plunder to the followers of Mohammed. They accordingly opened my bundles, and robbed me of everything they fancied. My attendants, finding that everybody could rob me with impunity, insisted on returning to Jarra.
With everything sorted out, we left Jarra in the morning and spent the night at Troomgoomba, a small walled village home to a mix of Black people and Moors. The next day (February 28th) we arrived at Quira; and on the 29th, after a grueling trek across a sandy area, we reached Compe, a place for water used by the Moors. The following morning, we moved on to Deena, a large town made of stone and clay, similar to Jarra. Here, there were more Moors compared to the Black population than in Jarra. They gathered around the hut where I stayed and treated me with extreme disrespect; they hissed, shouted, and insulted me; they even spat in my face to provoke me, hoping for an excuse to grab my bags. However, when they saw that such insults didn’t get the reaction they wanted, they resorted to the final argument: since I was a Christian, my belongings were fair game for followers of Mohammed. They then went through my bundles and stole everything they wanted. My companions, seeing that anyone could rob me without consequence, insisted we go back to Jarra.
The day following (March 2nd), I endeavoured, by all the means in my power, to prevail upon my people to go on, but they still continued obstinate; and having reason to fear some further insult from the fanatic Moors, I resolved to proceed alone. Accordingly, the next morning, about two o’clock, I departed from Deena. It was moonlight, but the roaring of the wild beasts made it necessary to proceed with caution.
The day after (March 2nd), I tried everything I could to convince my people to continue, but they remained stubborn. Worrying about possible further attacks from the fanatical Moors, I decided to go on my own. So, the next morning, around two o’clock, I left Deena. It was a moonlit night, but the sounds of wild animals made it clear that I needed to be careful.
When I had reached a piece of rising ground about half a mile from the town, I heard somebody halloo, and, looking back, saw my faithful boy running after me. He informed me that Ali’s men had gone back to Benowm, and that Daman’s negro was about to depart for Jarra; but he said he had no doubt, if I would stop a little, that he could persuade the latter to accompany us. I waited accordingly, and in about an hour the boy returned with the negro; and we continued travelling over a sandy country, covered chiefly with the Asclepias gigantea, until mid-day, when we came to a number of deserted huts; and seeing some appearances of water at a little distance, I sent the boy to fill a soofroo; but as he was examining the place for water, the roaring of a lion, that was probably on the same pursuit, induced the frightened boy to return in haste, and we submitted patiently to the disappointment. In the afternoon we reached a town inhabited chiefly by Foulahs, called Samaming-koos.
When I reached a rise about half a mile from the town, I heard someone shout, and when I looked back, I saw my loyal boy running after me. He told me that Ali's men had gone back to Benowm and that Daman's servant was about to leave for Jarra; however, he was confident that if I waited a bit, he could convince the servant to join us. I agreed to wait, and about an hour later, the boy returned with the servant. We continued traveling through a sandy area mostly covered with Asclepias gigantea until midday, when we arrived at some abandoned huts. Spotting some signs of water a little ways off, I sent the boy to fill a soofroo. But while he was looking for water, the roar of a lion, likely on the same quest, scared him into rushing back, and we accepted the disappointment patiently. In the afternoon, we reached a town mainly inhabited by Foulahs called Samaming-koos.
Next morning (March 4th), we set out for Sampaka, which place we reached about two o’clock. On the road we observed immense quantities of locusts; the trees were quite black with them.
Next morning (March 4th), we headed to Sampaka, arriving around two o’clock. On the way, we saw huge swarms of locusts; the trees were completely covered in them.
Sampaka is a large town, and when the Moors and Bambarrans were at war was thrice attacked by the former; but they were driven off with great loss, though the king of Bambarra was afterwards obliged to give up this, and all the other towns as far as Goomba, in order to obtain a peace. Here I lodged at the house of a negro who practised the art of making gunpowder. He showed me a bag of nitre, very white, but the crystals were much smaller than common. They procure it in considerable quantities from the ponds, which are filled in the rainy season, and to which the cattle resort for coolness during the heat of the day. When the water is evaporated, a white efflorescence is observed on the mud, which the natives collect and purify in such a manner as to answer their purpose. The Moors supply them with sulphur from the Mediterranean; and the process is completed by pounding the different articles together in a wooden mortar. The grains are very unequal, and the sound of its explosion is by no means so sharp as that produced by European gunpowder.
Sampaka is a large town, and during the war with the Moors and Bambarrans, it was attacked three times by the Moors; however, they were pushed back with significant losses. Still, the king of Bambarra eventually had to surrender this town, along with all the others up to Goomba, to achieve peace. I stayed at the home of a man who made gunpowder. He showed me a bag of very white nitre, though the crystals were much smaller than usual. They gather it in large amounts from ponds filled during the rainy season, where cattle go to cool off during the heat of the day. When the water evaporates, a white residue appears on the mud, which the locals collect and refine for their needs. The Moors provide them with sulphur from the Mediterranean, and the process ends with pounding all the ingredients together in a wooden mortar. The grains are quite uneven, and the sound of its explosion is not nearly as sharp as that of European gunpowder.
March 5.—We departed from Sampaka at daylight. About noon we stopped a little at a village called Dangali, and in the evening arrived at Dalli. We saw upon the road two large herds of camels feeding. When the Moors turn their camels to feed they tie up one of their fore-legs to prevent their straying. This happened to be a feast-day at Dalli, and the people were dancing before the dooty’s house. But when they were informed that a white man was come into the town they left off dancing and came to the place where I lodged, walking in regular order, two and two, with the music before them. They play upon a sort of flute; but instead of blowing into a hole in the side they blow obliquely over the end, which is half shut by a thin piece of wood; they govern the holes on the side with their fingers, and play some simple and very plaintive airs. They continued to dance and sing until midnight, during which time I was surrounded by so great a crowd as made it necessary for me to satisfy their curiosity by sitting still.
March 5.—We left Sampaka at dawn. About noon, we took a short break at a village called Dangali and arrived at Dalli in the evening. On the way, we saw two large herds of camels grazing. The Moors tie up one of the camels' front legs to keep them from wandering off while they feed. It happened to be a festival day in Dalli, and the locals were dancing in front of the dooty's house. However, when they heard that a white man had come to town, they stopped dancing and came to where I was staying, walking in pairs with music leading the way. They played a type of flute, but instead of blowing into a hole on the side, they blew obliquely over the end, which was partially closed with a thin piece of wood; they used their fingers to cover the holes on the side and played some simple, very sad tunes. They kept dancing and singing until midnight, and during that time, I was surrounded by such a large crowd that I had to sit still to satisfy their curiosity.
March 6.—We stopped here this morning because some of the townspeople, who were going for Goomba on the day following, wished to accompany us; but in order to avoid the crowd of people which usually assembled in the evening we went to a negro village to the east of Dalli, called Samee, where we were kindly received by the hospitable dooty, who on this occasion killed two fine sheep, and invited his friends to come and feast with him.
March 6.—We paused here this morning because some of the locals, who were heading to Goomba the next day, wanted to join us; however, to evade the usual evening crowd, we went to a nearby village to the east of Dalli called Samee, where we were warmly welcomed by the friendly leader, who on this occasion had two beautiful sheep slaughtered and invited his friends to come and celebrate with him.
March 7.—Our landlord was so proud of the honour of entertaining a white man that he insisted on my staying with him and his friends until the cool of the evening, when he said he would conduct me to the next village. As I was now within two days’ journey of Goomba, I had no apprehensions from the Moors, and readily accepted the invitation. I spent the forenoon very pleasantly with these poor negroes; their company was the more acceptable, as the gentleness of their manners presented a striking contrast to the rudeness and barbarity of the Moors. They enlivened their conversation by drinking a fermented liquor made from corn—the same sort of beer that I have described in a former chapter; and better I never tasted in Great Britain.
March 7.—Our landlord was so proud to host a white man that he insisted I stay with him and his friends until the evening coolness, when he would take me to the next village. Since I was now just two days away from Goomba, I had no fears of the Moors and gladly accepted the invitation. I spent the morning happily with these kind people; their company was especially enjoyable, as their gentle manners were a sharp contrast to the rudeness and brutality of the Moors. They livened up their conversation by drinking a fermented corn liquor—the same kind of beer I described in a previous chapter; and it was better than anything I ever tasted in Great Britain.
In the midst of this harmless festivity, I flattered myself that all danger from the Moors was over. Fancy had already placed me on the banks of the Niger, and presented to my imagination a thousand delightful scenes in my future progress, when a party of Moors unexpectedly entered the hut, and dispelled the golden dream. They came, they said, by Ali’s orders, to convey me to his camp at Benowm. If I went peaceably, they told me, I had nothing to fear; but if I refused they had orders to bring me by force. I was struck dumb by surprise and terror, which the Moors observing endeavoured to calm my apprehensions by repeating the assurance that I had nothing to fear. Their visit, they added, was occasioned by the curiosity of Ali’s wife Fatima, who had heard so much about Christians that she was very anxious to see one: as soon as her curiosity should be satisfied, they had no doubt, they said, that Ali would give me a handsome present, and send a person to conduct me to Bambarra. Finding entreaty and resistance equally fruitless, I prepared to follow the messengers, and took leave of my landlord and his company with great reluctance. Accompanied by my faithful boy (for Daman’s slave made his escape on seeing the Moors), we reached Dalli in the evening, where we were strictly watched by the Moors during the night.
In the middle of this innocent celebration, I convinced myself that the danger from the Moors was behind me. My imagination had already taken me to the banks of the Niger, picturing a thousand wonderful scenes in my future adventures, when a group of Moors suddenly entered the hut and shattered my happy dream. They said they came on Ali’s orders to take me to his camp at Benowm. They assured me that if I went along peacefully, I had nothing to worry about; but if I refused, they were instructed to bring me by force. I was speechless with shock and fear, which the Moors noticed and tried to ease by repeating that I had nothing to fear. They explained that their visit was prompted by the curiosity of Ali’s wife, Fatima, who had heard so much about Christians and was eager to see one: once her curiosity was satisfied, they assured me, Ali would surely give me a generous gift and send someone to take me to Bambarra. Since pleading and resisting were both useless, I got ready to follow the messengers and reluctantly said goodbye to my host and his guests. Accompanied by my loyal boy (because Daman’s slave managed to escape when he saw the Moors), we arrived in Dalli in the evening, where the Moors kept a close watch on us throughout the night.
March 8.—We were conducted by a circuitous path through the woods to Dangali, where we slept.
March 8.—We were taken on a winding route through the woods to Dangali, where we spent the night.
March 9.—We continued our journey, and in the afternoon arrived at Sampaka.
March 9.—We kept going on our journey, and in the afternoon, we reached Sampaka.
Next morning (March 10th) we set out for Samaming-koos. On the road we overtook a woman and two boys with an ass; she informed us that she was going for Bambarra, but had been stopped on the road by a party of Moors, who had taken most of her clothes and some gold from her; and that she would be under the necessity of returning to Deena till the fast moon was over. The same even the new moon was seen which ushered in the month Ramadan. Large fires were made in different parts of the town, and a greater quantity of victuals than usual dressed upon the occasion.
Next morning (March 10th) we set out for Samaming-koos. On the road, we came across a woman and two boys with a donkey; she told us that she was trying to get to Bambarra but had been stopped by a group of Moors who took most of her clothes and some gold from her. She said she would have to go back to Deena until the fasting moon was over. That evening, the new moon appeared, marking the start of the month of Ramadan. Large fires were lit in different parts of the town, and there was more food prepared than usual for the occasion.
March 11.—By daylight the Moors were in readiness; but as I had suffered much from thirst on the road I made my boy fill a soofroo of water for my own use, for the Moors assured me that they should not taste either meat or drink until sunset. However, I found that the excessive heat of the sun, and the dust we raised in travelling, overcame their scruples, and made my soofroo a very useful part of our baggage. On our arrival at Deena, I went to pay my respects to one of Ali’s sons. I found him sitting in a low hut, with five or six more of his companions, washing their hands and feet, and frequently taking water into their mouths, gargling and spitting it out again. I was no sooner seated than he handed me a double-barrelled gun, and told me to dye the stock of a blue colour, and repair one of the locks. I found great difficulty in persuading him that I knew nothing about the matter. “However,” says he, “if you cannot repair the gun, you shall give me some knives and scissors immediately;” and when my boy, who acted as interpreter, assured him that I had no such articles, he hastily snatched up a musket that stood by him, cocked it, and putting the muzzle close to the boy’s ear, would certainly have shot him dead upon the spot had not the Moors wrested the musket from him, and made signs for us to retreat.
March 11.—By morning, the Moors were ready; but since I had suffered a lot from thirst on the journey, I had my boy fill a water container for myself, because the Moors told me they wouldn’t eat or drink anything until sunset. However, I noticed that the intense heat of the sun and the dust we kicked up while traveling made them change their minds, and my water container became a very important part of our supplies. When we arrived in Deena, I went to pay my respects to one of Ali’s sons. I found him sitting in a small hut with five or six of his friends, washing their hands and feet, and frequently taking water into their mouths, gargling, and spitting it out. No sooner had I sat down than he handed me a double-barreled gun and asked me to dye the stock a blue color and fix one of the locks. I had a hard time convincing him that I didn’t know anything about that. “But,” he said, “if you can’t fix the gun, you’ll have to give me some knives and scissors right away;” and when my boy, who was translating, told him that I didn’t have any of those items, he quickly grabbed a musket that was next to him, cocked it, and put the muzzle close to the boy’s ear. He would have definitely shot him right there if the Moors hadn’t taken the musket away from him and gestured for us to leave.
March 12.—We departed from Deena towards Benowm, and about nine o’clock came to a korree, whence the Moors were preparing to depart to the southward, on account of the scarcity of water; here we filled our soofroo, and continued our journey over a hot sandy country, covered with small stunted shrubs, until about one o’clock, when the heat of the sun obliged us to stop. But our water being expended, we could not prudently remain longer than a few minutes to collect a little gum, which is an excellent succedaneum for water, as it keeps the mouth moist, and allays for a time the pain in the throat.
March 12.—We left Deena heading towards Benowm, and around nine o’clock, we reached a water source where the locals were getting ready to leave south because of the lack of water. We filled our water container and continued our journey through a hot, sandy landscape dotted with small, scraggly bushes until about one o’clock, when the sun’s heat forced us to take a break. However, since we had run out of water, we couldn't stay longer than a few minutes to gather some gum, which is a great substitute for water, as it keeps the mouth moist and temporarily eases throat discomfort.
About five o’clock we came in sight of Benowm, the residence of Ali. It presented to the eye a great number of dirty-looking tents, scattered without order over a large space of ground; and among the tents appeared large herds of camels, cattle, and goats. We reached the skirts of this camp a little before sunset, and, with much entreaty, procured a little water. My arrival was no sooner observed than the people who drew water at the wells threw down their buckets; those in the tents mounted their horses, and men, women, and children, came running or galloping towards me. I soon found myself surrounded by such a crowd that I could scarcely move; one pulled my clothes, another took off my hat, a third stopped me to examine my waistcoat-buttons, and a fourth called out, “La illah el Allah, Mahamet rasowl allahi”—(“There is but one God, and Mohammed is his Prophet”)—and signified, in a threatening manner, that I must repeat those words. We reached at length the king’s tent, where we found a great number of people, men and women, assembled. Ali was sitting upon a black leather cushion, clipping a few hairs from his upper lip, a female attendant holding up a looking-glass before him. He appeared to be an old man of the Arab cast, with a long white beard; and he had a sullen and indignant aspect. He surveyed me with attention, and inquired of the Moors if I could speak Arabic. Being answered in the negative, he appeared much surprised, and continued silent. The surrounding attendants, and especially the ladies, were abundantly more inquisitive: they asked a thousand questions, inspected every part of my apparel, searched my pockets, and obliged me to unbutton my waistcoat, and display the whiteness of my skin; they even counted my toes and fingers, as if they doubted whether I was in truth a human being. In a little time the priest announced evening prayers; but before the people departed, the Moor who had acted as interpreter informed me that Ali was about to present me with something to eat; and looking round, I observed some boys bringing a wild hog, which they tied to one of the tent strings, and Ali made signs to me to kill and dress it for supper. Though I was very hungry, I did not think it prudent to eat any part of an animal so much detested by the Moors, and therefore told him that I never ate such food. They then untied the hog, in hopes that it would run immediately at me—for they believe that a great enmity subsists between hogs and Christians—but in this they were disappointed, for the animal no sooner regained his liberty than he began to attack indiscriminately every person that came in his way, and at last took shelter under the couch upon which the king was sitting. The assembly being thus dissolved, I was conducted to the tent of Ali’s chief slave, but was not permitted to enter, nor allowed to touch anything belonging to it. I requested something to eat, and a little boiled corn, with salt and water, was at length sent me in a wooden bowl; and a mat was spread upon the sand before the tent, on which I passed the night, surrounded by the curious multitude.
About five o'clock, we spotted Benowm, the home of Ali. It looked to the eye like a lot of dirty tents scattered haphazardly over a large area, with large herds of camels, cattle, and goats among them. We arrived at the edge of this camp just before sunset and, after much pleading, managed to get a bit of water. As soon as people noticed me, those drawing water at the wells dropped their buckets; those inside the tents mounted their horses, and men, women, and children came running or galloping towards me. I quickly found myself in a crowd so thick that I could barely move; one person tugged at my clothes, another took off my hat, a third stopped me to check out my waistcoat buttons, and a fourth shouted, “La illah el Allah, Mahamet rasowl allahi”—(“There is but one God, and Mohammed is his Prophet”)—and insisted, in a threatening way, that I repeat those words. Eventually, we made it to the king's tent, where a large group of men and women had gathered. Ali was sitting on a black leather cushion, trimming a few hairs from his upper lip, while a female attendant held up a mirror for him. He appeared to be an older Arab man with a long white beard and a sullen, angry look. He watched me closely and asked the Moors if I spoke Arabic. When they replied that I didn't, he seemed very surprised and fell silent. The attendants around us, particularly the women, were much more curious: they asked a ton of questions, examined every part of my clothing, searched my pockets, and made me unbutton my waistcoat to show my skin's whiteness; they even counted my fingers and toes, as if they doubted I was really human. After a while, the priest announced evening prayers, but before people left, the Moor who had been translating told me that Ali was going to offer me something to eat; I noticed some boys bringing in a wild hog, which they tied to one of the tent strings. Ali signaled for me to kill and prepare it for supper. Although I was very hungry, I thought it unwise to eat an animal that the Moors detested, so I told him I never ate such food. They then untied the hog, hoping it would run straight at me—since they believe there's a strong enmity between hogs and Christians—but they were disappointed when the animal, once free, started attacking everyone in sight and finally took refuge under the couch where the king was sitting. Once the crowd dispersed, I was taken to the tent of Ali’s chief slave but wasn't allowed to enter or touch anything inside. I asked for something to eat, and eventually, a small bowl of boiled corn with salt and water was sent to me. A mat was laid out on the sand in front of the tent, where I spent the night, surrounded by the curious crowd.
At sunrise, Ali, with a few attendants, came on horseback to visit me, and signified that he had provided a hut for me, where I would be sheltered from the sun. I was accordingly conducted thither, and found the hut comparatively cool and pleasant.
At sunrise, Ali, along with a few attendants, rode over to visit me and let me know that he had arranged a hut for me, where I could stay out of the sun. I was then taken there and found the hut to be relatively cool and pleasant.
I was no sooner seated in this my new habitation than the Moors assembled in crowds to behold me; but I found it rather a troublesome levée, for I was obliged to take off one of my stockings, and show them my foot, and even to take off my jacket and waistcoat, to show them how my clothes were put on and off; they were much delighted with the curious contrivance of buttons. All this was to be repeated to every succeeding visitor; for such as had already seen these wonders insisted on their friends seeing the same; and in this manner I was employed, dressing and undressing, buttoning and unbuttoning, from noon till night. About eight o’clock, Ali sent me for supper some kouskous and salt and water, which was very acceptable, being the only victuals I had tasted since morning.
I had barely settled into my new home when a crowd of Moors gathered to see me. It turned out to be quite a hassle because I had to take off one of my stockings to show them my foot, and even had to remove my jacket and waistcoat to demonstrate how my clothes went on and off. They were fascinated by the clever design of buttons. This routine had to be repeated for every new visitor; those who had already seen these curiosities insisted their friends see them too. So, I spent my time dressing and undressing, buttoning and unbuttoning, from noon until night. Around eight o’clock, Ali sent me some kouskous along with salt and water for dinner, which was very welcome since it was the only food I had eaten since the morning.
I observed that in the night the Moors kept regular watch, and frequently looked into the hut to see if I was asleep; and if it was quite dark, they would light a wisp of grass. About two o’clock in the morning a Moor entered the hut, probably with a view to steal something, or perhaps to murder me; and groping about he laid his hand upon my shoulder. As night visitors were at best but suspicious characters, I sprang up the moment he laid his hand upon me; and the Moor, in his haste to get off, stumbled over my boy, and fell with his face upon the wild hog, which returned the attack by biting the Moor’s arm. The screams of this man alarmed the people in the king’s tent, who immediately conjectured that I had made my escape, and a number of them mounted their horses, and prepared to pursue me. I observed upon this occasion that Ali did not sleep in his own tent, but came galloping upon a white horse from a small tent at a considerable distance; indeed, the tyrannical and cruel behaviour of this man made him so jealous of every person around him that even his own slaves and domestics knew not where he slept. When the Moors had explained to him the cause of this outcry they all went away, and I was permitted to sleep quietly until morning.
I noticed that at night, the Moors kept a close watch and often peeked into the hut to check if I was asleep; when it got very dark, they would light a bit of grass. Around two in the morning, a Moor came into the hut, probably intending to steal something or maybe even kill me; as he felt around, he placed his hand on my shoulder. Since nighttime visitors were generally untrustworthy, I jumped up the moment he touched me; the Moor, in his rush to escape, tripped over my boy and fell face-first onto the wild hog, which retaliated by biting his arm. The man's screams startled the people in the king's tent, who quickly assumed I had escaped, and several of them got on their horses to chase after me. I noticed that Ali wasn’t sleeping in his own tent but rode up on a white horse from a smaller tent quite a distance away; in fact, the cruel and tyrannical nature of this man made him so paranoid about everyone around him that even his own slaves and servants didn’t know where he slept. After the Moors explained the reason for the commotion to him, they all left, and I was allowed to sleep peacefully until morning.
March 13.—With the returning day commenced the same round of insult and irritation—the boys assembled to beat the hog, and the men and women to plague the Christian. It is impossible for me to describe the behaviour of a people who study mischief as a science, and exult in the miseries and misfortunes of their fellow-creatures.
March 13.—With the new day came the same cycle of insult and annoyance—the boys gathered to beat the pig, while the men and women continued to torment the Christian. It's impossible for me to explain the behavior of a group that treats mischief like a science and takes pleasure in the suffering and hardships of others.
CHAPTER X.
A Moorish wedding.
The Moors, though very indolent themselves, are rigid task-masters, and keep every person under them in full employment. My boy Demba was sent to the woods to collect withered grass for Ali’s horses; and after a variety of projects concerning myself, they at last found out an employment for me: this was no other than the respectable office of barber. I was to make my first exhibition in this capacity in the royal presence, and to be honoured with the task of shaving the head of the young prince of Ludamar. I accordingly seated myself upon the sand, and the boy, with some hesitation, sat down beside me. A small razor, about three inches long, was put into my hand, and I was ordered to proceed; but whether from my own want of skill, or the improper shape of the instrument, I unfortunately made a slight incision in the boy’s head at the very commencement of the operation; and the king, observing the awkward manner in which I held the razor, concluded that his son’s head was in very improper hands, and ordered me to resign the razor and walk out of the tent. This I considered as a very fortunate circumstance; for I had laid it down as a rule to make myself as useless and insignificant as possible, as the only means of recovering my liberty.
The Moors, although quite lazy themselves, are strict taskmasters, ensuring everyone under them is always busy. My boy Demba was sent to the woods to gather dried grass for Ali’s horses, and after considering several options for me, they finally decided I should take on the respectable job of barber. My first task was to perform this job in front of the royal family, shaving the head of the young prince of Ludamar. So, I sat down on the sand, and the boy hesitantly took a seat next to me. I was given a small razor, about three inches long, and told to get started; however, whether due to my lack of skill or the awkward shape of the tool, I accidentally made a small cut on the boy’s head right at the beginning. The king, noticing the clumsy way I held the razor, decided that his son’s head was not in safe hands and told me to hand over the razor and leave the tent. I saw this as a stroke of luck, as I had made it my goal to appear as useless and insignificant as possible to regain my freedom.
March 18.—Four Moors arrived from Jarra with Johnson my interpreter, having seized him before he had received any intimation of my confinement, and bringing with them a bundle of clothes that I had left at Daman Jumma’s house, for my use in case I should return by the way of Jarra. Johnson was led into Ali’s tent and examined; the bundle was opened, and I was sent for to explain the use of the different articles. I was happy, however, to find that Johnson had committed my papers to the charge of one of Daman’s wives. When I had satisfied Ali’s curiosity respecting the different articles of apparel the bundle was again tied up, and put into a large cow-skin bag that stood in a corner of the tent. The same evening Ali sent three of his people to inform me that there were many thieves in the neighbourhood, and that to prevent the rest of my things from being stolen it was necessary to convey them all into his tent. My clothes, instruments, and everything that belonged to me, were accordingly carried away; and though the heat and dust made clean linen very necessary and refreshing, I could not procure a single shirt out of the small stock I had brought along with me. Ali was, however, disappointed by not finding among my effects the quantity of gold and amber that he expected; but to make sure of everything he sent the same people, on the morning following, to examine whether I had anything concealed about my person. They, with their usual rudeness, searched every part of my apparel, and stripped me of all my gold, amber, my watch, and one of my pocket-compasses; I had, fortunately, in the night, buried the other compass in the sand—and this, with the clothes I had on, was all that the tyranny of Ali had now left me.
March 18.—Four Moors came from Jarra with Johnson, my interpreter, having captured him before he knew anything about my confinement, and bringing a bundle of clothes I had left at Daman Jumma’s house for my potential return through Jarra. Johnson was brought into Ali’s tent and interrogated; the bundle was opened, and I was called in to explain the various items. I was relieved to discover that Johnson had entrusted my papers to one of Daman’s wives. Once I had satisfied Ali’s curiosity about the clothing, the bundle was tied up again and placed into a large cowhide bag in the corner of the tent. That evening, Ali sent three of his people to tell me that there were many thieves in the area, and to prevent the rest of my belongings from being stolen, it was necessary to move everything into his tent. My clothes, instruments, and all my possessions were thus taken away, and although the heat and dust made clean linen essential and refreshing, I couldn't get even a single shirt from the limited supply I had brought. Ali was disappointed not to find the amount of gold and amber he had anticipated among my things, but to be sure he sent the same men the following morning to check if I had anything hidden on me. They rudely searched every part of my clothing and took all my gold, amber, my watch, and one of my pocket compasses; fortunately, I had buried the other compass in the sand the night before—and this, along with the clothes I was wearing, was all that Ali's tyranny had left me.
The gold and amber were highly gratifying to Moorish avarice, but the pocket-compass soon became an object of superstitious curiosity. Ali was very desirous to be informed why that small piece of iron, the needle, always pointed to the Great Desert; and I found myself somewhat puzzled to answer the question. To have pleaded my ignorance would have created a suspicion that I wished to conceal the real truth from him; I therefore told him that my mother resided far beyond the sands of Sahara, and that whilst she was alive the piece of iron would always point that way, and serve as a guide to conduct me to her, and that if she was dead it would point to her grave. Ali now looked at the compass with redoubled amazement; turned it round and round repeatedly; but observing that it always pointed the same way, he took it up with great caution and returned it to me, manifesting that he thought there was something of magic in it, and that he was afraid of keeping so dangerous an instrument in his possession.
The gold and amber fascinated the greedy Moorish, but the pocket compass quickly became an object of superstitious interest. Ali was eager to know why that small piece of iron, the needle, always pointed toward the Great Desert. I found myself a bit confused about how to answer him. Admitting my ignorance would make him suspicious that I was trying to hide the truth, so I told him that my mother lived far beyond the sands of the Sahara, and that as long as she was alive, the piece of iron would always point in her direction, guiding me to her; if she were dead, it would point to her grave. Ali then looked at the compass with even greater amazement, turning it around repeatedly. But noticing that it always pointed the same way, he carefully picked it up and handed it back to me, showing that he believed there was something magical about it and that he was afraid to possess such a dangerous tool.
March 20.—This morning a council of chief men was held in Ali’s tent respecting me. Their decisions, though they were all unfavourable to me, were differently related by different persons. Some said that they intended to put me to death; others that I was only to lose my right hand; but the most probable account was that which I received from Ali’s own son, a boy about nine years of age, who came to me in the evening, and, with much concern, informed me that his uncle had persuaded his father to put out my eyes, which they said resembled those of a cat, and that all the bushreens had approved of this measure. His father, however, he said, would not put the sentence into execution until Fatima, the queen, who was at present in the north, had seen me.
March 20.—This morning, a meeting of the chief men took place in Ali’s tent about me. Their decisions, while all unfavorable, were reported differently by various people. Some said they planned to execute me; others claimed I would only lose my right hand. However, the most credible information came from Ali’s own son, a boy of about nine, who came to me in the evening and, looking worried, told me that his uncle had convinced his father to blind me because they said my eyes looked like a cat’s, and that all the bushreens had supported this idea. His father, though, said he wouldn’t carry out the sentence until Fatima, the queen, who was currently in the north, had seen me.
March 21.—Anxious to know my destiny, I went to the king early in the morning; and as a number of bushreens were assembled, I thought this a favourable opportunity of discovering their intentions. I therefore began by begging his permission to return to Jarra, which was flatly refused. His wife, he said, had not yet seen me, and I must stay until she came to Benowm, after which I should be at liberty to depart; and that my horse, which had been taken away from me the day after I arrived, should be again restored to me. Unsatisfactory as this answer was, I was forced to appear pleased; and as there was little hope of making my escape at this season of the year, on account of the excessive heat, and the total want of water in the woods, I resolved to wait patiently until the rains had set in, or until some more favourable opportunity should present itself. But “hope deferred maketh the heart sick.” This tedious procrastination from day to day, and the thoughts of travelling through the negro kingdoms in the rainy season, which was now fast approaching, made me very melancholy; and having passed a restless night, I found myself attacked in the morning by a smart fever. I had wrapped myself close up in my cloak with a view to induce perspiration, and was asleep, when a party of Moors entered the hut, and with their usual rudeness pulled the cloak from me. I made signs to them that I was sick, and wished much to sleep, but I solicited in vain; my distress was matter of sport to them, and they endeavoured to heighten it by every means in their power. In this perplexity I left my hut, and walked to some shady trees at a little distance from the camp, where I lay down. But even here persecution followed me, and solitude was thought too great an indulgence for a distressed Christian. Ali’s son, with a number of horsemen, came galloping to the place, and ordered me to rise and follow them. I begged they would allow me to remain where I was, if it was only for a few hours; but they paid little attention to what I said, and, after a few threatening words, one of them pulled out a pistol from a leather bag that was fastened to the pommel of his saddle, and presenting it towards me, snapped it twice. He did this with so much indifference, that I really doubted whether the pistol was loaded. He cocked it a third time, and was striking the flint with a piece of steel, when I begged them to desist, and returned with them to the camp. When we entered Ali’s tent we found him much out of humour. He called for the Moor’s pistol, and amused himself for some time with opening and shutting the pan; at length taking up his powder-horn, he fresh primed it, and, turning round to me with a menacing look, said something in Arabic which I did not understand. I desired my boy, who was sitting before the tent, to inquire what offence I had committed; when I was informed, that having gone out of the camp without Ali’s permission, they suspected that I had some design of making my escape; and that, in future, if I was seen without the skirts of the camp, orders had been given that I should be shot by the first person that observed me.
March 21.—Eager to learn my fate, I approached the king early in the morning; and noticing a number of bushreens gathered, I thought it was a good chance to figure out their plans. I started by asking for his permission to go back to Jarra, which was flatly denied. He said his wife hadn't met me yet, and I had to stay until she arrived in Benowm, after which I would be free to leave, and my horse, which had been taken from me the day after I got there, would be returned. Although this answer was unsatisfactory, I had to act pleased; and since there was little hope of escaping this time of year due to the intense heat and the complete lack of water in the woods, I decided to wait patiently until the rains began or until a better opportunity came up. But "hope delayed makes the heart sick." This endless delay from day to day, coupled with the thought of traveling through the African kingdoms during the rainy season that was soon approaching, made me very gloomy; and after a restless night, I woke up in the morning with a bad fever. I had wrapped myself tightly in my cloak to try to sweat it out and had dozed off when a group of Moors entered the hut and, with their usual rudeness, yanked the cloak off me. I signaled to them that I was sick and wanted to sleep, but my pleas were ignored; my suffering was a source of amusement for them, and they tried to make it worse in every way they could. In this dilemma, I left my hut and walked to some shady trees a little way from the camp, where I lay down. But even here, I couldn't escape harassment, and solitude was too great a luxury for a distressed Christian. Ali’s son, along with several horsemen, rode up to the spot and ordered me to get up and follow them. I begged them to let me stay where I was, even if just for a few hours; but they paid little attention and, after muttering some threats, one of them drew a pistol from a bag attached to his saddle and aimed it at me, snapping it twice. He did it so casually that I truly wondered if the pistol was even loaded. He cocked it again and was about to strike the flint with a piece of steel when I asked them to stop and agreed to go back with them to the camp. When we entered Ali’s tent, he was in a bad mood. He asked for the Moor's pistol and entertained himself for a while by opening and closing the pan; eventually, he picked up his powder-horn, reloaded it, and turned to me with a threatening expression, saying something in Arabic that I didn’t understand. I asked my boy, who was sitting in front of the tent, to find out what I had done wrong; I learned that by leaving the camp without Ali’s permission, they suspected I might be planning to escape. They warned that if I was seen outside the camp boundaries again, orders had been given to shoot me on sight.
In the afternoon the horizon to the eastward was thick and hazy, and the Moors prognosticated a sand wind, which accordingly commenced on the morning following, and lasted, with slight intermissions, for two days. The force of the wind was not in itself very great; it was what a seaman would have denominated a stiff breeze; but the quantity of sand and dust carried before it was such as to darken the whole atmosphere.
In the afternoon, the horizon to the east was thick and hazy, and the Moors predicted a sandstorm, which started the next morning and lasted for two days with brief breaks. The wind itself wasn't very strong; a sailor would call it a stiff breeze; however, the amount of sand and dust it carried darkened the entire atmosphere.
About this time all the women of the camp had their feet and the ends of their fingers stained of a dark saffron colour. I could never ascertain whether this was done from motives of religion, or by way of ornament.
About this time, all the women in the camp had their feet and the tips of their fingers stained a dark saffron color. I could never figure out whether this was done for religious reasons or as decoration.
March 28.—This morning a large herd of cattle arrived from the eastward, and one of the drivers, to whom Ali had lent my horse, came into my hut with the leg of an antelope as a present, and told me that my horse was standing before Ali’s tent. In a little time Ali sent one of his slaves to inform me that in the afternoon I must be in readiness to ride out with him, as he intended to show me to some of his women.
March 28.—This morning a big herd of cattle arrived from the east, and one of the drivers, to whom Ali had lent my horse, came into my hut with an antelope leg as a gift. He told me that my horse was waiting in front of Ali’s tent. After a while, Ali sent one of his slaves to let me know that I needed to be ready in the afternoon to ride out with him, as he planned to introduce me to some of his women.
About four o’clock, Ali, with six of his courtiers, came riding to my hut, and told me to follow them. I readily complied. But here a new difficulty occurred. The Moors, accustomed to a loose and easy dress, could not reconcile themselves to the appearance of my nankeen breeches, which they said were not only inelegant, but, on account of their tightness, very indecent; and as this was a visit to ladies, Ali ordered my boy to bring out the loose cloak which I had always worn since my arrival at Benowm, and told me to wrap it close round me. We visited the tents of four different ladies, at every one of which I was presented with a bowl of milk and water. All these ladies were remarkably corpulent, which is considered here as the highest mark of beauty. They were very inquisitive, and examined my hair and skin with great attention, but affected to consider me as a sort of inferior being to themselves, and would knit their brows, and seem to shudder when they looked at the whiteness of my skin.
About four o’clock, Ali, along with six of his courtiers, rode up to my hut and asked me to follow them. I gladly agreed. But then a new problem came up. The Moors, used to loose and comfortable clothing, couldn’t accept how my nankeen breeches looked; they said they were not only unattractive but also very inappropriate because they were too tight. Since this was a visit to ladies, Ali instructed my boy to bring out the loose cloak I had always worn since arriving in Benowm and told me to wrap it tightly around me. We visited four different ladies' tents, and at each one, I was offered a bowl of milk and water. All these ladies were quite overweight, which is regarded here as the ultimate sign of beauty. They were very curious and closely examined my hair and skin, but pretended to see me as an inferior being, frowning and seeming to shudder at the sight of my pale skin.
The Moors are certainly very good horsemen. They ride without fear—their saddles being high before and behind, afford them a very secure seat; and if they chance to fall, the whole country is so soft and sandy that they are very seldom hurt. Their greatest pride, and one of their principal amusements, is to put the horse to its full speed, and then stop him with a sudden jerk, so as frequently to bring him down upon his haunches. Ali always rode upon a milk-white horse, with its tail dyed red. He never walked, unless when he went to say his prayers; and even in the night two or three horses were always kept ready saddled at a little distance from his own tent. The Moors set a very high value upon their horses; for it is by their superior fleetness that they are enabled to make so many predatory excursions into the negro countries. They feed them three or four times a day, and generally give them a large quantity of sweet milk in the evening, which the horses appear to relish very much.
The Moors are definitely excellent horse riders. They ride without fear—their saddles, which are high in front and back, give them a very secure seat; and if they happen to fall, the whole area is so soft and sandy that they rarely get hurt. Their biggest pride, and one of their main pastimes, is to make the horse go at full speed and then suddenly stop it, often causing the horse to land on its haunches. Ali always rode a milk-white horse with its tail dyed red. He never walked unless he went to pray; even at night, two or three horses were always kept saddled a short distance from his tent. The Moors place a great deal of importance on their horses; their superior speed allows them to carry out many raids into the black territories. They feed them three or four times a day and generally give them a lot of sweet milk in the evening, which the horses seem to really enjoy.
April 3.—This forenoon, a child, which had been some time sickly, died in the next tent; and the mother and relations immediately began the death-howl. They were joined by a number of female visitors, who came on purpose to assist at this melancholy concert. I had no opportunity of seeing the burial, which is generally performed secretly, in the dusk of the evening, and frequently at only a few yards’ distance from the tent. Over the grave they plant one particular shrub, and no stranger is allowed to pluck a leaf, or even to touch it—so great a veneration have they for the dead.
April 3.—This morning, a child who had been sick for a while died in the next tent; the mother and relatives immediately started the mourning wail. They were joined by several female visitors who came specifically to participate in this sad gathering. I didn't get a chance to see the burial, which is usually done privately, in the evening twilight, often just a few yards away from the tent. They plant a specific shrub over the grave, and no outsider is allowed to pick a leaf or even touch it—such is their deep respect for the deceased.
April 7.—About four o’clock in the afternoon a whirlwind passed through the camp with such violence that it overturned three tents, and blew down one side of my hut. These whirlwinds come from the Great Desert, and at this season of the year are so common that I have seen five or six of them at one time. They carry up quantities of sand to an amazing height, which resemble, at a distance, so many moving pillars of smoke.
April 7.—Around four in the afternoon, a whirlwind swept through the camp with such force that it knocked over three tents and blew down one side of my hut. These whirlwinds come from the Great Desert, and at this time of year, they are so frequent that I've seen five or six of them all at once. They lift massive amounts of sand to incredible heights, which from a distance look like pillars of smoke in motion.
The scorching heat of the sun, upon a dry and sandy country, makes the air insufferably hot. Ali having robbed me of my thermometer, I had no means of forming a comparative judgment; but in the middle of the day, when the beams of the vertical sun are seconded by the scorching wind from the desert, the ground is frequently heated to such a degree as not to be borne by the naked foot. Even the negro slaves will not run from one tent to another without their sandals. At this time of the day the Moors lie stretched at length in their tents, either asleep, or unwilling to move; and I have often felt the wind so hot, that I could not hold my hand in the current of air which came through the crevices of my hut without feeling sensible pain.
The blazing heat of the sun in a dry, sandy land makes the air unbearably hot. Since Ali took my thermometer, I couldn't compare temperatures; however, during midday, when the sun is directly overhead and the scorching wind from the desert stirs, the ground often gets so hot that it's painful to walk on barefoot. Even the slave workers won’t run between tents without their sandals. At this time of day, the Moors lie flat in their tents, either asleep or too lazy to move; I have often experienced the wind so hot that I couldn't keep my hand in the breeze coming through the cracks in my hut without feeling real pain.
April 8.—This day the wind blew from the south-west; and in the night there was a heavy shower of rain, accompanied with thunder and lightning.
April 8.—Today, the wind was blowing from the southwest; during the night, there was a heavy rain shower, with thunder and lightning.
April 10.—In the evening the tabala, or large drum, was beat to announce a wedding, which was held at one of the neighbouring tents. A great number of people of both sexes assembled, but without that mirth and hilarity which take place at a negro wedding. Here was neither singing nor dancing, nor any other amusement that I could perceive. A woman was beating the drum, and the other women joining at times like a chorus, by setting up a shrill scream, and at the same time moving their tongues from one side of the mouth to the other with great celerity. I was soon tired, and had returned into my hut, where I was sitting almost asleep, when an old woman entered with a wooden bowl in her hand, and signified that she had brought me a present from the bride. Before I could recover from the surprise which this message created, the woman discharged the contents of the bowl full in my face. Finding that it was the same sort of holy water with which, among the Hottentots, a priest is said to sprinkle a newly-married couple, I began to suspect that the old lady was actuated by mischief or malice; but she gave me seriously to understand that it was a nuptial benediction from the bride’s own person, and which, on such occasions, is always received by the young unmarried Moors as a mark of distinguished favour. This being the case, I wiped my face, and sent my acknowledgments to the lady. The wedding drum continued to beat, and the women to sing, or rather whistle, all night. About nine in the morning the bride was brought in state from her mother’s tent, attended by a number of women who carried her tent (a present from the husband), some bearing up the poles, others holding by the strings; and in this manner they marched, whistling as formerly, until they came to the place appointed for her residence, where they pitched the tent. The husband followed, with a number of men, leading four bullocks, which they tied to the tent strings; and having killed another, and distributed the beef among the people, the ceremony was concluded.
April 10.—In the evening, the tabala, or large drum, was beaten to announce a wedding taking place at one of the nearby tents. Many people, both men and women, gathered, but there was none of the joy and excitement typical of a Black wedding. There was no singing, dancing, or any other entertainment that I could see. A woman was beating the drum, and the other women occasionally joined in by letting out a high-pitched scream while rapidly moving their tongues from one side of their mouths to the other. I quickly got bored and went back to my hut, where I was nearly dozing off when an old woman came in with a wooden bowl and indicated that she had brought me a gift from the bride. Before I could process the surprise of this message, the woman splashed the contents of the bowl right in my face. Realizing it was the same kind of holy water that a priest among the Hottentots is said to sprinkle on a newly married couple, I started to think that the old lady meant to be mischievous or unkind; but she assured me it was a wedding blessing from the bride herself, which young unmarried Moors always receive as a sign of special favor. With that in mind, I wiped my face and thanked the lady. The wedding drum kept beating, and the women continued to sing, or more accurately, whistle, all night. Around nine in the morning, the bride was ceremonially brought from her mother’s tent, accompanied by several women carrying her tent (a gift from the husband), with some lifting the poles and others holding the strings; they marched like that, whistling as they had before, until they reached the spot designated for her new home, where they set up the tent. The husband followed with a group of men, leading four bullocks, which they tied to the tent strings; then, after killing another bullock and distributing the meat among the people, the ceremony was complete.
CHAPTER XI.
SORROWS IN CAPTIVITY.
One whole month had now elapsed since I was led into captivity, during which time each returning day brought me fresh distresses. I watched the lingering course of the sun with anxiety, and blessed his evening beams as they shed a yellow lustre along the sandy floor of my hut; for it was then that my oppressors left me, and allowed me to pass the sultry night in solitude and reflection.
One entire month had now passed since I was taken captive, and every day that returned brought me new hardships. I anxiously watched the slow movement of the sun, grateful for its evening rays as they cast a warm glow on the sandy floor of my hut; it was during that time that my captors would leave me alone, allowing me to spend the hot night in solitude and reflection.
About midnight a bowl of kouskous, with some salt and water, were brought for me and my two attendants. This was our common fare, and it was all that was allowed us to allay the cravings of hunger and support nature for the whole of the following day; for it is to be observed that this was the Mohammedan Lent, and as the Moors keep the fast with a religious strictness, they thought it proper to compel me, though a Christian, to similar observance. Time, however, somewhat reconciled me to my situation. I found that I could bear hunger and thirst better than I expected; and at length I endeavoured to beguile the tedious hours by learning to write Arabic.
About midnight, a bowl of couscous, along with some salt and water, was brought for me and my two attendants. This was our usual meal, and it was all we were allowed to satisfy our hunger and sustain ourselves for the entire following day; it should be noted that this was during the Muslim fast, and since the Moors observe the fast with strict religious adherence, they thought it was appropriate to force me, as a Christian, to follow the same rules. However, as time went on, I became more accustomed to my situation. I discovered that I could handle hunger and thirst better than I had anticipated, and eventually, I tried to pass the long hours by learning to write in Arabic.
April 14.—As Queen Fatima had not yet arrived, Ali proposed to go to the north and bring her back with him; but as the place was two days’ journey from Benowm it was necessary to have some refreshment on the road; and Ali, suspicious of those about him, was so afraid of being poisoned, that he never ate anything but what was dressed under his own immediate inspection. A fine bullock was therefore killed, and the flesh being cut up into thin slices, was dried in the sun; and this, with two bags of dry kouskous, formed his travelling provisions.
April 14.—Since Queen Fatima had not arrived yet, Ali suggested heading north to bring her back. However, the journey was two days from Benowm, so he needed to have some food for the trip. Ali, suspicious of those around him, was so worried about being poisoned that he only ate food that he prepared himself. A strong bull was killed, and its meat was sliced thin and dried in the sun. Along with two bags of dry couscous, this made up his travel provisions.
Previous to his departure, the black people of the town of Benowm came, according to their annual custom, to show their arms, and bring their stipulated tribute of corn and cloth. They were but badly armed—twenty-two with muskets, forty or fifty with bows and arrows, and nearly the same number of men and boys with spears only. They arranged themselves before the tent, where they waited until their arms were examined, and some little disputes settled.
Prior to his departure, the Black people of the town of Benowm came, following their annual tradition, to display their weapons and bring their required tribute of corn and cloth. They were poorly armed—twenty-two with muskets, forty or fifty with bows and arrows, and nearly the same number of men and boys armed only with spears. They lined up in front of the tent, where they waited for their weapons to be inspected and some minor disputes to be resolved.
About midnight on the 16th, Ali departed quietly from Benowm, accompanied by a few attendants. He was expected to return in the course of nine or ten days.
About midnight on the 16th, Ali quietly left Benowm, accompanied by a few attendants. He was expected to be back in about nine or ten days.
April 18.—Two days after the departure of Ali a shereef arrived with salt and some other articles from Walet, the capital of the kingdom of Biroo. As there was no tent appropriated for him, he took up his abode in the same hut with me. He seemed to be a well-informed man, and his acquaintance both with the Arabic and Bambarra tongues enabled him to travel with ease and safety through a number of kingdoms; for though his place of residence was Walet, he had visited Houssa, and had lived some years at Timbuctoo. Upon my inquiring so particularly about the distance from Walet to Timbuctoo, he asked me if I intended to travel that way; and being answered in the affirmative, he shook his head, and said it would not do; for that Christians were looked upon there as the devil’s children, and enemies to the Prophet. From him I learned the following particulars:—That Houssa was the largest town he had ever seen: that Walet was larger than Timbuctoo, but being remote from the Niger, and its trade consisting chiefly of salt, it was not so much resorted to by strangers: that between Benowm and Walet was ten days’ journey; but the road did not lead through any remarkable towns, and travellers supported themselves by purchasing milk from the Arabs, who keep their herds by the watering-places: two of the days’ journeys was over a sandy country, without water. From Walet to Timbuctoo was eleven days more; but water was more plentiful, and the journey was usually performed upon bullocks. He said there were many Jews at Timbuctoo, but they all spoke Arabic, and used the same prayers as the Moors. He frequently pointed his hand to the south-east quarter, or rather the east by south, observing that Timbuctoo was situated in that direction; and though I made him repeat this information again and again, I never found him to vary more than half a point, which was to the southward.
April 18.—Two days after Ali left, a shereef showed up with salt and some other items from Walet, the capital of the kingdom of Biroo. Since there wasn’t a tent available for him, he stayed in the same hut as me. He seemed to be a knowledgeable guy, and his understanding of both Arabic and Bambarra allowed him to travel comfortably and safely through many kingdoms; even though he lived in Walet, he had been to Houssa and spent several years in Timbuctoo. When I asked specifically about the distance from Walet to Timbuctoo, he asked if I planned to travel that way. When I confirmed that I did, he shook his head and said it wouldn't be a good idea because Christians were seen there as the devil’s children and enemies of the Prophet. From him, I learned a few key details: Houssa was the largest town he had ever seen; Walet was bigger than Timbuctoo, but since it was far from the Niger and mainly traded in salt, it didn’t attract many outsiders; the journey from Benowm to Walet took ten days, though the route didn’t go through any notable towns, and travelers relied on buying milk from the Arabs who grazed their herds near watering places; two of those days were spent crossing a sandy area without water. The trip from Walet to Timbuctoo took another eleven days, but water was more available, and people usually traveled on bullocks. He mentioned that there were many Jews in Timbuctoo, but they all spoke Arabic and prayed like the Moors. He often pointed in the southeast direction, or more like east-southeast, saying Timbuctoo was that way; even when I asked him to repeat it multiple times, he never varied more than half a point, which leaned slightly southward.
April 24.—This morning Shereef Sidi Mahomed Moora Abdalla, a native of Morocco, arrived with five bullocks loaded with salt. He had formerly resided some months at Gibraltar, where he had picked up as much English as enabled him to make himself understood. He informed me that he had been five months in coming from Santa Cruz; but that great part of the time had been spent in trading. When I requested him to enumerate the days employed in travelling from Morocco to Benowm, he gave them as follows: To Swera, three days; to Agadier, three; to Jinikin, ten; to Wadenoon, four; to Lakeneig, five; to Zeeriwin-zerimani, five; to Tisheet, ten; to Benowm, ten—in all, fifty days: but travellers usually rest a long while at Jinikin and Tisheet—at the latter of which places they dig the rock salt, which is so great an article of commerce with the negroes.
April 24.—This morning, Shereef Sidi Mahomed Moora Abdalla, a native of Morocco, arrived with five bullocks loaded with salt. He had previously lived for several months in Gibraltar, where he learned enough English to get by. He told me it took him five months to travel from Santa Cruz, but most of that time was spent trading. When I asked him to list the days spent traveling from Morocco to Benowm, he said: To Swera, three days; to Agadier, three; to Jinikin, ten; to Wadenoon, four; to Lakeneig, five; to Zeeriwin-zerimani, five; to Tisheet, ten; to Benowm, ten—in total, fifty days. However, travelers usually rest for a while at Jinikin and Tisheet—at the latter, they extract the rock salt, which is a major trade item with the locals.
In conversing with these shereefs, and the different strangers that resorted to the camp, I passed my time with rather less uneasiness than formerly. On the other hand, as the dressing of my victuals was now left entirely to the care of Ali’s slaves, over whom I had not the smallest control, I found myself but ill supplied, worse even than in the fast month: for two successive nights they neglected to send us our accustomed meal; and though my boy went to a small negro town near the camp, and begged with great diligence from hut to hut, he could only procure a few handfuls of ground nuts, which he readily shared with me.
While talking with these shereefs and the various strangers who visited the camp, I felt somewhat less anxious than before. However, since Ali’s slaves were now fully responsible for preparing my meals, and I had no control over them, I found myself poorly fed, even worse than during the previous month. For two nights in a row, they forgot to send us our usual meal. My boy went to a nearby small town and begged diligently from house to house, but he could only bring back a few handfuls of groundnuts, which he generously shared with me.
We had been for some days in daily expectation of Ali’s return from Saheel (or the north country) with his wife Fatima. In the meanwhile, Mansong, king of Bambarra, as I have related in Chapter VIII., had sent to Ali for a party of horse to assist in storming Gedingooma. With this demand Ali had not only refused to comply, but had treated the messengers with great haughtiness and contempt; upon which Mansong gave up all thoughts of taking the town, and prepared to chastise Ali for his contumacy.
We had been waiting for several days for Ali to return from Saheel (or the northern region) with his wife Fatima. In the meantime, Mansong, the king of Bambarra, as I mentioned in Chapter VIII., had sent for Ali to provide a group of horsemen to help in attacking Gedingooma. Ali not only refused this request but also treated the messengers with a lot of arrogance and disrespect. As a result, Mansong abandoned all plans to capture the town and got ready to punish Ali for his defiance.
Things were in this situation when, on the 29th of April, a messenger arrived at Benowm with the disagreeable intelligence that the Bambarra army was approaching the frontiers of Ludamar. This threw the whole country into confusion, and in the afternoon Ali’s son, with about twenty horsemen, arrived at Benowm. He ordered all the cattle to be driven away immediately, all the tents to be struck, and the people to hold themselves in readiness to depart at daylight the next morning.
Things were like this when, on April 29th, a messenger arrived in Benowm with the unpleasant news that the Bambarra army was getting close to the borders of Ludamar. This caused complete chaos across the country, and in the afternoon, Ali's son showed up in Benowm with around twenty horsemen. He ordered all the cattle to be moved right away, all the tents to be taken down, and everyone to be prepared to leave at dawn the following morning.
April 30.—At daybreak the whole camp was in motion. The baggage was carried upon bullocks—the two tent poles being placed one on each side, and the different wooden articles of the tent distributed in like manner; the tent cloth was thrown over all, and upon this was commonly placed one or two women; for the Moorish women are very bad walkers. The king’s favourite concubines rode upon camels, with a saddle of a particular construction, and a canopy to shelter them from the sun. We proceeded to the northward until noon, when the king’s son ordered the whole company, except two tents, to enter a thick low wood which was upon our right. I was sent along with the two tents, and arrived in the evening at a negro town called Farani: here we pitched the tents in an open place at no great distance from the town.
April 30.—At dawn, the entire camp was in motion. The baggage was loaded onto oxen, with the two tent poles placed on each side, and the various wooden components of the tent arranged similarly; the tent fabric was draped over everything, and often one or two women were seated on top, since Moorish women don’t walk very well. The king’s favorite concubines rode on camels, equipped with specially designed saddles and canopies to protect them from the sun. We headed north until noon, when the king’s son directed everyone except for two tents to enter a dense, low forest on our right. I was assigned to stay with the two tents, and we arrived in the evening at a town inhabited by Black people called Farani; there, we set up the tents in a clearing not far from the town.
May 1.—As I had some reason to suspect that this day was also to be considered as a fast, I went in the morning to the negro town of Farani, and begged some provisions from the dooty, who readily supplied my wants, and desired me to come to his house every day during my stay in the neighbourhood.—These hospitable people are looked upon by the Moors as an abject race of slaves, and are treated accordingly.
May 1.—Since I had a feeling this day was meant to be a fast, I went in the morning to the Black town of Farani and asked the dooty for some food. He was quick to help me out and invited me to his house every day while I was in the area. These welcoming people are seen by the Moors as a lowly group of slaves and are treated that way.
May 3.—We departed from the vicinity of Farani, and after a circuitous route through the woods, arrived at Ali’s camp in the afternoon. This encampment was larger than that of Benowm, and was situated in the middle of a thick wood, about two miles distant from a negro town called Bubaker. I immediately waited upon Ali, in order to pay my respects to Queen Fatima, who had come with him from Saheel. He seemed much pleased with my coming, shook hands with me, and informed his wife that I was the Christian. She was a woman of the Arab caste, with long black hair, and remarkably corpulent. She appeared at first rather shocked at the thought of having a Christian so near her; but when I had, by means of a negro boy who spoke the Mandingo and Arabic tongues, answered a great many questions which her curiosity suggested respecting the country of the Christians, she seemed more at ease, and presented me with a bowl of milk, which I considered as a very favourable omen.
May 3.—We left the area around Farani and took a winding path through the woods, arriving at Ali’s camp in the afternoon. This camp was bigger than Benowm’s and was located in the middle of a dense forest, about two miles from a town called Bubaker. I immediately went to see Ali to pay my respects to Queen Fatima, who had come with him from Saheel. He seemed happy to see me, shook my hand, and told his wife that I was the Christian. She was an Arab woman with long black hair and quite overweight. At first, she seemed shocked at the idea of having a Christian so close to her, but when I answered many of her questions about the Christian lands through a young boy who spoke both Mandingo and Arabic, she relaxed and offered me a bowl of milk, which I took as a very good sign.
The heat was now almost insufferable—all nature seemed sinking under it. The distant country presented to the eye a dreary expanse of sand, with a few stunted trees and prickly bushes, in the shade of which the hungry cattle licked up the withered grass, while the camels and goats picked off the scanty foliage. The scarcity of water was greater here than at Benowm. Day and night the wells were crowded with cattle, lowing and fighting with each other to come at the troughs. Excessive thirst made many of them furious; others, being too weak to contend for the water, endeavoured to quench their thirst by devouring the black mud from the gutters near the wells, which they did with great avidity, though it was commonly fatal to them.
The heat was now almost unbearable—everything in nature seemed to be struggling under it. The distant landscape looked like a grim stretch of sand, dotted with a few scraggly trees and prickly bushes, where hungry cattle licked at the dry grass, while camels and goats nibbled on the meager leaves. The shortage of water was worse here than in Benowm. Day and night, the wells were packed with cattle, mooing and fighting each other to get to the troughs. Intense thirst drove many of them into a frenzy; others, too weak to fight for water, tried to satisfy their thirst by eating the black mud from the gutters near the wells, doing so eagerly, even though it often proved deadly for them.
One night, having solicited in vain for water at the camp, and been quite feverish, I resolved to try my fortune at the wells, which were about half a mile distant from the camp. Accordingly I set out about midnight, and being guided by the lowing of the cattle, soon arrived at the place, where I found the Moors very busy drawing water. I requested permission to drink, but was driven away with outrageous abuse. Passing, however, from one well to another, I came at last to one where there was only an old man and two boys. I made the same request to this man, and he immediately drew me up a bucket of water; but, as I was about to take hold of it, he recollected that I was a Christian, and fearing that his bucket might be polluted by my lips, he dashed the water into the trough, and told me to drink from thence. Though this trough was none of the largest, and three cows were already drinking from it, I resolved to come in for my share; and kneeling down thrust my head between two of the cows, and drank with great pleasure until the water was nearly exhausted, and the cows began to contend with each other for the last mouthful.
One night, after asking for water at the camp without success and feeling really feverish, I decided to try my luck at the wells about half a mile away. So, I set out around midnight, following the sounds of the cattle, and soon reached the spot where the Moors were busy drawing water. I asked if I could drink, but they drove me away with abusive words. As I moved from one well to another, I finally came across one where there was just an old man and two boys. I made the same request to him, and he quickly pulled up a bucket of water for me; but just as I was about to grab it, he remembered I was a Christian, and worried that my lips would pollute his bucket, he dumped the water into the trough and told me to drink from there instead. Although the trough wasn’t very big and three cows were already drinking from it, I decided to get my share; so I knelt down, pushed my head between two cows, and drank with great enjoyment until the water was almost gone and the cows started to fight over the last sip.
In adventures of this nature I passed the sultry month of May, during which no material change took place in my situation. Ali still considered me as a lawful prisoner; and Fatima, though she allowed me a larger quantity of victuals than I had been accustomed to receive at Benowm, had as yet said nothing on the subject of my release. In the meantime, the frequent changes of the wind, the gathering clouds, and distant lightning, with other appearances of approaching rain, indicated that the wet season was at hand, when the Moors annually evacuate the country of the negroes, and return to the skirts of the Great Desert. This made me consider that my fate was drawing towards a crisis, and I resolved to wait for the event without any seeming uneasiness; but circumstances occurred which produced a change in my favour more suddenly than I had foreseen, or had reason to expect. The case was this:—The fugitive Kaartans, who had taken refuge in Ludamar, as I have related in Chapter VIII., finding that the Moors were about to leave them, and dreading the resentment of their own sovereign, whom they had so basely deserted, offered to treat with Ali for two hundred Moorish horsemen, to co-operate with them in an effort to expel Daisy from Gedingooma; for until Daisy should be vanquished or humbled they considered that they could neither return to their native towns nor live in security in any of the neighbouring kingdoms. With a view to extort money from these people by means of this treaty, Ali despatched his son to Jarra, and prepared to follow him in the course of a few days. This was an opportunity of too great consequence to me to be neglected. I immediately applied to Fatima, who, I found, had the chief direction in all affairs of state, and begged her interest with Ali to give me permission to accompany him to Jarra. This request, after some hesitation, was favourably received. Fatima looked kindly on me, and, I believe, was at length moved with compassion towards me. My bundles were brought from the large cow-skin bag that stood in the corner of Ali’s tent, and I was ordered to explain the use of the different articles, and show the method of putting on the boots, stockings, &c.—with all which I cheerfully complied, and was told that in the course of a few days I should be at liberty to depart.
In adventures like this, I spent the hot month of May, during which my situation didn’t change much. Ali still saw me as a rightful prisoner, and Fatima, while she gave me more food than I was used to receiving at Benowm, hadn’t mentioned anything about my release yet. In the meantime, the shifting winds, the gathering clouds, and distant lightning, along with other signs of rain on the way, suggested that the rainy season was coming. This was when the Moors would leave the land of the blacks and head back to the edges of the Great Desert. This made me think that my fate was approaching a turning point, and I decided to wait for whatever would happen without showing any outward worry. However, circumstances changed in my favor more quickly than I expected. Here’s what happened: The fugitive Kaartans, who had sought refuge in Ludamar, as I mentioned in Chapter VIII, realizing the Moors planned to leave them and fearing the anger of their own king, whom they had abandoned, proposed to Ali to arrange for two hundred Moorish horsemen to help them try to remove Daisy from Gedingooma. They believed they couldn’t return to their hometowns or live safely in nearby kingdoms until Daisy was defeated or brought down. To take advantage of this situation and extract money from them through this treaty, Ali sent his son to Jarra and planned to follow in a few days. This was too significant an opportunity for me to miss. I immediately approached Fatima, who I found was in charge of all state matters, and asked her to talk to Ali about letting me join him to Jarra. After some hesitation, she agreed. Fatima looked at me kindly, and I think she finally felt some compassion toward me. My belongings were taken from the large cowhide bag in the corner of Ali’s tent, and I was asked to explain the use of various items and demonstrate how to put on the boots, stockings, etc.—to all of which I gladly complied, and I was told that in a few days I would be free to leave.
Believing, therefore, that I should certainly find the means of escaping from Jarra, if I should once get thither, I now freely indulged the pleasing hope that my captivity would soon terminate; and happily not having been disappointed in this idea, I shall pause in this place to collect and bring into one point of view such observations on the Moorish character and country as I had no fair opportunity of introducing into the preceding narrative.
Believing that I would definitely find a way to escape from Jarra once I got there, I happily entertained the hope that my captivity would soon end. Thankfully, I wasn't let down by this idea, so I’ll take a moment here to gather and share my observations on the Moorish character and country that I didn't have a chance to include in the earlier story.
CHAPTER XII.
OBSERVATIONS ON THE CHARACTER AND COUNTRY OF THE MOORS.
The Moors of this part of Africa are divided into many separate tribes, of which the most formidable, according to what was reported to me, are those of Trasart and Il Braken, which inhabit the northern bank of the Senegal river. The tribes of Gedumah, Jaffnoo, and Ludamar, though not so numerous as the former, are nevertheless very powerful and warlike, and are each governed by a chief, or king, who exercises absolute jurisdiction over his own horde, without acknowledging allegiance to a common sovereign. In time of peace the employment of the people is pasturage. The Moors, indeed, subsist chiefly on the flesh of their cattle, and are always in the extreme of either gluttony or abstinence. In consequence of the frequent and severe fasts which their religion enjoins, and the toilsome journeys which they sometimes undertake across the desert, they are enabled to bear both hunger and thirst with surprising fortitude; but whenever opportunities occur of satisfying their appetite they generally devour more at one meal than would serve a European for three. They pay but little attention to agriculture, purchasing their corn, cotton, cloth, and other necessaries from the negroes, in exchange for salt, which they dig from the pits in the Great Desert.
The Moors in this part of Africa are divided into many different tribes, with the most powerful ones being Trasart and Il Braken, located on the northern bank of the Senegal River. The Gedumah, Jaffnoo, and Ludamar tribes, while not as numerous, are also quite strong and warlike, each ruled by a chief or king who has complete authority over his own group and does not recognize any common ruler. During peacetime, the people primarily engage in herding. The Moors mainly rely on meat from their cattle for sustenance and often swing between extreme overeating and fasting. Due to the frequent and severe fasting required by their religion and the long journeys they sometimes embark on across the desert, they can endure hunger and thirst surprisingly well. However, whenever they get the chance to eat, they usually consume more in one sitting than what would be enough for a European for three meals. They pay little attention to farming and instead buy their grains, cotton, cloth, and other necessities from the Africans in exchange for salt, which they extract from the pits in the Great Desert.
The natural barrenness of the country is such that it furnishes but few materials for manufacture. The Moors, however, contrive to weave a strong cloth, with which they cover their tents; the thread is spun by their women from the hair of goats, and they prepare the hides of their cattle so as to furnish saddles, bridles, pouches, and other articles of leather. They are likewise sufficiently skilful to convert the native iron, which they procure from the negroes, into spears and knives, and also into pots for boiling their food; but their sabres, and other weapons, as well as their firearms and ammunition, they purchase from the Europeans, in exchange for the negro slaves which they obtain in their predatory excursions. Their chief commerce of this kind is with the French traders on the Senegal river.
The natural barrenness of the land means that it provides very few materials for manufacturing. However, the Moors manage to weave a strong fabric that they use to cover their tents; the thread is spun by their women from goat hair, and they treat their cattle hides to make saddles, bridles, pouches, and other leather goods. They are also skilled enough to transform local iron, which they obtain from the Black traders, into spears and knives, as well as into pots for cooking their food. However, they buy their sabers and other weapons, along with firearms and ammunition, from Europeans in exchange for the enslaved people they capture in their raids. Their main trade of this kind is with French traders along the Senegal River.
The Moors are rigid Mohammedans, and possess, with the bigotry and superstition, all the intolerance of their sect. They have no mosques at Benowm, but perform their devotions in a sort of open shed, or enclosure, made of mats. The priest is, at the same time, schoolmaster to the juniors. His pupils assemble every evening before his tent; where, by the light of a large fire, made of brushwood and cow’s dung, they are taught a few sentences from the Koran, and are initiated into the principles of their creed. Their alphabet differs but little from that in Richardson’s Arabic Grammar. They always write with the vowel points. Their priests even affect to know something of foreign literature. The priest of Benowm assured me that he could read the writings of the Christians: he showed me a number of barbarous characters, which he asserted were the Roman alphabet; and he produced another specimen, equally unintelligible, which he declared to be the Kallam il Indi, or Persian. His library consisted of nine volumes in quarto; most of them, I believe, were books of religion—for the name of Mohammed appeared in red letters in almost every page of each. His scholars wrote their lessons upon thin boards, paper being too expensive for general use. The boys were diligent enough, and appeared to possess a considerable share of emulation—carrying their boards slung over their shoulders when about their common employments. When a boy has committed to memory a few of their prayers, and can read and write certain parts of the Koran, he is reckoned sufficiently instructed; and with this slender stock of learning commences his career of life. Proud of his acquirements, he surveys with contempt the unlettered negro; and embraces every opportunity of displaying his superiority over such of his countrymen as are not distinguished by the same accomplishments.
The Moors are strict followers of Islam and, along with their bigotry and superstition, share all the intolerance typical of their faith. They don’t have mosques in Benowm but instead hold their prayers in an open structure made of mats. The priest also serves as the schoolmaster for the younger ones. His students gather every evening in front of his tent, where they learn a few sentences from the Koran by the light of a large fire made from brushwood and cow dung, and are introduced to the tenets of their faith. Their alphabet is quite similar to that in Richardson’s Arabic Grammar, and they always write with vowel points. The priests even claim to have some knowledge of foreign literature. The priest in Benowm told me that he could read Christian texts; he showed me a number of strange characters that he claimed were the Roman alphabet, along with another equally confusing sample that he said was the Kallam il Indi, or Persian. His library contained nine quarto volumes; I believe most of them were religious texts, as the name Mohammed appeared in red letters on almost every page. His students wrote their lessons on thin boards since paper was too expensive for regular use. The boys were quite diligent and seemed to harbor a significant amount of ambition, carrying their boards slung over their shoulders during their everyday tasks. When a boy memorizes a few of their prayers and can read and write certain parts of the Koran, he is considered sufficiently educated, and with this limited amount of knowledge, he begins his journey in life. Proud of what he has learned, he looks down on the uneducated individuals and takes every chance to show off his superiority over fellow countrymen who don’t share the same accomplishments.
The education of the girls is neglected altogether: mental accomplishments are but little attended to by the women; nor is the want of them considered by the men as a defect in the female character. They are regarded, I believe, as an inferior species of animals; and seem to be brought up for no other purpose than that of administering to the sensual pleasures of their imperious masters. Voluptuousness is therefore considered as their chief accomplishment, and slavish submission as their indispensable duty.
The education of girls is entirely overlooked: women pay very little attention to intellectual development, and men don’t see this lack as a flaw in female character. They are viewed, I believe, as an inferior species of beings, raised solely to serve the physical desires of their demanding masters. Therefore, being indulgent is seen as their main skill, and submissiveness is considered their essential responsibility.
The Moors have singular ideas of feminine perfection. The gracefulness of figure and motion, and a countenance enlivened by expression, are by no means essential points in their standard. With them corpulence and beauty appear to be terms nearly synonymous. A woman of even moderate pretensions must be one who cannot walk without a slave under each arm to support her; and a perfect beauty is a load for a camel. In consequence of this prevalent taste for unwieldiness of bulk, the Moorish ladies take great pains to acquire it early in life; and for this purpose many of the young girls are compelled by their mothers to devour a great quantity of kouskous, and drink a large bowl of camel’s milk every morning. It is of no importance whether the girl has an appetite or not; the kouskous and milk must be swallowed, and obedience is frequently enforced by blows. I have seen a poor girl sit crying, with the bowl at her lips, for more than an hour, and her mother, with a stick in her hand, watching her all the while, and using the stick without mercy whenever she observed that her daughter was not swallowing. This singular practice, instead of producing indigestion and disease, soon covers the young lady with that degree of plumpness which, in the eye of a Moor, is perfection itself.
The Moors have unique views on what feminine perfection looks like. Elegance in shape and movement, as well as a face brought to life by expression, are not crucial aspects of their standards. To them, being plump and beautiful seem to mean the same thing. A woman of even modest aspirations must be someone who can’t walk without a servant under each arm to support her; and a true beauty is so heavy she’s a burden for a camel. Because of this strong preference for a bulky appearance, Moorish ladies work hard to achieve it from a young age; many young girls are made by their mothers to eat a lot of couscous and drink a big bowl of camel’s milk every morning. It doesn’t matter if the girl is hungry or not; the couscous and milk must be consumed, and compliance is often enforced with punishment. I have seen a poor girl crying with the bowl at her lips for over an hour, while her mother, stick in hand, watched her closely, using the stick relentlessly whenever she noticed her daughter wasn’t swallowing. This unusual practice, instead of causing indigestion and illness, quickly makes the young lady chubby enough to be considered perfect in the eyes of a Moor.
As the Moors purchase all their clothing from the negroes, the women are forced to be very economical in the article of dress. In general they content themselves with a broad piece of cotton cloth, which is wrapped round the middle, and hangs down like a petticoat almost to the ground. To the upper part of this are sewed two square pieces, one before, and the other behind, which are fastened together over the shoulders. The head-dress is commonly a bandage of cotton cloth, with some parts of it broader than others, which serve to conceal the face when they walk in the sun. Frequently, however, when they go abroad, they veil themselves from head to foot.
As the Moors buy all their clothes from the Black community, the women have to be very careful about their clothing. Generally, they make do with a wide piece of cotton fabric that they wrap around their waist, hanging down like a long skirt. Two square pieces are stitched onto the top, one in front and one in back, and they are secured over the shoulders. For headwear, they typically use a cotton cloth band that varies in width, with some parts wider to cover their faces when walking in the sun. However, when they go out, they often cover themselves completely with a veil.
The employment of the women varies according to their degrees of opulence. Queen Fatima, and a few others of high rank, like the great ladies in some parts of Europe, pass their time chiefly in conversing with their visitors, performing their devotions, or admiring their charms in a looking-glass. The women of inferior class employ themselves in different domestic duties. They are very vain and talkative; and when anything puts them out of humour they commonly vent their anger upon their female slaves, over whom they rule with severe and despotic authority, which leads me to observe that the condition of these poor captives is deplorably wretched. At daybreak they are compelled to fetch water from the wells in large skins, called girbas; and as soon as they have brought water enough to serve the family for the day, as well as the horses (for the Moors seldom give their horses the trouble of going to the wells), they are then employed in pounding the corn and dressing the victuals. This being always done in the open air, the slaves are exposed to the combined heat of the sun, the sand, and the fire. In the intervals it is their business to sweep the tent, churn the milk, and perform other domestic offices. With all this they are badly fed, and oftentimes cruelly punished.
The work of women varies based on their wealth. Queen Fatima and a few others of high status, like the noblewomen in some parts of Europe, mostly spend their time chatting with visitors, practicing their religious rituals, or admiring their looks in a mirror. Women from lower classes handle different household tasks. They tend to be quite vain and talkative, and when something bothers them, they usually take their frustration out on their female slaves, whom they rule with a harsh and cruel authority. This leads me to mention that the condition of these unfortunate captives is extremely dire. At dawn, they are forced to fetch water from the wells in large skins called girbas; once they've brought back enough water for the day for both the family and the horses (since Moors rarely let their horses go to the wells), they then have to grind the corn and prepare the food. Since this is always done outdoors, the slaves are exposed to the intense heat of the sun, the sand, and the fire. In between tasks, they are responsible for sweeping the tent, churning the milk, and doing other household chores. Despite all this, they are poorly fed and often face severe punishment.
The men’s dress, among the Moors of Ludamar, differs but little from that of the negroes, which has been already described, except that they have all adopted that characteristic of the Mohammedan sect, the turban, which is here universally made of white cotton cloth. Such of the Moors as have long beards display them with a mixture of pride and satisfaction, as denoting an Arab ancestry. Of this number was Ali himself; but among the generality of the people the hair is short and bushy, and universally black. And here I may be permitted to observe, that if any one circumstance excited among them favourable thoughts towards my own person, it was my beard, which was now grown to an enormous length, and was always beheld with approbation or envy. I believe, in my conscience, they thought it too good a beard for a Christian.
The men's clothing among the Moors of Ludamar is quite similar to that of the black people we've already described, except that they all wear the hallmark of the Mohammedan faith, the turban, which is usually made of white cotton fabric. Those Moors with long beards show them off with a sense of pride and satisfaction, as a sign of Arab heritage. Ali was one of them; however, most people have short, bushy hair that is universally black. Here, I should point out that if anything made them have positive thoughts about me, it was my beard, which had grown to an enormous length and was always regarded with approval or envy. I truly believe they thought it was too nice of a beard for a Christian.
The only diseases which I observed to prevail among the Moors were the intermittent fever and dysentery—for the cure of which nostrums are sometimes administered by their old women, but in general nature is left to her own operations. Mention was made to me of the small-pox as being sometimes very destructive; but it had not, to my knowledge, made its appearance in Ludamar while I was in captivity. That it prevails, however, among some tribes of the Moors, and that it is frequently conveyed by them to the negroes in the southern states, I was assured on the authority of Dr. Laidley, who also informed me that the negroes on the Gambia practise inoculation.
The only diseases I noticed among the Moors were intermittent fever and dysentery. Their elderly women sometimes use remedies for these, but generally, they leave it to nature to take its course. I heard about smallpox being quite deadly at times, but it hadn’t shown up in Ludamar while I was held captive. However, I was told by Dr. Laidley that it does occur among some Moorish tribes and that they often pass it on to the Black people in the southern states. He also mentioned that the Black people in the Gambia practice inoculation.
The administration of criminal justice, as far as I had opportunities of observing, was prompt and decisive: for although civil rights were but little regarded in Ludamar, it was necessary when crimes were committed that examples should sometimes be made. On such occasions the offender was brought before Ali, who pronounced, of his sole authority, what judgment he thought proper. But I understood that capital punishment was seldom or never inflicted, except on the negroes.
The criminal justice system, from what I could see, was quick and clear-cut: even though civil rights weren’t really respected in Ludamar, it was important to set examples when crimes happened. In these cases, the offender was brought before Ali, who decided the punishment based on his own judgment. However, I learned that the death penalty was rarely or never carried out, except for the Black people.
Although the wealth of the Moors consists chiefly in their numerous herds of cattle, yet, as the pastoral life does not afford full employment, the majority of the people are perfectly idle, and spend the day in trifling conversation about their horses, or in laying schemes of depredation on the negro villages.
Although the wealth of the Moors mainly comes from their large herds of cattle, the pastoral lifestyle doesn’t provide enough work, so most people are completely idle and spend their days engaging in trivial conversations about their horses or planning raids on the nearby villages.
Of the number of Ali’s Moorish subjects I had no means of forming a correct estimate. The military strength of Ludamar consists in cavalry. They are well mounted, and appear to be very expert in skirmishing and attacking by surprise. Every soldier furnishes his own horse, and finds his accoutrements, consisting of a large sabre, a double-barrelled gun, a small red leather bag for holding his balls, and a powder bag slung over the shoulder. He has no pay, nor any remuneration but what arises from plunder. This body is not very numerous; for when Ali made war upon Bambarra I was informed that his whole force did not exceed two thousand cavalry. They constitute, however, by what I could learn, but a very small proportion of his Moorish subjects. The horses are very beautiful, and so highly esteemed that the negro princes will sometimes give from twelve to fourteen slaves for one horse.
Of the number of Ali's Moorish subjects, I couldn't accurately estimate. The military strength of Ludamar relies on cavalry. They have good horses and seem to be quite skilled in skirmishing and surprise attacks. Each soldier provides his own horse and supplies, which include a large sword, a double-barreled gun, a small red leather bag for his ammunition, and a powder bag slung over his shoulder. They receive no salary or compensation other than what they can take from plundering. This group isn't very large; when Ali went to war against Bambarra, I heard his entire force didn't exceed two thousand cavalry. However, based on what I gathered, they are just a tiny fraction of his Moorish subjects. The horses are very beautiful and so prized that the African princes sometimes offer twelve to fourteen slaves for one horse.
Ludamar has for its northern boundary the great desert of Sahara. From the best inquiries I could make, this vast ocean of sand, which occupies so large a space in northern Africa, may be pronounced almost destitute of inhabitants, except where the scanty vegetation which appears in certain spots affords pasturage for the flocks of a few miserable Arabs, who wander from one well to another. In other places, where the supply of water and pasturage is more abundant, small parties of the Moors have taken up their residence. Here they live, in independent poverty, secure from the tyrannical government of Barbary. But the greater part of the desert, being totally destitute of water, is seldom visited by any human being, unless where the trading caravans trace out their toilsome and dangerous route across it. In some parts of this extensive waste the ground is covered with low stunted shrubs, which serve as landmarks for the caravans, and furnish the camels with a scanty forage. In other parts the disconsolate wanderer, wherever he turns, sees nothing around him but a vast interminable expanse of sand and sky—a gloomy and barren void, where the eye finds no particular object to rest upon, and the mind is filled with painful apprehensions of perishing with thirst.
Ludamar is bordered to the north by the vast Sahara Desert. From what I've gathered, this massive ocean of sand, which covers a large part of northern Africa, is nearly empty of people, except for a few struggling Arabs who move between wells, relying on the sparse vegetation that appears in certain areas for their flocks. In spots where water and grazing are more plentiful, small groups of Moors have settled down. They live in a state of independent poverty, free from the oppressive rule of Barbary. However, most of the desert is completely dry and rarely visited by anyone, except for the trading caravans that brave the difficult and dangerous routes across it. In some areas of this vast wasteland, the ground is dotted with low shrubs that serve as markers for the caravans and provide camels with minimal forage. In other areas, lonely wanderers see nothing but an endless stretch of sand and sky—a bleak and barren emptiness where there is nothing for the eye to focus on and the mind is filled with the distressing fear of dying from thirst.
The few wild animals which inhabit these melancholy regions are the antelope and the ostrich; their swiftness of foot enabling them to reach the distant watering-places. On the skirts of the desert, where water is more plentiful, are found lions, panthers, elephants, and wild boars.
The few wild animals that live in these sad areas are the antelope and the ostrich; their speed allows them to get to the faraway watering holes. On the edges of the desert, where there's more water, you can find lions, panthers, elephants, and wild boars.
Of domestic animals, the only one that can endure the fatigue of crossing the desert is the camel. By the particular conformation of the stomach he is enabled to carry a supply of water sufficient for ten or twelve days; his broad and yielding foot is well adapted for a sandy country; and, by a singular motion of his upper lip, he picks the smallest leaves from the thorny shrubs of the desert as he passes along. The camel is therefore the only beast of burden employed by the trading caravans which traverse the desert in different directions, from Barbary to Nigritia. As this useful and docile creature has been sufficiently described by systematical writers it is unnecessary for me to enlarge upon his properties. I shall only add that his flesh, though to my own taste dry and unsavoury, is preferred by the Moors to any other; and that the milk of the female is in universal esteem, and is indeed sweet, pleasant, and nutritive.
Of all domesticated animals, the only one that can handle the exhaustion of crossing the desert is the camel. Thanks to the specific structure of its stomach, it can carry enough water for ten to twelve days. Its broad and flexible foot is perfect for sandy terrain, and with a unique motion of its upper lip, it can pick tiny leaves from the thorny desert shrubs as it goes by. Therefore, the camel is the only pack animal used by the trade caravans that travel in different directions across the desert, from Barbary to Nigritia. Since this useful and gentle creature has already been well-described by experts, I won’t go into detail about its characteristics. I will just add that while I find its meat dry and unappetizing, the Moors prefer it above all else; and the milk from female camels is highly esteemed, being sweet, enjoyable, and nutritious.
I have observed that the Moors, in their complexion, resemble the mulattoes of the West Indies; but they have something unpleasant in their aspect which the mulattoes have not. I fancied that I discovered in the features of most of them a disposition towards cruelty and low cunning; and I could never contemplate their physiognomy without feeling sensible uneasiness. From the staring wildness of their eyes a stranger would immediately set them down as a nation of lunatics. The treachery and malevolence of their character are manifest in their plundering excursions against the negro villages. Oftentimes without the smallest provocation, and sometimes under the fairest professions of friendship, they will suddenly seize upon the negroes’ cattle, and even on the inhabitants themselves. The negroes very seldom retaliate.
I’ve noticed that the Moors, in their skin tone, look like the mixed-race people of the West Indies; however, there’s something off about their appearance that the mixed-race people don’t have. I thought I could see a tendency toward cruelty and slyness in most of their features, and I could never look at their faces without feeling some discomfort. The wild look in their eyes would make any outsider think they were a crazy nation. Their deceit and malice show in their raiding attacks on the Black villages. Often with no reason at all, and sometimes while pretending to be friendly, they will suddenly take the Black people’s cattle and even capture the people themselves. The Black villagers rarely fight back.
Like the roving Arabs, the Moors frequently remove from one place to another, according to the season of the year or the convenience of pasturage. In the month of February, when the heat of the sun scorches up every sort of vegetation in the desert, they strike their tents and approach the negro country to the south, where they reside until the rains commence, in the month of July. At this time, having purchased corn and other necessaries from the negroes, in exchange for salt, they again depart to the northward, and continue in the desert until the rains are over, and that part of the country becomes burnt up and barren.
Like the traveling Arabs, the Moors often move from one place to another, depending on the season or the availability of grazing land. In February, when the sun's heat scorches all vegetation in the desert, they pack up their tents and head south to the Black people’s territory, where they stay until the rains start in July. During this time, they buy corn and other essentials from the Black people in exchange for salt, then they head back north and remain in the desert until the rains are finished and that region turns dry and barren.
This wandering and restless way of life, while it inures them to hardships, strengthens at the same time the bonds of their little society, and creates in them an aversion towards strangers which is almost insurmountable. Cut off from all intercourse with civilised nations, and boasting an advantage over the negroes, by possessing, though in a very limited degree, the knowledge of letters, they are at once the vainest and proudest, and perhaps the most bigoted, ferocious, and intolerant of all the nations on the earth—combining in their character the blind superstition of the negro with the savage cruelty and treachery of the Arab.
This wandering and restless way of life, while toughening them to hardships, also strengthens the ties of their small community and fosters a strong dislike of outsiders that is nearly impossible to overcome. Isolated from all contact with civilized nations and having a slight advantage over the Black population due to their limited understanding of reading and writing, they are at once the most vain and proud, and perhaps the most bigoted, brutal, and intolerant people on earth—blending the blind superstition of the Black community with the savage cruelty and deceitfulness of the Arab.
CHAPTER XIII.
BREAK FREE FROM CAPTIVITY.
Having, as hath been related, obtained permission to accompany Ali to Jarra, I took leave of Queen Fatima, who, with much grace and civility, returned me part of my apparel; and the evening before my departure, my horse, with the saddle and bridle, were sent me by Ali’s order.
Having, as mentioned earlier, received permission to go with Ali to Jarra, I said goodbye to Queen Fatima, who graciously returned some of my clothes. The night before I left, Ali arranged for my horse, along with the saddle and bridle, to be sent to me.
Early on the morning of the 26th of May I departed from the camp of Bubaker, accompanied by my two attendants, Johnson and Demba, and a number of Moors on horseback, Ali, with about fifty horsemen, having gone privately from the camp during the night. We stopped about noon at Farani, and were there joined by twelve Moors riding upon camels, and with them we proceeded to a watering-place in the woods, where we overtook Ali and his fifty horsemen. They were lodged in some low shepherd’s tents near the wells.
Early on the morning of May 26th, I left the camp of Bubaker, along with my two attendants, Johnson and Demba, and several Moors on horseback. Ali, with about fifty horsemen, had slipped away from the camp during the night. We stopped around noon at Farani, where we were joined by twelve Moors riding camels. Together, we headed to a watering spot in the woods, where we caught up with Ali and his fifty horsemen. They were staying in some low shepherd’s tents near the wells.
May 28.—Early in the morning the Moors saddled their horses, and Ali’s chief slave ordered me to get in readiness. In a little time the same messenger returned, and, taking my boy by the shoulder, told him in the Mandingo language, that “Ali was to be his master in future;” and then turning to me, “The business is settled at last,” said he; “the boy, and everything but your horse, goes back to Bubaker, but you may take the old fool” (meaning Johnson the interpreter) “with you to Jarra.” I made him no answer; but being shocked beyond description at the idea of losing the poor boy, I hastened to Ali, who was at breakfast before his tent, surrounded by many of his courtiers. I told him (perhaps in rather too passionate a strain), that whatever imprudence I had been guilty of in coming into his country, I thought I had already been sufficiently punished for it by being so long detained, and then plundered of all my little property; which, however, gave me no uneasiness when compared with what he had just now done to me. I observed that the boy whom he had now seized upon was not a slave, and had been accused of no offence; he was, indeed, one of my attendants, and his faithful services in that station had procured him his freedom. His fidelity and attachment had made him follow me into my present situation, and, as he looked up to me for protection I could not see him deprived of his liberty without remonstrating against such an act as the height of cruelty and injustice. Ali made no reply, but, with a haughty air and malignant smile, told his interpreter that if I did not mount my horse immediately he would send me back likewise. There is something in the frown of a tyrant which rouses the most secret emotions of the heart: I could not suppress my feelings, and for once entertained an indignant wish to rid the world of such a monster.
May 28.—Early in the morning, the Moors got their horses ready, and Ali’s main slave told me to prepare myself. Soon after, the same messenger came back, and, grabbing my boy by the shoulder, told him in Mandingo that “Ali would be his master from now on.” Then he turned to me and said, “The deal is done; the boy and everything except your horse will go back to Bubaker, but you can take the old fool” (referring to Johnson the interpreter) “with you to Jarra.” I didn’t respond, but I was horrified at the thought of losing the poor boy, so I rushed over to Ali, who was having breakfast in front of his tent, surrounded by several of his courtiers. I told him (perhaps a bit too passionately) that whatever mistakes I had made in coming to his country, I felt I had already been punished enough by being held for so long and then having all my belongings taken. However, that didn't bother me nearly as much as what he had just done. I pointed out that the boy he had just taken wasn’t a slave and hadn’t done anything wrong; he was actually one of my attendants, and his loyal service had won him his freedom. His loyalty had brought him to follow me into my current situation, and since he looked to me for protection, I couldn’t just stand by and let him lose his freedom without speaking up against such an act of cruelty and injustice. Ali didn’t respond but, with a proud look and a cruel smile, told his interpreter that if I didn’t get on my horse right away, he would send me back too. There’s something about a tyrant’s glare that awakens deep feelings in the heart: I couldn’t hold back my emotions, and for once, I had a furious desire to rid the world of such a monster.
Poor Demba was not less affected than myself. He had formed a strong attachment towards me, and had a cheerfulness of disposition which often beguiled the tedious hours of captivity. He was likewise a proficient in the Bambarra tongue, and promised on that account to be of great utility to me in future. But it was in vain to expect anything favourable to humanity from people who are strangers to its dictates. So, having shaken hands with this unfortunate boy, and blended my tears with his, assuring him, however, that I would do my utmost to redeem him, I saw him led off by three of Ali’s slaves towards the camp at Bubaker.
Poor Demba was just as affected as I was. He had developed a strong bond with me and had a cheerful attitude that often made the long hours of captivity more bearable. He was also fluent in the Bambarra language, which meant he would be really helpful to me in the future. But it was pointless to expect anything good from people who don't understand basic human decency. So, after shaking hands with this unfortunate boy and shedding tears alongside him, I promised that I would do everything I could to rescue him, and then I watched as he was taken away by three of Ali’s slaves toward the camp at Bubaker.
When the Moors had mounted their horses I was ordered to follow them, and, after a toilsome journey through the woods in a very sultry day, we arrived in the afternoon at a walled village called Doombani, where we remained two days, waiting for the arrival of some horsemen from the northward.
When the Moors got on their horses, I was told to follow them. After a tiring journey through the woods on a really hot day, we reached a walled village called Doombani in the afternoon. We stayed there for two days, waiting for some horsemen to arrive from the north.
On the 1st of June we departed from Doombani towards Jarra. Our company now amounted to two hundred men, all on horseback, for the Moors never use infantry in their wars. They appeared capable of enduring great fatigue; but from their total want of discipline our journey to Jarra was more like a fox-chase than the march of an army.
On June 1st, we set off from Doombani heading to Jarra. Our group consisted of two hundred men, all on horseback, since the Moors never use infantry in their battles. They seemed able to handle a lot of strain, but due to their complete lack of discipline, our trek to Jarra felt more like a fox hunt than a military march.
At Jarra I took up my lodging at the house of my old acquaintance, Daman Jumma, and informed him of everything that had befallen me. I particularly requested him to use his interest with Ali to redeem my boy, and promised him a bill upon Dr. Laidley for the value of two slaves the moment he brought him to Jarra. Daman very readily undertook to negotiate the business, but found that Ali considered the boy as my principal interpreter, and was unwilling to part with him, lest he should fall a second time into my hands, and be instrumental in conducting me to Bambarra. Ali, therefore, put off the matter from day to day, but withal told Daman that if he wished to purchase the boy for himself he should have him thereafter at the common price of a slave, which Daman agreed to pay for him whenever Ali should send him to Jarra.
At Jarra, I stayed at the home of my old friend, Daman Jumma, and told him everything that had happened to me. I specifically asked him to use his connections with Ali to rescue my boy and promised him a bill from Dr. Laidley for the value of two slaves as soon as he brought him to Jarra. Daman was eager to help with the negotiation, but found out that Ali saw the boy as my main interpreter and was reluctant to let him go, fearing he might end up back with me and help me get to Bambarra. Ali kept postponing the matter, but also told Daman that if he wanted to buy the boy for himself, he could have him at the usual price of a slave, which Daman agreed to pay whenever Ali decided to send him to Jarra.
The chief object of Ali, in this journey to Jarra, as I have already related, was to procure money from such of the Kaartans as had taken refuge in his country. Some of these had solicited his protection to avoid the horrors of war, but by far the greatest number of them were dissatisfied men, who wished the ruin of their own sovereign. These people no sooner heard that the Bambarra army had returned to Sego without subduing Daisy, as was generally expected, than they resolved to make a sudden attack themselves upon him before he could recruit his forces, which were now known to be much diminished by a bloody campaign, and in great want of provisions. With this view they solicited the Moors to join them, and offered to hire of Ali two hundred horsemen, which Ali, with the warmest professions of friendship, agreed to furnish, upon condition that they should previously supply him with four hundred head of cattle, two hundred garments of blue cloth, and a considerable quantity of beads and ornaments.
The main goal of Ali on this trip to Jarra, as I've mentioned before, was to get money from some of the Kaartans who had taken refuge in his territory. Some of these people sought his protection to escape the horrors of war, but most were dissatisfied individuals who wanted to see their own ruler fall. As soon as they heard that the Bambarra army had returned to Sego without defeating Daisy, which many had expected, they decided to launch a surprise attack on him before he could rebuild his forces, which were now known to have been significantly weakened by a bloody campaign and were in desperate need of supplies. With this in mind, they reached out to the Moors for support and offered to hire two hundred horsemen from Ali, who, with strong declarations of friendship, agreed to provide them, on the condition that they first give him four hundred heads of cattle, two hundred pieces of blue cloth, and a good amount of beads and ornaments.
June 8.—In the afternoon Ali sent his chief slave to inform me that he was about to return to Bubaker: but as he would only stay there a few days to keep the approaching festival (Banna salee), and then return to Jarra, I had permission to remain with Daman until his return. This was joyful news to me; but I had experienced so many disappointments that I was unwilling to indulge the hope of its being true, until Johnson came and told me that Ali, with part of the horsemen, were actually gone from the town, and that the rest were to follow him in the morning.
June 8.—In the afternoon, Ali sent his main slave to let me know that he was about to head back to Bubaker. However, he would only be there for a few days to celebrate the upcoming festival (Banna salee), and then he would return to Jarra. I was allowed to stay with Daman until his return. This was great news for me, but after so many disappointments, I hesitated to believe it was true until Johnson came and informed me that Ali, along with some of the horsemen, had actually left town, and the rest were set to follow him in the morning.
June 9.—Early in the morning the remainder of the Moors departed from the town. They had, during their stay, committed many acts of robbery; and this morning with the most unparalleled audacity, they seized upon three girls who were bringing water from the wells, and carried them away into slavery.
June 9.—Early in the morning, the rest of the Moors left the town. During their time here, they committed many acts of theft; and this morning, with remarkable boldness, they kidnapped three girls who were fetching water from the wells and took them away into slavery.
June 12.—Two people, dreadfully wounded, were discovered at a watering-place in the woods; one of them had just breathed his last, but the other was brought alive to Jarra. On recovering a little he informed the people that he had fled through the woods from Kasson; that Daisy had made war upon Sambo, the king of that country; had surprised three of his towns, and put all the inhabitants to the sword. He enumerated by name many of the friends of the Jarra people who had been murdered in Kasson. This intelligence made the death-howl universal in Jarra for the space of two days.
June 12.—Two people, badly injured, were found at a watering hole in the woods; one of them had just died, but the other was taken alive to Jarra. After regaining some strength, he told the locals that he had escaped through the woods from Kasson; that Daisy had attacked Sambo, the king of that area; had taken surprise control of three of his towns, and killed all the residents. He named many of the Jarra people’s friends who had been killed in Kasson. This news caused a universal wail of mourning in Jarra for two days.
This piece of bad news was followed by another not less distressing. A number of runaway slaves arrived from Kaarta on the 14th, and reported that Daisy, having received information concerning the intended attack upon him, was about to visit Jarra. This made the negroes call upon Ali for the two hundred horsemen which he was to furnish them according to engagement. But Ali paid very little attention to their remonstrances, and at last plainly told them that his cavalry were otherwise employed. The negroes, thus deserted by the Moors, and fully apprised that the king of Kaarta would show them as little clemency as he had shown the inhabitants of Kasson, resolved to collect all their forces, and hazard a battle before the king, who was now in great distress for want of provisions, should become too powerful for them. They therefore assembled about eight hundred effective men in the whole, and with these they entered Kaarta on the evening of the 18th of June.
This piece of bad news was followed by another equally distressing. A number of runaway slaves arrived from Kaarta on the 14th and reported that Daisy, having learned about the planned attack against him, was about to visit Jarra. This led the slaves to call on Ali for the two hundred horsemen he was supposed to provide them as agreed. However, Ali paid little attention to their protests and eventually told them outright that his cavalry was otherwise occupied. Left abandoned by the Moors and made fully aware that the king of Kaarta would show them no more mercy than he had shown the people of Kasson, the slaves decided to gather all their forces and risk a battle before the king, who was now in great need of supplies, could grow too powerful for them. They assembled around eight hundred capable men in total and with these, they entered Kaarta on the evening of June 18th.
June 19.—This morning the wind shifted to the south-west; and about two o’clock in the afternoon we had a heavy tornado, or thunder-squall, accompanied with rain, which greatly revived the face of nature, and gave a pleasant coolness to the air. This was the first rain that had fallen for many months.
June 19.—This morning, the wind changed to the south-west; and around two o’clock in the afternoon, we experienced a strong tornado or thunderstorm, with rain that really refreshed the landscape and made the air pleasantly cool. This was the first rain to fall in many months.
As every attempt to redeem my boy had hitherto been unsuccessful, and in all probability would continue to prove so whilst I remained in the country, I found that it was necessary for me to come to some determination concerning my own safety before the rains should be fully set in; for my landlord, seeing no likelihood of being paid for his trouble, began to wish me away—and Johnson, my interpreter, refusing to proceed, my situation became very perplexing. I determined to avail myself of the first opportunity of escaping, and to proceed directly for Bambarra, as soon as the rains had set in for a few days, so as to afford me the certainty of finding water in the woods.
Since every attempt to save my son had been unsuccessful so far, and it was likely to remain that way while I was still in the country, I realized I needed to make a decision about my own safety before the rains fully started. My landlord, seeing no chance of getting paid for his troubles, began to want me gone—and Johnson, my interpreter, refused to continue, leaving me in a very difficult position. I decided to take the first chance I got to escape and head straight for Bambarra, as soon as it had rained for a few days, to ensure I could find water in the woods.
Such was my situation when, on the evening of the 24th of June, I was startled by the report of some muskets close to the town, and inquiring the reason, was informed that the Jarra army had returned from fighting Daisy, and that this firing was by way of rejoicing. However, when the chief men of the town had assembled, and heard a full detail of the expedition, they were by no means relieved from their uneasiness on Daisy’s account. The deceitful Moors having drawn back from the confederacy, after being hired by the negroes, greatly dispirited the insurgents, who, instead of finding Daisy with a few friends concealed in the strong fortress of Gedingooma, had found him at a town near Joka, in the open country, surrounded by so numerous an army that every attempt to attack him was at once given up; and the confederates only thought of enriching themselves by the plunder of the small towns in the neighbourhood. They accordingly fell upon one of Daisy’s towns, and carried off the whole of the inhabitants; but lest intelligence of this might reach Daisy, and induce him to cut off their retreat, they returned through the woods by night bringing with them the slaves and cattle which they had captured.
I was in this situation when, on the evening of June 24th, I was startled by the sound of gunfire close to the town. When I asked what was happening, I was told that the Jarra army had returned from battling Daisy, and that the firing was in celebration. However, when the town's leaders gathered and heard the full account of the expedition, they weren’t any less worried about Daisy. The treacherous Moors had pulled out of the alliance after being paid by the black soldiers, which really demoralized the insurgents. Instead of finding Daisy hiding with a few friends in the stronghold of Gedingooma, they discovered him in a town near Joka, out in the open, surrounded by such a large army that any attempt to attack him was immediately abandoned; the confederates then focused on looting the nearby small towns. They targeted one of Daisy’s towns and took all the inhabitants, but to avoid letting Daisy know and potentially cutting off their escape, they went back through the woods at night with the slaves and livestock they had captured.
June 26.—This afternoon a spy from Kaarta brought the alarming intelligence that Daisy had taken Simbing in the morning, and would be in Jarra some time in the course of the ensuing day. Early in the morning nearly one-half of the townspeople took the road for Bambarra, by the way of Deena.
June 26.—This afternoon, a spy from Kaarta brought worrying news that Daisy had captured Simbing in the morning and would arrive in Jarra sometime tomorrow. Early in the morning, almost half of the townspeople headed out toward Bambarra via Deena.
Their departure was very affecting, the women and children crying, the men sullen and dejected, and all of them looking back with regret on their native town, and on the wells and rocks beyond which their ambition had never tempted them to stray, and where they had laid all their plans of future happiness, all of which they were now forced to abandon, and to seek shelter among strangers.
Their departure was really emotional; the women and children were crying, the men were gloomy and downcast, and everyone was looking back with regret at their hometown, at the wells and rocks that their dreams had never encouraged them to leave, where they had built all their hopes for future happiness—hopes they were now forced to give up in order to find refuge among strangers.
June 27.—About eleven o’clock in the forenoon we were alarmed by the sentinels, who brought information that Daisy was on his march towards Jarra, and that the confederate army had fled before him without firing a gun. The terror of the townspeople on this occasion is not easily to be described. Indeed, the screams of the women and children, and the great hurry and confusion that everywhere prevailed, made me suspect that the Kaartans had already entered the town; and although I had every reason to be pleased with Daisy’s behaviour to me when I was at Kemmoo, I had no wish to expose myself to the mercy of his army, who might in the general confusion mistake me for a Moor. I therefore mounted my horse, and taking a large bag of corn before me, rode slowly along with the townspeople, until we reached the foot of a rocky hill, where I dismounted and drove my horse up before me. When I had reached the summit I sat down, and having a full view of the town and the neighbouring country, could not help lamenting the situation of the poor inhabitants, who were thronging after me, driving their sheep, cows, goats, &c., and carrying a scanty portion of provisions and a few clothes. There was a great noise and crying everywhere upon the road, for many aged people and children were unable to walk, and these, with the sick, were obliged to be carried, otherwise they must have been left to certain destruction.
June 27.—Around eleven o’clock in the morning, we were alerted by the sentinels, who reported that Daisy was on his way to Jarra, and that the allied army had retreated without firing a shot. The fear among the townspeople at this moment is hard to describe. The screams of women and children, along with the hurry and chaos all around, led me to suspect that the Kaartans had already entered the town. Although I had every reason to be grateful for Daisy’s treatment of me while I was in Kemmoo, I didn't want to risk being at the mercy of his army, who might mistake me for a Moor in the confusion. So, I got on my horse, took a large bag of corn in front of me, and rode slowly with the townspeople until we reached the base of a rocky hill, where I dismounted and led my horse up ahead of me. Once I reached the top, I sat down, and with a clear view of the town and the surrounding area, I couldn't help but feel sorrow for the poor inhabitants, who were following me, driving their sheep, cows, goats, etc., and carrying a meager supply of food and a few clothes. There was a lot of noise and crying along the road, as many elderly and young children were unable to walk, and those, along with the sick, had to be carried or else they would have been left to face certain doom.
About five o’clock we arrived at a small farm belonging to the Jarra people, called Kadeeja; and here I found Daman and Johnson employed in filling large bags of corn, to be carried upon bullocks, to serve as provisions for Daman’s family on the road.
About five o’clock we arrived at a small farm belonging to the Jarra people, called Kadeeja; and here I found Daman and Johnson busy filling large bags of corn to be carried on bullocks as provisions for Daman’s family during the journey.
June 28.—At daybreak we departed from Kadeeja, and having passed Troongoomba without stopping, arrived in the afternoon at Queira. I remained here two days, in order to recruit my horse, which the Moors had reduced to a perfect Rosinante, and to wait for the arrival of some Mandingo negroes, who were going for Bambarra in the course of a few days.
June 28.—At dawn, we left Kadeeja and, having passed Troongoomba without stopping, arrived in the afternoon at Queira. I stayed here for two days to rest my horse, which the Moors had turned into a complete Rosinante, and to wait for some Mandingo men who were heading for Bambarra in a few days.
On the afternoon of the 1st of July, as I was tending my horse in the fields, Ali’s chief slave and four Moors arrived at Queira, and took up their lodging at the dooty’s house. My interpreter, Johnson, who suspected the nature of this visit, sent two boys to overhear their conversation, from which he learnt that they were sent to convey me back to Bubaker. The same evening two of the Moors came privately to look at my horse, and one of them proposed taking it to the dooty’s hut, but the other observed that such a precaution was unnecessary, as I could never escape upon such an animal. They then inquired where I slept, and returned to their companions.
On the afternoon of July 1st, while I was tending to my horse in the fields, Ali’s chief slave and four Moors arrived at Queira and took lodging at the dooty’s house. My interpreter, Johnson, who had a hunch about the reason for their visit, sent two boys to eavesdrop on their conversation. From this, he found out that they were sent to bring me back to Bubaker. That same evening, two of the Moors came by to check out my horse, and one of them suggested taking it to the dooty’s hut. But the other pointed out that it wasn’t necessary since I could never escape on such a horse. They then asked where I slept and went back to their group.
All this was like a stroke of thunder to me, for I dreaded nothing so much as confinement again among the Moors, from whose barbarity I had nothing but death to expect. I therefore determined to set off immediately for Bambarra, a measure which I thought offered almost the only chance of saving my life and gaining the object of my mission. I communicated the design to Johnson, who, although he applauded my resolution, was so far from showing any inclination to accompany me, that he solemnly protested he would rather forfeit his wages than go any farther. He told me that Daman had agreed to give him half the price of a slave for his service to assist in conducting a coffle of slaves to Gambia, and that he was determined to embrace the opportunity of returning to his wife and family.
All this hit me like a bolt of lightning because I feared nothing more than being stuck among the Moors again, who would only bring me death. So, I decided to head straight to Bambarra, which I thought was nearly my only chance to save my life and fulfill my mission. I shared my plan with Johnson, who, while he praised my determination, made it clear he had no interest in coming with me. He firmly said he would rather give up his wages than go any further. He told me that Daman had promised to pay him half the price of a slave for his help in leading a group of slaves to Gambia, and he was set on taking the chance to return to his wife and family.
Having no hopes, therefore, of persuading him to accompany me, I resolved to proceed by myself. About midnight I got my clothes in readiness, which consisted of two shirts, two pairs of trousers, two pocket-handkerchiefs, an upper and under waistcoat, a hat, and a pair of half-boots; these, with a cloak, constituted my whole wardrobe. And I had not one single bead, nor any other article of value in my possession, to purchase victuals for myself or corn for my horse.
Having no hopes of convincing him to join me, I decided to go on my own. Around midnight, I got my clothes ready, which included two shirts, two pairs of pants, two handkerchiefs, a vest and an undershirt, a hat, and a pair of ankle boots; these, along with a cloak, made up my entire wardrobe. And I didn’t have a single penny or anything else of value to buy food for myself or grain for my horse.
About daybreak, Johnson, who had been listening to the Moors all night, came and whispered to me that they were asleep. The awful crisis was now arrived when I was again either to taste the blessing of freedom or languish out my days in captivity. A cold sweat moistened my forehead as I thought on the dreadful alternative, and reflected that, one way or another, my fate must be decided in the course of the ensuing day. But to deliberate was to lose the only chance of escaping. So, taking up my bundle, I stepped gently over the negroes, who were sleeping in the open air, and having mounted my horse, I bade Johnson farewell, desiring him to take particular care of the papers I had entrusted him with, and inform my friends in Gambia that he had left me in good health, on my way to Bambarra.
About daybreak, Johnson, who had been listening to the Moors all night, came and whispered to me that they were asleep. The moment had come when I was again faced with the choice of either experiencing the blessing of freedom or spending my days in captivity. A cold sweat dampened my forehead as I thought about the terrifying alternatives, realizing that my fate would be decided one way or another within the next day. But to think too long meant losing my only chance to escape. So, I picked up my bundle, carefully stepped over the sleeping negroes in the open air, and after mounting my horse, I said goodbye to Johnson, asking him to take good care of the papers I had entrusted to him and to let my friends in Gambia know that he had left me in good health, on my way to Bambarra.
I proceeded with great caution, surveying each bush, and frequently listening and looking behind me for the Moorish horsemen, until I was about a mile from the town, when I was surprised to find myself in the neighbourhood of a korree belonging to the Moors. The shepherds followed me for about a mile, hooting and throwing stones after me; and when I was out of their reach, and had begun to indulge the pleasing hopes of escaping, I was again greatly alarmed to hear somebody holloa behind me, and looking back, I saw three Moors on horseback, coming after me at full speed, whooping and brandishing their double-barrelled guns. I knew it was in vain to think of escaping, and therefore turned back and met them, when two of them caught hold of my bridle, one on each side, and the third, presenting his musket, told me I must go back to Ali. When the human mind has for some time been fluctuating between hope and despair, tortured with anxiety, and hurried from one extreme to another, it affords a sort of gloomy relief to know the worst that can possibly happen. Such was my situation. An indifference about life and all its enjoyments had completely benumbed my faculties, and I rode back with the Moors with apparent unconcern. But a change took place much sooner than I had any reason to expect. In passing through some thick bushes one of the Moors ordered me to untie my bundle and show them the contents. Having examined the different articles, they found nothing worth taking except my cloak, which they considered as a very valuable acquisition, and one of them pulling it from me, wrapped it about himself, and, with one of his companions, rode off with their prize. When I attempted to follow them, the third, who had remained with me, struck my horse over the head, and presenting his musket, told me I should proceed no farther. I now perceived that these men had not been sent by any authority to apprehend me, but had pursued me solely with a view to rob and plunder me. Turning my horse’s head, therefore, once more towards the east, and observing the Moor follow the track of his confederates, I congratulated myself on having escaped with my life, though in great distress, from such a horde of barbarians.
I moved very carefully, checking each bush and frequently listening and looking behind me for the Moorish horsemen, until I was about a mile from the town, when I was shocked to find myself near a korree belonging to the Moors. The shepherds followed me for about a mile, yelling and throwing stones at me; and when I was out of their reach and started to feel hopeful about escaping, I was suddenly scared again when I heard someone shout behind me. Looking back, I saw three Moors on horseback, racing after me, whooping and waving their double-barreled guns. I knew it was pointless to try to escape, so I turned back and met them. Two of them grabbed my bridle, one on each side, and the third, with his musket ready, told me I had to go back to Ali. When the mind has been tossed between hope and despair for a while, tortured by anxiety and swinging from one extreme to another, discovering the worst that can happen offers a dark sort of relief. That was my situation. A complete indifference toward life and all its pleasures had completely numbed my senses, and I returned with the Moors seemingly unfazed. But a shift happened much faster than I expected. As we passed through some dense bushes, one of the Moors ordered me to untie my bundle and show them what was inside. After checking the various items, they found nothing worth taking except my cloak, which they saw as very valuable. One of them yanked it from me, wrapped it around himself, and, along with one of his friends, rode off with their prize. When I tried to follow them, the third one, who had stayed with me, hit my horse on the head and pointed his musket, telling me I couldn’t go any further. I then realized that these men had not been sent by anyone to capture me, but were just after robbing and plundering me. So, I turned my horse’s head back east and saw the Moor following the path of his partners. I felt relieved to have escaped with my life, even though I was in great distress, from such a group of barbarians.
I was no sooner out of sight of the Moor than I struck into the woods to prevent being pursued, and kept pushing on with all possible speed, until I found myself near some high rocks, which I remembered to have seen in my former route from Queira to Deena and, directing my course a little to the northward, I fortunately fell in with the path.
I was barely out of sight of the Moor when I headed into the woods to avoid being followed, pushing on as fast as I could until I found myself near some tall rocks, which I recalled from my previous trip from Queira to Deena. I then adjusted my direction slightly northward and thankfully found the path.
CHAPTER XIV.
Journey continued; arrived at Wawra.
It is impossible to describe the joy that arose in my mind when I looked around and concluded that I was out of danger. I felt like one recovered from sickness; I breathed freer; I found unusual lightness in my limbs; even the desert looked pleasant; and I dreaded nothing so much as falling in with some wandering parties of Moors, who might convey me back to the land of thieves and murderers from which I had just escaped.
It is impossible to describe the joy that filled my mind when I looked around and realized that I was out of danger. I felt like I had just recovered from an illness; I breathed easier; I felt a surprising lightness in my limbs; even the desert looked nice; and I dreaded nothing more than running into some wandering groups of Moors, who might take me back to the land of thieves and murderers I had just escaped from.
I soon became sensible, however, that my situation was very deplorable, for I had no means of procuring food nor prospect of finding water. About ten o’clock, perceiving a herd of goats feeding close to the road, I took a circuitous route to avoid being seen, and continued travelling through the wilderness, directing my course by compass nearly east-south-east, in order to reach as soon as possible some town or village of the kingdom of Bambarra.
I quickly realized, though, that my situation was really dire, as I had no way to get food or any chance of finding water. Around ten o’clock, I saw a herd of goats grazing near the road, so I took a longer route to avoid being spotted and kept making my way through the wilderness, using my compass to head almost east-southeast, hoping to reach a town or village in the kingdom of Bambarra as soon as possible.
A little after noon, when the burning heat of the sun was reflected with double violence from the hot sand, and the distant ridges of the hills, seen through the ascending vapour, seemed to wave and fluctuate like the unsettled sea, I became faint with thirst, and climbed a tree in hopes of seeing distant smoke, or some other appearance of a human habitation—but in vain: nothing appeared all around but thick underwood and hillocks of white sand.
A little after noon, when the intense heat of the sun was bouncing off the hot sand, and the distant hills looked like they were shimmering and moving through the rising haze, I started to feel faint from thirst. I climbed a tree hoping to spot some smoke or any sign of human habitation—but there was nothing: just thick brush and mounds of white sand all around.
About four o’clock I came suddenly upon a large herd of goats, and pulling my horse into a bush, I watched to observe if the keepers were Moors or negroes. In a little time I perceived two Moorish boys, and with some difficulty persuaded them to approach me. They informed me that the herd belonged to Ali, and that they were going to Deena, where the water was more plentiful, and where they intended to stay until the rain had filled the pools in the desert. They showed me their empty water-skins, and told me that they had seen no water in the woods. This account afforded me but little consolation; however, it was in vain to repine, and I pushed on as fast as possible, in hopes of reaching some watering-place in the course of the night. My thirst was by this time become insufferable; my mouth was parched and inflamed; a sudden dimness would frequently come over my eyes, with other symptoms of fainting; and my horse being very much fatigued, I began seriously to apprehend that I should perish of thirst. To relieve the burning pain in my mouth and throat I chewed the leaves of different shrubs, but found them all bitter, and of no service to me.
Around four o'clock, I unexpectedly stumbled upon a large herd of goats. I pulled my horse into a bush and watched to see if the herders were Moors or Black people. After a short while, I noticed two Moorish boys and managed to convince them to come closer. They told me that the herd belonged to Ali and that they were heading to Deena, where there was more water, and they planned to stay there until the rain filled the pools in the desert. They showed me their empty water-skins and said they hadn't found any water in the woods. This news didn’t offer me much comfort; however, it was pointless to complain, so I hurried on, hoping to reach a watering hole during the night. By now, my thirst was unbearable; my mouth was dry and sore, and I frequently experienced sudden darkness in my vision along with other signs of faintness. My horse was also very tired, and I started to seriously fear that I might die of thirst. To ease the burning sensation in my mouth and throat, I chewed on leaves from various shrubs, but they were all bitter and didn't help at all.
A little before sunset, having reached the top of a gentle rising, I climbed a high tree, from the topmost branches of which I cast a melancholy look over the barren wilderness, but without discovering the most distant trace of a human dwelling. The same dismal uniformity of shrubs and sand everywhere presented itself, and the horizon was as level and uninterrupted as that of the sea.
A little before sunset, having reached the top of a gentle hill, I climbed a tall tree. From the highest branches, I took a sad look over the empty wilderness, but I couldn’t find even the faintest sign of a human home. The same bleak sameness of bushes and sand was everywhere, and the horizon was as flat and unbroken as the sea.
Descending from the tree, I found my horse devouring the stubble and brushwood with great avidity; and as I was now too faint to attempt walking, and my horse too much fatigued to carry me I thought it but an act of humanity, and perhaps the last I should ever have it in my power to perform, to take off his bridle and let him shift for himself, in doing which I was suddenly affected with sickness and giddiness, and falling upon the sand, felt as if the hour of death was fast approaching. Here, then, thought I, after a short but ineffectual struggle, terminate all my hopes of being useful in my day and generation; here must the short span of my life come to an end. I cast, as I believed, a last look on the surrounding scene, and whilst I reflected on the awful change that was about to take place, this world with its enjoyment seemed to vanish from my recollection. Nature, however, at length resumed its functions, and on recovering my senses, I found myself stretched upon the sand, with the bridle still in my hand, and the sun just sinking behind the trees. I now summoned all my resolution, and determined to make another effort to prolong my existence; and as the evening was somewhat cool, I resolved to travel as far as my limbs would carry me, in hopes of reaching—my only resource—a watering-place. With this view I put the bridle on my horse, and driving him before me, went slowly along for about an hour, when I perceived some lightning from the north-east—a most delightful sight, for it promised rain. The darkness and lightning increased very rapidly, and in less than an hour I heard the wind roaring among the bushes. I had already opened my mouth to receive the refreshing drops which I expected, but I was instantly covered with a cloud of sand, driven with such force by the wind as to give a very disagreeable sensation to my face and arms, and I was obliged to mount my horse and stop under a bush to prevent being suffocated. The sand continued to fly in amazing quantities for nearly an hour, after which I again set forward, and travelled with difficulty until ten o’clock. About this time I was agreeably surprised by some very vivid flashes of lightning, followed by a few heavy drops of rain. In a little time the sand ceased to fly, and I alighted and spread out all my clean clothes to collect the rain, which at length I saw would certainly fall. For more than an hour it rained plentifully, and I quenched my thirst by wringing and sucking my clothes.
Descending from the tree, I saw my horse eagerly munching on the dry grass and brushwood. Since I was too weak to walk and my horse was too tired to carry me, I thought it would be kind, and maybe my last chance to help, to remove his bridle and let him fend for himself. As I did this, I suddenly felt nauseous and dizzy, collapsing onto the sand, convinced that death was approaching. I thought, after a brief but futile struggle, that this was the end of my hopes to make a difference in my time; my life was about to come to an end. I glanced around for what I believed would be the last time, and as I contemplated the terrible change about to occur, the joys of this world seemed to fade from my mind. However, nature eventually took over, and when I regained my senses, I found myself lying on the sand, the bridle still in my hand, with the sun just setting behind the trees. I gathered all my strength and decided to try one more time to extend my life. Since the evening was a bit cool, I resolved to walk as far as I could, hoping to reach—my only chance—a watering place. With that in mind, I put the bridle back on my horse and led him slowly for about an hour until I saw some lightning in the northeast—a truly wonderful sight, promising rain. The darkness and lightning quickly intensified, and in less than an hour, I heard the wind howling through the bushes. I was already getting ready to catch the refreshing drops I anticipated, but I was instantly hit by a cloud of sand, blown with such force that it felt unpleasant against my face and arms. I had to get on my horse and take cover under a bush to avoid suffocation. The sand continued to swirl in massive amounts for nearly an hour, after which I pushed on, struggling until 10 o’clock. Around that time, I was pleasantly surprised by some bright flashes of lightning, followed by a few heavy drops of rain. Soon the sand stopped blowing, and I got off, spreading out all my clean clothes to catch the rain, which I now saw would definitely come. It rained heavily for over an hour, and I quenched my thirst by wringing and sucking on my clothes.
There being no moon, it was remarkably dark, so that I was obliged to lead my horse, and direct my way by the compass, which the lightning enabled me to observe. In this manner I travelled with tolerable expedition until past midnight, when the lightning becoming more distant, I was under the necessity of groping along, to the no small danger of my hands and eyes. About two o’clock my horse started at something, and looking round, I was not a little surprised to see a light at a short distance among the trees; and supposing it to be a town, I groped along the sand in hopes of finding corn-stalks, cotton, or other appearances of cultivation, but found none. As I approached I perceived a number of other lights in different places, and began to suspect that I had fallen upon a party of Moors. However, in my present situation, I was resolved to see who they were, if I could do it with safety. I accordingly led my horse cautiously towards the light, and heard by the lowing of the cattle and the clamorous tongues of the herdsmen, that it was a watering-place, and most likely belonged to the Moors. Delightful as the sound of the human voice was to me, I resolved once more to strike into the woods, and rather run the risk of perishing of hunger than trust myself again in their hands; but being still thirsty, and dreading the approach of the burning day, I thought it prudent to search for the wells, which I expected to find at no great distance.
With no moon out, it was really dark, so I had to lead my horse and find my way using the compass, which the lightning helped me see. I managed to move at a decent pace until after midnight, when the lightning got further away, forcing me to feel my way along, putting my hands and eyes at risk. Around two o’clock, my horse got spooked by something, and when I looked around, I was quite surprised to see a light just a short distance away among the trees; thinking it was a town, I felt my way through the sand, hoping to find corn stalks, cotton, or any signs of farming, but found nothing. As I got closer, I noticed several other lights in different spots and started to suspect I had stumbled upon a group of Moors. However, given my situation, I was determined to find out who they were if it was safe to do so. So, I carefully led my horse toward the light and heard the lowing of cattle and the loud voices of herdsmen, realizing it was a watering place, likely belonging to the Moors. As much as I appreciated the sound of human voices, I decided to venture back into the woods and would rather risk starving than put myself in their hands again; but since I was still thirsty and worried about the heat of the coming day, I thought it wise to look for wells, which I expected to find not too far away.
In this purpose I inadvertently approached so near to one of the tents as to be perceived by a woman, who immediately screamed out. Two people came running to her assistance from some of the neighbouring tents, and passed so very near to me that I thought I was discovered, and hastened again into the woods.
In this effort, I accidentally got too close to one of the tents and was noticed by a woman, who immediately yelled out. Two people came running to help her from some nearby tents and passed so close to me that I thought I was caught, so I quickly hurried back into the woods.
About a mile from this place I heard a loud and confused noise somewhere to the right of my course, and in a short time was happy to find it was the croaking of frogs, which was heavenly music to my ears. I followed the sound, and at daybreak arrived at some shallow muddy pools, so full of frogs, that it was difficult to discern the water. The noise they made frightened my horse, and I was obliged to keep them quiet, by beating the water with a branch, until he had drunk. Having here quenched my thirst, I ascended a tree, and the morning being calm, I soon perceived the smoke of the watering-place which I had passed in the night, and observed another pillar of smoke east-south-east, distant twelve or fourteen miles. Towards this I directed my route, and reached the cultivated ground a little before eleven o’clock, where, seeing a number of negroes at work planting corn, I inquired the name of the town, and was informed that it was a Foulah village belonging to Ali, called Shrilla. I had now some doubts about entering it; but my horse being very much fatigued, and the day growing hot—not to mention the pangs of hunger, which began to assail me—I resolved to venture; and accordingly rode up to the dooty’s house, where I was unfortunately denied admittance, and could not obtain even a handful of corn either for myself or horse. Turning from this inhospitable door, I rode slowly out of the town, and, perceiving some low, scattered huts without the walls, I directed my route towards them, knowing that in Africa, as well as in Europe, hospitality does not always prefer the highest dwellings. At the door of one of these huts an old motherly-looking woman sat, spinning cotton. I made signs to her that I was hungry, and inquired if she had any victuals with her in the hut. She immediately laid down her distaff, and desired me, in Arabic, to come in. When I had seated myself upon the floor, she set before me a dish of kouskous that had been left the preceding night, of which I made a tolerable meal; and in return for this kindness I gave her one of my pocket-handkerchiefs, begging at the same time a little corn for my horse, which she readily brought me.
About a mile from here, I heard a loud and chaotic noise off to my right, and I soon realized it was the croaking of frogs, which sounded like beautiful music to me. I followed the sound, and at daybreak, I arrived at some shallow muddy pools so full of frogs that it was hard to see any water. Their noise scared my horse, so I had to quiet them down by hitting the water with a stick until he was able to drink. After quenching my thirst, I climbed a tree, and since the morning was calm, I quickly spotted the smoke from the watering place I had passed the night before, along with another plume of smoke to the east-south-east, about twelve or fourteen miles away. I decided to head in that direction and reached the farmland a little before eleven o’clock. I saw a number of people working on planting corn and asked them the name of the town, learning it was a Foulah village owned by Ali, called Shrilla. I hesitated about entering; however, my horse was very tired, the day was getting hot, and I was starting to feel hungry, so I decided to risk it and rode up to the chief's house, but unfortunately, I was denied entry and couldn’t even get a handful of corn for myself or my horse. Turning away from this unwelcoming place, I rode slowly out of town and noticed some low, scattered huts outside the walls. I headed toward them, knowing that in Africa, just like in Europe, hospitality isn't always found in the biggest houses. At the entrance of one of the huts, an older, motherly woman was sitting and spinning cotton. I gestured to her that I was hungry and asked if she had any food inside. She immediately put down her distaff and kindly invited me in, speaking to me in Arabic. Once I sat on the floor, she served me a dish of kouskous that had been left over from the night before, which made for a decent meal. In return for her kindness, I gave her one of my pocket handkerchiefs and asked if she could spare a little corn for my horse, which she gladly brought me.
Whilst my horse was feeding the people began to assemble, and one of them whispered something to my hostess which very much excited her surprise. Though I was not well acquainted with the Foulah language, I soon discovered that some of the men wished to apprehend and carry me back to Ali, in hopes, I suppose, of receiving a reward. I therefore tied up the corn; and lest any one should suspect I had run away from the Moors, I took a northerly direction, and went cheerfully along, driving my horse before me, followed by all the boys and girls of the town. When I had travelled about two miles, and got quit of all my troublesome attendants, I struck again into the woods, and took shelter under a large tree, where I found it necessary to rest myself, a bundle of twigs serving me for a bed, and my saddle for a pillow.
While my horse was eating, people started to gather, and one of them whispered something to my hostess that really surprised her. Although I wasn't very familiar with the Foulah language, I quickly figured out that some of the men wanted to capture me and take me back to Ali, probably in hopes of getting a reward. So, I quickly packed up the corn; and to avoid anyone thinking I had escaped from the Moors, I headed north and moved along happily, leading my horse with all the town's boys and girls following me. After traveling about two miles and shaking off all my annoying followers, I ventured back into the woods and took shelter under a large tree, where I found it necessary to rest. I made a bed out of a bundle of twigs and used my saddle as a pillow.
July 4.—At daybreak I pursued my course through the woods as formerly; saw numbers of antelopes, wild hogs, and ostriches, but the soil was more hilly, and not so fertile as I had found it the preceding day. About eleven o’clock I ascended an eminence, where I climbed a tree, and discovered, at about eight miles’ distance, an open part of the country, with several red spots, which I concluded were cultivated land, and, directing my course that way, came to the precincts of a watering-place about one o’clock. From the appearance of the place, I judged it to belong to the Foulahs, and was hopeful that I should meet a better reception than I had experienced at Shrilla. In this I was not deceived, for one of the shepherds invited me to come into his tent and partake of some dates. This was one of those low Foulah tents in which there is room just sufficient to sit upright, and in which the family, the furniture, &c., seem huddled together like so many articles in a chest. When I had crept upon my hands and knees into this humble habitation, I found that it contained a woman and three children, who, together with the shepherd and myself, completely occupied the floor. A dish of boiled corn and dates was produced, and the master of the family, as is customary in this part of the country, first tasted it himself, and then desired me to follow his example. Whilst I was eating, the children kept their eyes fixed upon me, and no sooner did the shepherd pronounce the word Nazarani, than they began to cry, and their mother crept slowly towards the door, out of which she sprang like a greyhound, and was instantly followed by her children. So frightened were they at the very name of a Christian, that no entreaties could induce them to approach the tent. Here I purchased some corn for my horse, in exchange for some brass buttons, and having thanked the shepherd for his hospitality, struck again into the woods. At sunset I came to a road that took the direction for Bambarra, and resolved to follow it for the night; but about eight o’clock, hearing some people coming from the southward, I thought it prudent to hide myself among some thick bushes near the road. As these thickets are generally full of wild beasts, I found my situation rather unpleasant, sitting in the dark, holding my horse by the nose with both hands, to prevent him from neighing, and equally afraid of the natives without and the wild beasts within. My fears, however, were soon dissipated; for the people, after looking round the thicket, and perceiving nothing, went away, and I hastened to the more open parts of the wood, where I pursued my journey east-south-east, until past midnight, when the joyful cry of frogs induced me once more to deviate a little from my route, in order to quench my thirst. Having accomplished this from a large pool of rain-water, I sought for an open place, with a single tree in the midst, under which I made my bed for the night. I was disturbed by some wolves towards morning, which induced me to set forward a little before day; and having passed a small village called Wassalita, I came about ten o’clock (July 5th), to a negro town called Wawra, which properly belongs to Kaarta, but was at this time tributary to Mansong, King of Bambarra.
July 4.—At daybreak, I continued my journey through the woods as before; I saw many antelopes, wild pigs, and ostriches, but the terrain was hillier and less fertile than it had been the day before. Around eleven o'clock, I climbed a hill and went up a tree, where I spotted an open area about eight miles away, with several red patches that I guessed were farmland. I set my course that way and reached a watering hole around one o'clock. From the look of the place, I believed it belonged to the Foulahs and hoped for a warmer welcome than I had at Shrilla. I was not disappointed; one of the shepherds invited me into his tent to share some dates. This was one of those low Foulah tents where there was barely enough room to sit up, and everything—the family, the furniture, etc.—seemed crammed together like items in a box. After crawling on my hands and knees into this humble space, I found it held a woman and three children, who, along with the shepherd and me, filled the floor completely. A dish of boiled corn and dates was served, and as is customary in this area, the head of the family tasted it first before asking me to do the same. While I ate, the children stared at me intently, and as soon as the shepherd said the word Nazarani, they began to cry. Their mother slowly made her way to the door and suddenly bolted out like a greyhound, her children following right after. They were so scared at the mere mention of a Christian that no amount of coaxing could get them to come near the tent. I bought some corn for my horse in exchange for some brass buttons, thanked the shepherd for his hospitality, and ventured back into the woods. At sunset, I found a road leading to Bambarra and decided to stay on it for the night; however, around eight o'clock, hearing voices coming from the south, I thought it wise to hide among some thick bushes off the road. As these thickets are usually teeming with wild animals, I felt quite uneasy sitting in the dark, holding my horse's nose to keep it from neighing, while being equally scared of the people outside and the beasts inside. My fears, though, quickly faded as the people, after searching the thicket and finding nothing, left. I made my way to clearer parts of the woods and continued my east-south-east journey past midnight. The cheerful noise of frogs tempted me to stray a bit so I could quench my thirst. After drinking from a large pool of rainwater, I looked for an open spot with a single tree in the center, where I made my bed for the night. I was disturbed by some wolves early in the morning, which prompted me to set off before dawn. After passing a small village called Wassalita, I reached a town called Wawra around ten o’clock (July 5th), which technically belonged to Kaarta but was currently under the rule of Mansong, King of Bambarra.
CHAPTER XV.
BLACK CURIOSITY; A MESSAGE FROM THE KING.
Wawra is a small town surrounded with high walls, and inhabited by a mixture of Mandingoes and Foulahs. The inhabitants employ themselves chiefly in cultivating corn, which they exchange with the Moors for salt. Here, being in security from the Moors, and very much fatigued, I resolved to rest myself; and meeting with a hearty welcome from the dooty, whose name was Flancharee, I laid myself down upon a bullock’s hide, and slept soundly for about two hours. The curiosity of the people would not allow me to sleep any longer. They had seen my saddle and bridle, and were assembled in great numbers to learn who I was and whence I came. Some were of opinion that I was an Arab; others insisted that I was some Moorish Sultan, and they continued to debate the matter with such warmth that the noise awoke me. The dooty (who had formerly been at Gambia) at last interposed in my behalf, and assured them that I was certainly a white man; but he was convinced from my appearance that I was a poor one.
Wawra is a small town surrounded by high walls, home to a mix of Mandingoes and Foulahs. The locals mainly work on growing corn, which they trade with the Moors for salt. Here, feeling safe from the Moors and quite exhausted, I decided to rest. I received a warm welcome from the dooty, named Flancharee, and laid down on a bullock's hide, sleeping soundly for about two hours. However, the curiosity of the people prevented me from sleeping longer. They had seen my saddle and bridle and had gathered in large numbers to figure out who I was and where I came from. Some thought I was an Arab; others insisted I was a Moorish Sultan, and they debated this so energetically that the noise woke me up. The dooty, who had previously been to Gambia, eventually stepped in to defend me, assuring them that I was definitely a white man, but he was convinced from my appearance that I was not wealthy.
July 6.—It rained very much in the night, and at daylight I departed in company with a negro who was going to a town called Dingyee for corn; but we had not proceeded above a mile before the ass upon which he rode threw him off, and he returned, leaving me to prosecute the journey by myself.
July 6.—It rained a lot during the night, and at daylight I set out with a Black man who was heading to a town called Dingyee for corn. But we hadn't gone more than a mile when the donkey he was riding threw him off, and he went back, leaving me to continue the journey on my own.
I reached Dingyee about noon, but the dooty and most of the inhabitants had gone into the fields to cultivate corn. An old Foulah, observing me wandering about the town, desired me to come to his hut, where I was well entertained; and the dooty, when he returned, sent me some victuals for myself and corn for my horse.
I arrived in Dingyee around noon, but the chief and most of the people had gone out to the fields to grow corn. An older Foulah saw me wandering around town and invited me to his hut, where I was treated well; and when the chief returned, he sent me some food for myself and corn for my horse.
July 7.—In the morning, when I was about to depart, my landlord, with a great deal of diffidence, begged me to give him a lock of my hair. He had been told, he said, that white men’s hair made a saphie that would give to the possessor all the knowledge of white men. I had never before heard of so simple a mode of education, but instantly complied with the request.
July 7.—In the morning, just as I was about to leave, my landlord, with a lot of hesitation, asked me for a lock of my hair. He mentioned that he had heard that white men’s hair could be turned into a sapphire that would grant the owner all the knowledge of white men. I had never encountered such a straightforward method of learning before, but I immediately agreed to his request.
I reached a small town called Wassiboo, about twelve o’clock, where I was obliged to stop until an opportunity should offer of procuring a guide to Satilé, which is distant a very long day’s journey, through woods without any beaten path. I accordingly took up my residence at the dooty’s house, where I stayed four days, during which time I amused myself by going to the fields with the family to plant corn. Cultivation is carried on here on a very extensive scale; and, as the natives themselves express it, “Hunger is never known.” In cultivating the soil the men and women work together. They use a large sharp hoe, much superior to that used in Gambia, but they are obliged, for fear of the Moors, to carry their arms with them to the field. The master, with the handle of his spear, marks the field into regular plats, one of which is assigned to every three slaves.
I arrived in a small town called Wassiboo around noon, where I had to wait until I could find a guide to Satilé, which is a very long day's journey through unmarked woods. I ended up staying at the dooty's house for four days, during which I spent my time helping the family plant corn in the fields. Farming is done on a very large scale here, and as the locals say, “Hunger is never known.” Men and women work together in the fields. They use a large, sharp hoe that's much better than the ones used in Gambia, but they have to carry weapons with them for protection from the Moors. The master uses the handle of his spear to divide the field into regular plots, with each plot assigned to every three slaves.
On the evening of the 11th eight of the fugitive Kaartans arrived at Wassiboo. They had found it impossible to live under the tyrannical government of the Moors, and were now going to transfer their allegiance to the King of Bambarra. They offered to take me along with them as far as Satilé, and I accepted the offer.
On the evening of the 11th, eight of the escapees from Kaarta arrived at Wassiboo. They had found it impossible to live under the oppressive rule of the Moors and were now planning to pledge their loyalty to the King of Bambarra. They invited me to join them as far as Satilé, and I agreed to go.
July 12.—At daybreak we set out, and travelled with uncommon expedition until sunset. We stopped only twice in the course of the day, once at a watering-place in the woods, and at another time at the ruins of a town formerly belonging to Daisy, called Illa-compe (the corn-town). When we arrived in the neighbourhood of Satilé, the people who were employed in the corn-fields, seeing so many horsemen, took us for a party of Moors, and ran screaming away from us. The whole town was instantly alarmed, and the slaves were seen in every direction driving the cattle and horses towards the town. It was in vain that one of our company galloped up to undeceive them; it only frightened them the more; and when we arrived at the town we found the gates shut, and the people all under arms. After a long parley we were permitted to enter, and, as there was every appearance of a tornado, the dooty allowed us to sleep in his baloon, and gave us each a bullock’s hide for a bed.
July 12.—At dawn, we set off and traveled at an impressive pace until sunset. We only stopped twice during the day: once at a watering spot in the woods, and another time at the ruins of a town that once belonged to Daisy, called Illa-compe (the corn-town). When we got close to Satilé, the people working in the cornfields, seeing so many horsemen, mistook us for a group of Moors and ran away screaming. The entire town was quickly put on alert, and we saw slaves everywhere herding the cattle and horses back to the town. One of our group rode up to clarify the situation, but it only scared them more. By the time we reached the town, we found the gates shut and everyone armed. After a lengthy discussion, we were allowed to enter, and since a storm was brewing, the dooty let us stay in his baloon and gave each of us a bullock’s hide to sleep on.
July 13.—Early in the morning we again set forward. The roads were wet and slippery, but the country was very beautiful, abounding with rivulets, which were increased by the rain into rapid streams. About ten o’clock we came to-the ruins of a village which had been destroyed by war about six months before.
July 13.—Early in the morning, we set out again. The roads were wet and slippery, but the scenery was stunning, filled with streams that had swelled from the rain. Around ten o’clock, we arrived at the ruins of a village that had been destroyed by war about six months earlier.
About noon my horse was so much fatigued that I could not keep up with my companions; I therefore dismounted, and desired them to ride on, telling them that I would follow as soon as my horse had rested a little. But I found them unwilling to leave me; the lions, they said, were very numerous in those parts, and though they might not so readily attack a body of people, they would soon find out an individual; it was therefore agreed that one of the company should stay with me to assist in driving my horse, while the others passed on to Galloo to procure lodgings, and collect grass for the horses before night. Accompanied by this worthy negro, I drove my horse before me until about four o’clock, when we came in sight of Galloo, a considerable town, standing in a fertile and beautiful valley surrounded with high rocks.
Around noon, my horse was so worn out that I couldn't keep pace with my friends. So, I got off and asked them to go ahead, telling them I'd catch up as soon as my horse had rested a bit. However, they were hesitant to leave me alone. They mentioned that there were a lot of lions in the area, and while they might not easily attack a group, they could quickly spot an individual. So, we decided that one of the group would stay with me to help manage my horse while the others headed to Galloo to find a place to stay and gather grass for the horses before nightfall. With this dependable guy, I led my horse along until about four o’clock when we finally saw Galloo, a sizable town sitting in a lush and lovely valley surrounded by tall rocks.
Early next morning (July 14th), having first returned many thanks to our landlord for his hospitality, while my fellow-travellers offered up their prayers that he might never want, we set forward, and about three o’clock arrived at Moorja, a large town, famous for its trade in salt, which the Moors bring here in great quantities, to exchange for corn and cotton cloth. As most of the people here are Mohammedans, it is not allowed to the kafirs to drink beer, which they call neodollo (corn spirit), except in certain houses. In one of these I saw about twenty people sitting round large vessels of this beer with the greatest conviviality, many of them in a state of intoxication.
Early the next morning (July 14th), after thanking our host for his hospitality, while my fellow travelers prayed that he would never go without, we set off and arrived in Moorja around three o’clock. Moorja is a large town known for its salt trade, which the Moors bring in large quantities to exchange for corn and cotton cloth. Since most of the people here are Muslims, non-believers aren’t allowed to drink beer, which they call neodollo (corn spirit), except in certain places. In one of these, I saw about twenty people gathered around large vessels of this beer, enjoying themselves, with many of them visibly intoxicated.
On the morning of the 16th we again set forward, accompanied by a coffle of fourteen asses, loaded with salt, bound for Sansanding. The road was particularly romantic, between two rocky hills; but the Moors sometimes lie in wait here to plunder strangers. As soon as we had reached the open country the master of the salt coffle thanked us for having stayed with him so long, and now desired us to ride on. The sun was almost set before we reached Datliboo. In the evening we had a most tremendous tornado. The house in which we lodged being flat-roofed, admitted the rain in streams; the floor was soon ankle-deep, the fire extinguished, and we were left to pass the night upon some bundles of firewood that happened to lie in a corner.
On the morning of the 16th, we set off again, joined by a group of fourteen donkeys carrying salt, headed for Sansanding. The landscape was quite picturesque, nestled between two rocky hills; however, the Moors sometimes lurked here to rob travelers. Once we reached the open terrain, the owner of the salt donkey train expressed his gratitude for our company and urged us to continue on. The sun was nearly down by the time we arrived in Datliboo. That evening, we were hit by a fierce tornado. The house we stayed in had a flat roof, so rain poured in like a waterfall; soon the floor was ankle-deep in water, the fire was put out, and we were left to spend the night on some bundles of firewood that happened to be in a corner.
July 17.—We departed from Datliboo, and about ten o’clock passed a large coffle returning from Sego with corn-hoes, mats, and other household utensils. At five o’clock we came to a large village where we intended to pass the night, but the dooty would not receive us. When we departed from this place my horse was so much fatigued that I was under the necessity of driving him, and it was dark before we reached Fanimboo, a small village, the dooty of which no sooner heard that I was a white man than he brought out three old muskets, and was much disappointed when he was told that I could not repair them.
July 17.—We left Datliboo, and around ten o’clock, we saw a large group coming back from Sego loaded with corn-hoes, mats, and other household items. By five o’clock, we arrived at a big village where we planned to stay the night, but the leader refused to accommodate us. When we left this place, my horse was so exhausted that I had to drive him, and it was dark by the time we got to Fanimboo, a small village. As soon as the leader found out I was a white man, he brought out three old muskets, looking disappointed when I told him I couldn’t fix them.
July 18.—We continued our journey, but, owing to a light supper the preceding night we felt ourselves rather hungry this morning, and endeavoured to procure some corn at a village, but without success.
July 18.—We continued our journey, but since we had a light supper the night before, we felt pretty hungry this morning and tried to get some corn at a village, but we were unsuccessful.
My horse becoming weaker and weaker every day, was now of very little service to me; I was obliged to drive him before me for the greater part of the day, and did not reach Geosorro until eight o’clock in the evening. I found my companions wrangling with the dooty, who had absolutely refused to give or sell them any provisions; and as none of us had tasted victuals for the last twenty-four hours, we were by no means disposed to fast another day if we could help it. But finding our entreaties without effect, and being very much fatigued, I fell asleep, from which I was awakened about midnight with the joyful information Kinne nata! (“The victuals are come”) This made the remainder of the night pass away pleasantly, and at daybreak, July 19th, we resumed our journey, proposing to stop at a village called Doolinkeaboo for the night following. My fellow-travellers, having better horses than myself, soon left me, and I was walking barefoot, driving my horse, when I was met by a coffle of slaves, about seventy in number, coming from Sego. They were tied together by their necks with thongs of a bullock’s hide, twisted like a rope—seven slaves upon a thong, and a man with a musket between every seven. Many of the slaves were ill-conditioned, and a great number of them women. In the rear came Sidi Mahomed’s servant, whom I remembered to have seen at the camp of Benowm. He presently knew me, and told me that these slaves were going to Morocco by the way of Ludamar and the Great Desert.
My horse was getting weaker every day and was now barely useful to me. I had to push him ahead of me for most of the day, and I didn’t reach Geosorro until eight o’clock in the evening. I found my companions arguing with the dooty, who had flat-out refused to give or sell them any food. Since none of us had eaten in the last twenty-four hours, we really didn’t want to go another day without eating if we could avoid it. But when our pleas didn’t work and we were very tired, I fell asleep. I was awakened around midnight with the exciting news Kinne nata! (“The food is here”). This made the rest of the night enjoyable, and at daybreak on July 19th, we continued our journey, planning to stop at a village called Doolinkeaboo for the night. My travel companions had better horses than mine, so they quickly left me behind. I was walking barefoot, driving my horse, when I encountered a group of about seventy slaves coming from Sego. They were tied together by their necks with strips of bullock hide, twisted like rope—seven slaves on one strip, with a man holding a musket between every seven. Many of the slaves looked unhealthy, and a lot of them were women. At the back of the group was Sidi Mahomed’s servant, whom I recalled seeing at the camp of Benowm. He recognized me right away and informed me that these slaves were being taken to Morocco via Ludamar and the Great Desert.
In the afternoon, as I approached Doolinkeaboo, I met about twenty Moors on horseback, the owners of the slaves I had seen in the morning. They were well armed with muskets, and were very inquisitive concerning me, but not so rude as their countrymen generally are. From them I learned that Sidi Mahomed was not at Sego, but had gone to Kancaba for gold-dust.
In the afternoon, as I got closer to Doolinkeaboo, I came across around twenty Moors on horseback, the owners of the slaves I had seen in the morning. They were well-armed with muskets and were quite curious about me, but not as disrespectful as their fellow countrymen usually are. From them, I found out that Sidi Mahomed was not in Sego but had gone to Kancaba for gold dust.
When I arrived at Doolinkeaboo I was informed that my fellow-travellers had gone on, but my horse was so much fatigued that I could not possibly proceed after them. The dooty of the town at my request gave me a draught of water, which is generally looked upon as an earnest of greater hospitality, and I had no doubt of making up for the toils of the day by a good supper and a sound sleep; unfortunately, I had neither the one nor the other. The night was rainy and tempestuous, and the dooty limited his hospitality to the draught of water.
When I got to Doolinkeaboo, I was told that my fellow travelers had moved on, but my horse was too worn out for me to continue after them. The town's dooty gave me a glass of water at my request, which is usually seen as a sign of greater hospitality, and I figured I’d make up for the hard day with a nice dinner and a good night's sleep; unfortunately, I ended up with neither. The night was rainy and stormy, and the dooty’s hospitality didn't go beyond the glass of water.
July 20.—In the morning I endeavoured, both by entreaties and threats, to procure some victuals from the dooty, but in vain. I even begged some corn from one of his female slaves, as she was washing it at the well, and had the mortification to be refused. However, when the dooty was gone to the fields, his wife sent me a handful of meal, which I mixed with water and drank for breakfast. About eight o’clock I departed from Doolinkeaboo, and at noon stopped a few minutes at a large korree, where I had some milk given me by the Foulahs, and hearing that two negroes were going from thence to Sega, I was happy to have their company, and we set out immediately. About four o’clock we stopped at a small village, where one of the negroes met with an acquaintance, who invited us to a sort of public entertainment, which was conducted with more than common propriety. A dish, made of sour milk and meal, called sinkatoo, and beer made from their corn, was distributed with great liberality, and the women were admitted into the society, a circumstance I had never before observed in Africa. There was no compulsion—every one was at liberty to drink as he pleased—they nodded to each other when about to drink, and on setting down the calabash commonly said Berka (“Thank you”). Both men and women appeared to be somewhat intoxicated, but they were far from being quarrelsome.
July 20.—In the morning, I tried, both by begging and threatening, to get some food from the dooty, but it was useless. I even asked one of his female slaves for some corn while she was washing it at the well, and got the embarrassment of being turned down. However, when the dooty went out to the fields, his wife sent me a handful of meal, which I mixed with water and drank for breakfast. Around eight o’clock, I left Doolinkeaboo, and at noon I paused for a few minutes at a large korree, where the Foulahs gave me some milk. Hearing that two men were heading from there to Sega, I was glad to join them, and we set off right away. Around four o’clock, we stopped at a small village, where one of the men met a friend who invited us to a kind of public gathering, which was conducted with more than usual decorum. A dish made from sour milk and meal, called sinkatoo, along with beer made from their corn, was generously shared, and the women were included in the gathering, something I had never seen before in Africa. There was no pressure—everyone could drink as they wanted—they nodded to one another before taking a drink, and when setting down the calabash, they often said Berka (“Thank you”). Both men and women seemed a bit tipsy but were far from being aggressive.
Departing from thence, we passed several large villages, where I was constantly taken for a Moor and became the subject of much merriment to the Bambarrans, who, seeing me drive my horse before me, laughed heartily at my appearance. “He has been at Mecca,” says one, “you may see that by his clothes;” another asked me if my horse was sick; a third wished to purchase it, &c., so that, I believe, the very slaves were ashamed to be seen in my company. Just before it was dark we took up our lodging for the night at a small village, where I procured some victuals for myself and some corn for my horse, at the moderate price of a button; and was told that I should see the Niger (which the negroes call Joliba, or the Great Water) early the next day. The lions are here very numerous; the gates are shut a little after sunset, and nobody allowed to go out. The thoughts of seeing the Niger in the morning, and the troublesome buzzing of mosquitoes, prevented me from shutting my eyes during the night; and I had saddled my horse, and was in readiness before daylight, but, on account of the wild beasts, we were obliged to wait until the people were stirring and the gates opened. This happened to be a market day at Sego, and the roads were everywhere filled with people carrying different articles to sell. We passed four large villages, and at eight o’clock saw the smoke over Sego.
Leaving there, we passed several large villages, where people constantly mistook me for a Moor and made a lot of jokes at my expense. Seeing me drive my horse in front of me, the Bambarrans laughed heartily at my appearance. “He’s just back from Mecca,” one said, “you can tell by his clothes;” another asked if my horse was sick; a third wanted to buy it, and so on, so much so that even the slaves seemed embarrassed to be seen with me. Just before dark, we settled in for the night at a small village, where I managed to get some food for myself and corn for my horse for the reasonable price of a button. I was told I would see the Niger (which the locals call Joliba, or the Great Water) early the next day. There are many lions here; the gates close shortly after sunset, and no one is allowed out. The thought of seeing the Niger in the morning, paired with the annoying buzzing of mosquitoes, kept me from sleeping all night. I had saddled my horse and was ready before dawn, but due to the wild animals, we had to wait until the townspeople woke up and opened the gates. It happened to be market day in Sego, and the roads were filled with people carrying various goods to sell. We passed four large villages, and at eight o’clock, we saw the smoke rising over Sego.
As we approached the town I was fortunate enough to overtake the fugitive Kaartans, to whose kindness I had been so much indebted in my journey through Bambarra. They readily agreed to introduce me to the king; and we rode together through some marshy ground, where, as I was anxiously looking around for the river, one of them called out, Geo affili! (“See the water!”) and, looking forwards, I saw with infinite pleasure the great object of my mission—the long-sought-for majestic Niger, glittering in the morning sun, as broad as the Thames at Westminster, and flowing slowly to the eastward. I hastened to the brink, and having drunk of the water, lifted up my fervent thanks in prayer to the Great Ruler of all things for having thus far crowned my endeavours with success.
As we got closer to the town, I was lucky enough to catch up with the fleeing Kaartans, to whom I owed so much during my trip through Bambarra. They quickly agreed to take me to the king, and we rode together across some marshy land. As I anxiously scanned the area for the river, one of them shouted, Geo affili! (“Look at the water!”) Looking ahead, I felt an incredible sense of joy as I finally spotted the main goal of my journey—the long-awaited majestic Niger, shining in the morning sun, as wide as the Thames at Westminster, and moving slowly to the east. I rushed to the edge, drank from the water, and offered my heartfelt thanks in prayer to the Great Ruler of all things for blessing my efforts with success so far.
The circumstance of the Niger’s flowing towards the east, and its collateral points, did not, however, excite my surprise, for, although I had left Europe in great hesitation on this subject, and rather believed that it ran in the contrary direction, I had made such frequent inquiries during my progress concerning this river, and received from the negroes of different nations such clear and decisive assurances that its general course was towards the rising sun, as scarce left any doubt on my mind, and more especially as I knew that Major Houghton had collected similar information in the same manner.
The fact that the Niger flows east and its related points didn’t really surprise me. Even though I had left Europe unsure about this, and had thought it flowed the other way, I had asked so many questions during my journey about this river and received such clear and confident answers from the local people of different nations that it left little doubt in my mind. This was especially true since I knew that Major Houghton had gathered similar information in the same way.
Sego, the capital of Bambarra, at which I had now arrived, consists, properly speaking, of four distinct towns—two on the northern bank of the Niger, called Sego Korro and Sego Boo; and two on the southern bank, called Sego Soo Korro and Sego See Korro. They are all surrounded with high mud walls. The houses are built of clay, of a square form with flat roofs—some of them have two storeys, and many of them are whitewashed. Besides these buildings, Moorish mosques are seen in every quarter; and the streets, though narrow, are broad enough for every useful purpose, in a country where wheel carriages are entirely unknown. From the best inquiries I could make, I have reason to believe that Sego contains altogether about thirty thousand inhabitants. The King of Bambarra constantly resides at Sego See Korro. He employs a great many slaves in conveying people over the river, and the money they receive (though the fare is only ten kowrie shells for each individual) furnishes a considerable revenue to the king in the course of a year. The canoes are of a singular construction, each of them being formed of the trunks of two large trees rendered concave, and joined together, not side by side, but endways—the junction being exactly across the middle of the canoe: they are therefore very long, and disproportionably narrow, and have neither decks nor masts: they are, however, very roomy, for I observed in one of them four horses and several people crossing over the river. When we arrived at this ferry, with a view to pass over to that part of the town in which the king resides, we found a great number waiting for a passage: they looked at me with silent wonder, and I distinguished with concern many Moors among them. There were three different places of embarkation, and the ferrymen were very diligent and expeditious; but from the crowd of people I could not immediately obtain a passage, and sat down upon the bank of the river to wait for a more favourable opportunity. The view of this extensive city—the numerous canoes upon the river—the crowded population, and the cultivated state of the surrounding country—formed altogether a prospect of civilisation and magnificence which I little expected to find in the bosom of Africa.
Sego, the capital of Bambarra, where I had just arrived, is actually made up of four distinct towns—two on the north bank of the Niger, called Sego Korro and Sego Boo; and two on the south bank, called Sego Soo Korro and Sego See Korro. They are all surrounded by high mud walls. The houses are made of clay, square in shape with flat roofs—some have two stories, and many are whitewashed. In addition to these buildings, Moorish mosques can be found in every area; the streets, though narrow, are wide enough for all practical purposes in a place where wheeled vehicles are completely unknown. From what I could gather, I believe Sego has about thirty thousand residents. The King of Bambarra always lives in Sego See Korro. He employs a lot of slaves to ferry people across the river, and the fares they collect (just ten kowrie shells per person) provide a significant income for the king throughout the year. The canoes are uniquely designed, made from the trunks of two large trees hollowed out and joined together end to end—not side by side—making them very long and disproportionately narrow, without decks or masts. However, they are quite spacious; I noticed one carrying four horses and several people across the river. When we reached the ferry to cross to the part of town where the king lives, we found a large crowd waiting to board: they looked at me with silent curiosity, and I was worried to see many Moors among them. There were three different embarkation points, and the ferrymen were very active and quick; however, because of the crowd, I couldn’t get a ride immediately, so I sat down by the riverbank to wait for a better chance. The view of this vast city—the numerous canoes on the river—the bustling population, and the well-cultivated surrounding land—all combined to create a scene of civilization and grandeur that I never expected to find in the heart of Africa.
I waited more than two hours without having an opportunity of crossing the river, during which time the people who had crossed carried information to Mansong, the king, that a white man was waiting for a passage, and was coming to see him. He immediately sent over one of his chief men, who informed me that the king could not possibly see me until he knew what had brought me into his country; and that I must not presume to cross the river without the king’s permission. He therefore advised me to lodge at a distant village, to which he pointed, for the night, and said that in the morning he would give me further instructions how to conduct myself. This was very discouraging. However, as there was no remedy, I set off for the village, where I found, to my great mortification, that no person would admit me into his house. I was regarded with astonishment and fear, and was obliged to sit all day without victuals in the shade of a tree; and the night threatened to be very uncomfortable—for the wind rose, and there was great appearance of a heavy rain—and the wild beasts are so very numerous in the neighbourhood that I should have been under the necessity of climbing up a tree and resting amongst the branches. About sunset, however, as I was preparing to pass the night in this manner, and had turned my horse loose that he might graze at liberty, a woman, returning from the labours of the field, stopped to observe me, and perceiving that I was weary and dejected, inquired into my situation, which I briefly explained to her; whereupon, with looks of great compassion, she took up my saddle and bridle, and told me to follow her. Having conducted me into her hut, she lighted up a lamp, spread a mat on the floor, and told me I might remain there for the night. Finding that I was very hungry, she said she would procure me something to eat. She accordingly went out, and returned in a short time with a very fine fish, which, having caused to be half broiled upon some embers, she gave me for supper. The rites of hospitality being thus performed towards a stranger in distress, my worthy benefactress (pointing to the mat, and telling me I might sleep there without apprehension) called to the female part of her family, who had stood gazing on me all the while in fixed astonishment, to resume their task of spinning cotton, in which they continued to employ themselves great part of the night. They lightened their labour by songs, one of which was composed extempore, for I was myself the subject of it. It was sung by one of the young women, the rest joining in a sort of chorus. The air was sweet and plaintive, and the words, literally translated, were these:—“The winds roared, and the rains fell. The poor white man, faint and weary, came and sat under our tree. He has no mother to bring him milk, no wife to grind his corn. Chorus.—Let us pity the white man, no mother has he,” &c. &c. Trifling as this recital may appear to the reader, to a person in my situation the circumstance was affecting in the highest degree. I was oppressed by such unexpected kindness, and sleep fled from my eyes. In the morning I presented my compassionate landlady with two of the four brass buttons which remained on my waistcoat—the only recompense I could make her.
I waited over two hours without a chance to cross the river. During that time, the people who had crossed informed Mansong, the king, that a white man was waiting to see him. He immediately sent one of his top men to tell me that the king couldn’t see me until he understood why I was in his country and that I shouldn’t try to cross the river without the king’s permission. He advised me to stay in a distant village for the night and said he would give me more instructions in the morning. This was very discouraging. However, with no other option, I set off for the village, where I found, to my great embarrassment, that no one would let me into their house. I was met with astonishment and fear and had to sit all day without food in the shade of a tree. The night looked like it would be very uncomfortable—the wind picked up, and it seemed like heavy rain was coming—and there were so many wild animals nearby that I might have had to climb a tree to rest among the branches. However, as the sun was setting and I was preparing to spend the night this way, having let my horse roam to graze, a woman returning from working in the fields stopped to watch me. Seeing that I was tired and sad, she asked about my situation, which I briefly explained. With great compassion, she picked up my saddle and bridle and told me to follow her. She took me to her hut, lit a lamp, spread a mat on the floor, and told me I could stay there for the night. Realizing I was very hungry, she said she would get me something to eat. She went out and returned shortly with a very nice fish, which she half-grilled over some embers and gave me for supper. After showing me this kindness as a stranger in need, my kind hostess pointed to the mat and told me I could sleep there without worry. She then called to the women in her family, who had been watching me in fixed amazement, to get back to spinning cotton, which they continued to do for much of the night. They lightened their work with songs, one of which was made up on the spot, and I was the subject of it. One of the young women sang it while the others joined in a sort of chorus. The tune was sweet and sad, and the words, literally translated, were: “The winds roared, and the rains fell. The poor white man, faint and weary, came and sat under our tree. He has no mother to bring him milk, no wife to grind his corn. Chorus—Let us pity the white man, no mother has he,” etc. Although this may seem trivial to the reader, for someone in my situation, it was very moving. I was overwhelmed by such unexpected kindness, and sleep eluded me. In the morning, I gave my compassionate landlady two of the four brass buttons that were left on my waistcoat—the only payment I could offer her.
July 21.—I continued in the village all this day in conversation with the natives, who came in crowds to see me, but was rather uneasy towards evening to find that no message had arrived from the king, the more so as the people began to whisper that Mansong had received some very unfavourable accounts of me from the Moors and slatees residing at Sego, who, it seems, were exceedingly suspicious concerning the motives of my journey. I learned that many consultations had been held with the king concerning my reception and disposal; and some of the villagers frankly told me that I had many enemies, and must expect no favour.
July 21.—I spent the whole day in the village talking to the locals, who came in droves to see me, but I started to feel uneasy in the evening when no message had come from the king. It made me even more anxious when I heard people whispering that Mansong had received some very bad reports about me from the Moors and slatees living in Sego, who were clearly very suspicious of my reasons for being there. I found out that there had been many discussions with the king about how to deal with me; some of the villagers honestly told me that I had a lot of enemies and shouldn't expect any kindness.
July 22.—About eleven o’clock a messenger arrived from the king, but he gave me very little satisfaction. He inquired particularly if I had brought any present, and seemed much disappointed when he was told that I had been robbed of everything by the Moors. When I proposed to go along with him, he told me to stop until the afternoon, when the king would send for me.
July 22.—Around eleven o’clock, a messenger from the king arrived, but he didn't give me much satisfaction. He asked specifically if I had brought a gift and seemed really let down when I told him that the Moors had stolen everything from me. When I suggested going with him, he told me to wait until the afternoon when the king would send for me.
July 23.—In the afternoon another messenger arrived from Mansong, with a bag in his hands. He told me it was the king’s pleasure that I should depart forthwith from the vicinage of Sego; but that Mansong, wishing to relieve a white man in distress, had sent me five thousand kowries, to enable me to purchase provisions in the course of my journey: the messenger added, that if my intentions were really to proceed to Jenné, he had orders to accompany me as a guide to Sansanding. I was at first puzzled to account for this behaviour of the king; but from the conversation I had with the guide, I had afterwards reason to believe that Mansong would willingly have admitted me into his presence at Sego, but was apprehensive he might not be able to protect me against the blind and inveterate malice of the Moorish inhabitants. His conduct, therefore, was at once prudent and liberal. The circumstances under which I made my appearance at Sego were undoubtedly such as might create in the mind of the king a well-warranted suspicion that I wished to conceal the true object of my journey. He argued, probably, as my guide argued, who, when he was told that I had come from a great distance, and through many dangers, to behold the Joliba river, naturally inquired if there were no rivers in my own country, and whether one river was not like another. Notwithstanding this, and in spite of the jealous machinations of the Moors, this benevolent prince thought it sufficient that a white man was found in his dominions, in a condition of extreme wretchedness, and that no other plea was necessary to entitle the sufferer to his bounty.
July 23.—In the afternoon, another messenger arrived from Mansong, holding a bag. He told me that the king wanted me to leave the area around Sego immediately; however, Mansong, wanting to help a white man in distress, had sent me five thousand kowries to buy food for my journey. The messenger also mentioned that if I truly intended to go to Jenné, he had been instructed to guide me to Sansanding. I was initially confused by the king's actions, but after talking with the guide, I came to believe that Mansong would have been open to meeting me in Sego but was concerned about his ability to protect me from the hostility of the Moorish locals. His actions, therefore, were both wise and generous. The situation in which I arrived at Sego likely led the king to reasonably suspect that I was trying to hide the real purpose of my trip. He probably thought, as my guide did, who noted that since I had traveled from far away and faced many dangers to see the Joliba river, he wondered if there were no rivers in my own country and whether one river wasn’t like another. Despite this, and despite the jealous schemes of the Moors, this kind-hearted prince believed it was enough that a white man was found in his territory, in a state of extreme misery, and that no other justification was needed for him to help.
FOOTNOTES
[41] I believe that similar charms or amulets, under the names of domini, grigri, fetich, &c., are common in all parts of Africa.
[41] I think that similar charms or amulets, known as domini, grigri, fetich, etc., are found throughout Africa.
[70] Maana is within a short distance of the ruins of Fort St. Joseph, on the Senegal river, formerly a French factory.
[70] Maana is located close to the ruins of Fort St. Joseph, situated on the Senegal River, which used to be a French trading post.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!